MuseScore 3 handbook

Transcript

1 Handbook Downloaded from musescore.org on May 11 2019 Released under Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike

2 GETTING STARTED 18 LEARNING MUSESCORE 18 Tours 18 Getting Started score 18 Video tutorials 19 Other tutorials 19 Videos 19 GET SUPPORT 19 19 Handbook Context help 19 Forums 19 How To's 19 Post a question 20 Report a bug 20 INSTALLATION 20 Installation 20 20 Initial preferences INSTALL ON WINDOWS 23 23 Install Start MuseScore 26 Uninstall 26 Troubleshooting 26 External links 26 INSTALL ON MACOS 27 Install 27 Uninstall 27 27 Install with Apple Remote Desktop External links 27 INSTALL ON LINUX 27 AppImage 28 Step 1 - Download 28 28 Step 2 - Give execute permission Step 3 - Run it! 28 28 Installing the AppImage (optional) 29 Using command line options 29 Distribution Packages 29 Fedora External links 29 INSTALL ON CHROMEBOOK 29 Desktop program 29 Android app (playback only) 30 External links 30 LANGUAGE, TRANSLATIONS, AND EXTENSIONS 30 Change language 30 Resource Manager 30 Install/uninstall extension 31 31 Update translations See also 31 External links 31 CHECKING FOR UPDATES 31 Automated update check 32 Check for update 32 See also 32 BASICS 32 CREATE A NEW SCORE 32 Start Center 32 Create new score 33 Enter score information 33 Choose template file 34 Choose instruments (or voice parts) 35 35 Add instruments 2

3 Add Staff / Add Linked Staff 35 Change order of instruments 36 Delete an instrument 36 Choose key signature and tempo 36 Choose time signature, pickup measure, and number of measures 37 Adjustments to score after creation 37 Add / delete / adjust measures 37 Add/edit text 38 38 Change instrument set-up Hide a staff 38 Adjust layout and formatting 38 Templates 38 System templates folder 38 User templates folder 38 See also 39 External links 39 39 NOTE INPUT Basic note entry 39 39 Step 1. Select a starting position Step 2. Enter Note Input mode 39 Step 3. Select a duration 39 Step 4. Enter the note or rest 40 Select a note/rest duration 40 Input devices 40 Computer keyboard 40 Enter notes/rests 40 41 Move notes up/down Add accidentals 41 Chords 41 Insert notes 41 Delete notes 42 Keyboard shortcuts 42 42 Mouse 42 MIDI keyboard Virtual Piano Keyboard 43 43 Note input modes 43 Coloring of notes outside an instrument's range 44 Small notes/small noteheads Change notes or rests already entered 44 Change duration 44 Change pitch 44 44 Change rest to note and vice versa Note properties 45 See also 45 45 External links 45 EDIT MODE 45 Enter/exit edit mode 45 Text Lines 46 46 Notes Offset notes 46 46 Adjust note stem length 46 Keyboard shortcuts 46 See also 47 PALETTES Single Palette Mode 47 47 Open/close palette Apply symbols from a palette 47 Custom palettes 47 Palette menu 48 48 Behavior of applied text and lines See also 48 WORKSPACES 49 To switch between workspaces 49 Docking/undocking 49 49 Create a custom workspace 50 Edit workspace 50 See also 50 INSPECTOR Displaying the Inspector 50 What the Inspector does 50 "Reset to style default" and "Set to style" buttons 51 Inspector categories 51 Element 51 51 Element Group 51 Segment 3

4 Chord 51 Note 52 Select 52 Beam 52 Clef 52 Articulation 52 Fretboard diagram 52 Line 53 53 Text Line Core Properties dialogs 53 See also 53 MEASURE OPERATIONS 53 Select 53 Single measure 53 Range of measures 53 Insert 53 53 Insert an empty measure into the score Insert multiple measures 54 54 Append Append an empty measure to the end of a score 54 Append multiple measures to the end of a score 54 Delete 54 Delete a single measure 54 Delete a range of measures 54 Properties 54 Staves 55 55 Measure duration Other 55 Exclude from measure count 55 Break multi-measure rests 55 Measure number mode 56 Layout stretch 56 56 Add to measure number 56 Play Count Numbering 56 56 Split and join Join measures 56 Split a measure 56 57 External links 57 VOICES How voices are displayed 57 When to use voices 57 How to enter notes in different voices 57 58 Deleting and hiding rests Restoring deleted rests 58 Exchange voices of notes 58 58 Move notes to another voice (without swapping) 58 See also 58 External links COPY AND PASTE 58 Summary of commands 59 Notes 59 Copy or cut 59 59 Paste Swap with Clipboard 59 59 Copy pitch of a single note only 59 Other elements 60 Copy or cut 60 Paste 60 Quick repeat 60 Duplicate 60 Selection filter See also 61 External links 61 SELECTION MODES 61 61 Select a single object 61 Select a single note 61 Select a chord 61 Select a single measure Select a continuous range of objects 61 1. Shift selection 61 2. Shift + click selection 61 Select a range of measures 62 3. Drag selection 62 4. Select All 62 5. Select section 62 62 Select a list of objects 62 Select all similar 4

5 What selections are useful for 63 See also 63 UNDO AND REDO 63 VIEWING AND NAVIGATION 64 View menu 64 Show sidebars/panels 64 Zoom in/out 64 Toolbars 64 65 Show/hide toolbars Customise toolbar area 65 Workspaces 65 Show Status bar 65 Split display 65 Visibility options 66 Mark irregular measures 66 Full screen 66 66 Page/Continuous View Page View 66 66 Continuous View Single Page View 66 Side panels 67 Navigation 67 Commands 67 Navigator 67 Timeline 67 Find 67 68 See also CONCERT PITCH 68 See also 68 External links 68 OPEN/SAVE/EXPORT/PRINT 68 Open 68 Save 68 Export 69 Print 69 See also 69 SHARE SCORES ONLINE 69 Create an account 69 Share a score directly from MuseScore 69 Upload a score on MuseScore.com 71 Edit a score on MuseScore.com 71 71 Switch to the direct method of updating an online score 71 External links 71 NOTATION 72 BARLINES Change barline type 72 72 Insert barline 72 Custom barlines 72 Connect barlines See also 73 CLEFS 73 73 Add a clef Add clef to beginning of measure 73 73 Add mid-measure clef Courtesy clefs 74 74 Remove a clef Hide clefs 74 74 Display clef only in the first measure (for all staves) Display clef only in the first measure (for a particular staff) 74 Hide all clefs in a particular staff 74 KEY SIGNATURES 74 75 Add a new key signature Add new key signature to all staves 75 Add new key signature to one staff only 75 75 Replace an existing key signature 75 Replace key signature for all staves 75 Replace key signature for one staff only 75 Remove a key signature 5

6 Naturals on key signature changes 75 Key signature changes and multi-measure rests 76 Courtesy key signatures 76 Custom key signatures 76 TIME SIGNATURES 77 Add or replace a time signature 77 Delete a time signature 77 Create a time signature 77 78 Time signature properties Change default beaming 78 Additive (composite) meters 79 Local time signatures 79 Resize time signature 79 Pickup measures and cadenzas 79 Time signature changes and breaks 79 See also 79 79 External links ACCIDENTALS 79 80 Add accidental Change enharmonic spelling 80 Respell pitches 80 See also 80 External links 80 ARPEGGIOS AND GLISSANDI 80 Arpeggios 81 Glissandi (slides) 81 81 Adjust start and end points Custom glissandi 81 Wind instrument articulations 82 Slide in/out 82 External links 82 ARTICULATIONS AND ORNAMENTS 82 Articulations 82 Ornaments 82 Add articulation/ornament 83 Add accidental to an ornament 83 Add fermata to a barline 83 Keyboard shortcuts 83 83 Adjust position Articulation and ornament properties 83 See also 84 External links 84 84 BENDS Apply a bend 84 84 Edit text and line properties Edit bend properties 84 85 Adjust height 85 Adjust position Custom bends 85 BEAMS 85 Beam symbols 85 Change note beaming 86 86 Adjust beam angle 86 Adjust beam height 86 Make beam horizontal 87 Adjust feathered beams Local relayout 87 87 Flip note beam Reset Beam Mode 87 87 See also External links 88 88 BRACKETS Add 88 88 Delete 88 Change 88 Edit 6

7 Style 88 BREATHS AND PAUSES 88 Add symbol 88 Adjust pause length 89 GRACE NOTES 89 Create grace notes 89 Change pitch 89 Change duration 89 89 Manual adjustment External links 89 HAIRPINS 90 Add a hairpin 90 Adjust length and height 90 Cresc. and dim. lines 90 Edit hairpin properties 91 Hairpin playback 91 91 LINES Applying lines to the score 92 92 To apply a line to just one note To apply a line across a range of notes 92 To apply a line from a note to the end of that measure 92 To apply a line across a range of measures 92 Lines and playback properties 92 Adjust vertical position 92 Change length 92 Text lines 92 93 Custom lines Copying lines 93 Extended ornament lines 93 External links 93 MEASURE RESTS 93 Full measure rest 93 To create one or more full measure rests 93 93 To create a full measure rest in a particular voice 94 Multimeasure rest To display multimeasure rests 94 Break multimeasure rest 94 OCTAVE LINES 94 94 Apply an octave line 95 Change length Custom lines 95 95 External links 95 SLURS 95 Add slur in note-input mode Add slur in Normal mode 95 Method 1 95 Method 2 96 Adjust slur 96 Extended slurs 96 96 Dotted slurs 97 See also 97 TIES Add ties to single notes 97 Add ties to chords 97 98 Flip a tie 98 See also External links 98 98 TREMOLO Add a Tremelo 98 98 External links 98 TUPLETS 98 Create a tuplet 99 Create a triplet in normal mode 99 Create a triplet in note input mode 7

8 Create other tuplets 99 Custom tuplets 99 Delete a tuplet 100 Change display of tuplets 100 Using the Inspector 100 Using the Tuplets Style dialog 100 External links 101 REPEATS AND JUMPS 101 101 Simple repeats 1st and 2nd endings 101 Playback 101 Repeat symbols and text 101 Jumps 102 Markers 102 Examples of jumps 102 See also 103 103 External links VOLTAS 103 103 To add a volta to the score To change the number of measures that a volta covers 103 Volta properties 103 Playback 104 External links 104 TRANSPOSITION 104 Manual transposition 104 Automatic transposition 104 105 Transpose Chromatically By Key 105 By Interval 105 Transpose Diatonically 105 Transposing instruments 105 Concert pitch 106 106 Change staff transposition 106 External links DRUM NOTATION 106 106 Percussion staff types Note input methods 106 MIDI keyboard 106 Piano keyboard 107 107 Computer keyboard Mouse 107 Drum input palette 108 Edit Drumset 108 Roll 109 109 External links 109 TABLATURE 109 Create a new tablature staff 109 With the New Score wizard With the Instruments dialog 110 110 By changing staff type Edit string data 110 110 Change tuning 111 Add a string 111 Delete a string Mark unfretted string "open" 111 Change number of instrument frets 111 Change tablature display 111 Combine pitched staff with tablature 112 Create a staff/tablature pair with the New Score wizard 112 Create a staff/tablature pair in an existing score 112 Create a staff/tablature pair from an existing staff 112 112 Enter notes in tablature Using a computer keyboard 112 Historical tablature 113 Using a mouse 113 113 Select note duration 113 Edit notes 113 In Note input mode 113 In Normal mode Crosshead notes 113 Summary of keyboard commands 114 Note input mode 114 114 Normal mode 114 External links 8

9 SOUND AND PLAYBACK 114 MID-STAFF INSTRUMENT CHANGES 114 Effect of instrument change 114 Add an instrument change 115 See also 115 External links 116 MIXER 116 Opening the Mixer 116 116 Track Area Master Gain 116 Track Area 116 Channel display arrow 117 Mute and Solo 117 Pan 117 Volume 117 Track name 117 117 Details Area Name 118 118 Track Color Channel 118 Drumset 118 Patch 118 Volume 118 Pan 118 Port and Channel 118 Reverb / Chorus 118 118 Mute Voice Hide Details Button 118 Sound 119 Mid-staff sound change (pizz., con sordino, etc.) 119 See also 119 External links 119 119 PIANO ROLL EDITOR 119 Opening the Piano Roll Editor Overview 120 Navigation 121 Selecting Notes 121 121 Editing Notes Controls 122 First Row 122 Second Row 123 Keyboard 124 Customization 124 PLAY MODE 124 Playback toolbar 124 124 Playback commands 124 Start/stop playback During playback 125 125 Loop playback 125 Play panel SOUNDFONTS AND SFZ FILES 126 126 SoundFonts Install a SoundFont 126 126 Uninstall 126 SFZ 126 Install an SFZ 126 Uninstall Synthesizer 127 List of downloadable soundfiles 127 127 GM SoundFonts Orchestral soundfiles 127 127 Piano soundfiles SF2 Pianos 127 SFZ Pianos 128 Unzipping downloaded soundfiles 128 128 Troubleshooting 128 See also 128 External links 129 SWING Apply swing to a score section 129 129 Triplet in tempo marking 129 Return to straight rhythm 9

10 Apply swing globally 129 External links 129 SYNTHESIZER 129 Overview 129 Save/Load Synthesizer settings 130 Fluid 130 To load a soundfont 130 To reorder the soundfonts 130 131 To remove a soundfont Zerberus 131 Volume 131 Effects 131 Zita 1 reverb 131 SC4 compressor 132 Tuning 132 See also 132 132 TEMPO Add a tempo marking 133 133 Edit tempo Edit tempo text 133 Overriding the tempo marking 133 Ritardando and accelerando playback 134 Fermatas 134 See also 134 DYNAMICS 134 Add a dynamic 134 134 Adjust properties Customise a dynamic 135 External links 135 CAPO PLAYBACK 135 TEXT 135 TEXT BASICS 136 Add text 136 136 Text formatting 136 Adjust position of text objects Text anchors 137 TEXT EDITING 137 Enter/exit text edit mode 137 137 Keyboard shortcuts 137 Symbols and special characters Special character shortcuts 138 138 See also 138 TEXT STYLES AND PROPERTIES 138 Text styles Text objects 139 Save and load text styles 140 See also 140 STAFF AND SYSTEM TEXT 140 Staff text 140 140 Staff text properties 140 System text 140 System text properties See also 141 External links 141 141 CHORD SYMBOLS 141 Enter a chord symbol Keyboard Commands 141 141 Chord symbol syntax Edit a chord symbol 142 142 Transpose chord symbols 142 Chord symbol text 142 Chord symbol style 142 Appearance 142 Note spelling 10

11 Automatic Capitalization 143 Positioning 143 Capo 143 FINGERING 143 Add fingering to a single note 143 Add fingering to several notes 143 Adjust position of fingering 144 Single fingering 144 144 Multiple fingering Edit fingering text 144 LYRICS 144 Enter a lyrics line 144 First line 144 Subsequent lines 144 Special characters 145 Verse numbers 145 145 Melisma Elision (Lyric) slur / Synalepha 145 146 Edit Lyrics Adjust properties of lyrics 146 Adjust position of individual lyrics lines 146 Copy lyrics to clipboard 146 Paste lyrics from clipboard 147 See also 147 External links 147 REHEARSAL MARKS 147 147 Add a rehearsal mark Manual Placement 147 Automatic placement 147 Add an alphanumeric rehearsal mark 147 Add a measure-number rehearsal mark 148 Automatically resequence rehearsal marks 148 148 Text style 148 Search for a rehearsal mark See also 148 148 External links FORMATTING 148 LAYOUT AND FORMATTING 148 148 Ways to affect layout 149 Style Score 149 Page 149 Sizes 150 150 Header, Footer Measure Numbers 151 System 151 151 Clefs 151 Accidentals 151 Measure Barlines 151 Notes 152 Beams 152 Tuplets 152 152 Arpeggios Slurs/Ties 152 153 Hairpins 153 Volta 153 Ottava 153 Pedal 153 Trill 153 Vibrato 154 Bend Text Line 154 Articulations, Ornaments 154 Fermatas 154 154 Staff Text 154 Tempo Text 154 Lyrics 155 Dynamics Rehearsal Marks 155 Figured Bass 155 Chord Symbols 155 Fretboard Diagrams 156 Text Styles 156 OK / Cancel / Apply buttons 156 Page Settings... 156 156 Add / Remove System breaks 157 Stretch 11

12 Increase / Decrease layout stretch 157 Reset stretch 157 Reset Style 157 Reset Beams 157 Reset Shapes and Positions 157 Load / Save style 157 See also 158 External links 158 158 MEASURE Introduction 158 Options 158 PAGE SETTINGS 159 Page size 159 Odd/Even Page Margins 159 Scaling 160 Unit 160 160 First page number Apply to all Parts 160 160 BREAKS AND SPACERS Breaks 160 Add a break to a measure 161 Using a keyboard shortcut 161 Using a palette break symbol 161 Add a break to a frame 161 Delete breaks 161 Move a break 161 161 Section break Spacers 162 Add a spacer 162 Adjust a spacer 162 Delete a spacer 162 See also 162 FRAMES 162 Horizontal frame 163 Insert/append horizontal frame 163 Adjust width of horizontal frame 163 Add text or image to horizontal frame 163 Vertical frame 163 Insert/append vertical frame 163 Adjust height of vertical frame 163 Edit vertical frame properties 163 164 Add text or image to vertical frame 164 Insert horizontal frame in vertical frame 164 "Title" frame 164 Text frame Insert/ append text frame 164 165 Edit text frame properties 165 Create a frame 165 Insert a frame into the score Append a frame to the score 165 Delete a frame 165 165 Apply a break See also 165 165 External links IMAGES 165 165 Add image Cut/copy and paste image 165 166 Modify image See also 166 External links 166 IMAGE CAPTURE 166 166 Save a snapshot Image capture menu 166 See also 167 167 External links 167 ALIGN ELEMENTS 167 Snap to grid 167 ADVANCED TOPICS 12

13 ACCESSIBILITY 167 Introduction 167 Initial setup 168 Finding your way around 168 The score window 168 Score reading 169 Moving forwards or backwards in time 169 Moving between notes at a given point in time 170 170 Filtering score reading Score playback 170 Score editing 170 Customization 170 External links 170 ALBUMS 171 Create album 171 Load album 171 171 Print album Join scores 171 171 Save album AUTOMATIC PLACEMENT 172 Default position 172 Manual adjustments 172 Disabling automatic placement 172 Stacking order 172 CROSS-STAFF NOTATION 172 See also 173 173 External links EARLY MUSIC FEATURES 173 Unbarred (or unmetered) notation 173 Example 173 Mensurstrich 174 Ambitus 174 175 Mensural time signatures 175 See also FIGURED BASS 175 Adding a new figured bass indication 175 Text format 176 176 Digits Accidentals 176 Combined shapes 176 Parentheses 176 Continuation lines 177 Duration 177 Editing existing figured basses 178 Style 178 179 Proper syntax 179 Summary of keys FILE FORMATS 180 180 MuseScore native format 180 MuseScore format (*.mscz) Uncompressed MuseScore format (*.mscx) 180 180 MuseScore backup file (.*.mscz,) or (.*.mscx,) Graphic files (export only) 180 180 PDF (*.pdf) 180 PNG (*.png) 181 SVG (*.svg) 181 Audio files (export only) WAV audio (*.wav) 181 MP3 (*.mp3) 181 181 FLAC audio (*.flac) Ogg Vorbis (*.ogg) 181 181 Share with other music software MusicXML (*.xml, *.musicxml) 182 Compressed MusicXML (*.mxl) 182 MIDI (*.mid, *.midi, *.kar) 182 182 MuseData (*.md) (import only) 182 Capella (*.cap, *.capx) (import only) 182 Bagpipe Music Writer (*.bww) (import only) 182 BB (*.mgu, *.sgu) (import only) Overture (*.ove) (import only) 182 182 Guitar Pro (*.gtp, *.gp3, *.gp4, *.gp5, *.gpx) (import only) 182 See also 13

14 182 External links 183 FRETBOARD DIAGRAMS 183 Add a fretboard diagram Edit fretboard diagram 183 Adjust position, color, stacking order 183 Fretboard diagram style 183 MIDI IMPORT 183 184 Available operations 185 MASTER PALETTE 186 Symbols Find a symbol 186 Apply a symbol 186 Connect symbols 186 See also 186 NOTE INPUT MODES 186 187 Step-time 187 Re-pitch Rhythm 187 187 Real-time (automatic) 188 Real-time (manual) 188 Real-time Advance shortcut 188 Insert Normal mode 189 See also 189 External links 189 NOTEHEAD SCHEME 189 NOTEHEADS 190 Notehead groups 191 Change notehead group 191 Change notehead type 191 Shared noteheads 191 Change offset noteheads to shared 191 Examples of notehead sharing 192 Remove duplicate fret marks 192 External links 192 PARTS 192 192 Create all parts 193 Create specific parts 193 Customize parts 194 Add instruments to a part 194 Remove instruments from a part Select staves for an instrument 194 Select voices for an instrument 194 Delete a Part 194 195 Export the parts 195 Save the parts 195 Print a part PLUGINS 195 What are Plugins? 195 195 Installation 195 Windows 195 macOS 196 Linux Enable/disable plugins 196 Create/edit/run plugins 196 Plugins installed by default 197 ABC Import 197 197 Notes Color Notes → 197 Create Score helloQml 197 Note Names Notes 197 → 197 Panel random/random2 197 run 197 scorelist 197 197 ScoreView 197 Walk See also 197 197 External links 14

15 PREFERENCES 198 General 198 Canvas 198 Note input 199 Note Input 200 MIDI Remote Control 200 Score 201 I/O 201 201 API / Device MIDI Input/Output/Output Latency 202 Jack Audio Server 202 Import 202 Export 202 Shortcuts 203 Update 204 Advanced 204 205 See also RECOVERED FILES 205 205 Saving after session recovery Finding recovered files 205 See also 206 External links 206 SCORE COMPARISON 206 Introduction 206 Select score 206 Choose view 206 206 View comparison Leave comparison 207 Example 207 SCORE PROPERTIES 207 Edit meta tags 207 Pre-existing meta tags 208 208 Entering Work / Movement / Part metadata 209 Header/Footer See also 209 STAFF / PART PROPERTIES 210 210 Staff Types Staff / Part Properties: all staves 210 Staff / Part Properties: plucked strings only 212 212 Advanced Style Properties Template 212 Standard and Percussion staff options 212 Tablature staff options 212 213 Tablature staff options: Fret Marks Tablature staff options: Note Values 213 Preview 215 215 Change instrument External links 215 STAFF TYPE CHANGE 215 215 Add a Staff Type Change 215 Staff Type Change properties Example 216 216 TIMELINE Introduction 216 216 Overview 217 Meta labels Instrument labels 217 Meta rows 217 Main grid 217 217 Meta Basic interaction 217 217 Select a measure Select multiple measures 217 Drag selection 217 [Shift] selection 217 217 [Ctrl] selection 217 Clearing selection 217 Meta values selection 217 Scrolling Standard scrolling 218 218 [Shift] scrolling 15

16 [Alt] scrolling 218 Dragging 218 Labels interaction 218 Rearranging meta labels 218 Collapsing the meta labels 218 Hiding instruments 218 Zooming 218 Context menus 218 218 Meta labels context menu Meta rows context menu 219 Instrument context menu 219 TOOLS 219 Transpose 219 Explode 219 Implode 219 Apply implode to a single staff 219 220 Apply implode to multiple staves Voices 220 220 Measure Timewise delete 220 Fill with slashes 220 Toggle rhythmic slash notation 221 Respell pitches 221 Regroup Rhythms 221 Resequence rehearsal marks 222 Copy lyrics to clipboard 222 222 Image capture Remove empty trailing measures 222 Script recorder 222 See also 222 SUPPORT 222 HELPING TO IMPROVE TRANSLATIONS 222 Software translation 222 Website and handbook translation 222 See also 222 BUG REPORTS AND FEATURE REQUESTS 223 Bug reports 223 Feature requests 223 223 External links REVERT TO FACTORY SETTINGS 223 Via menu 223 Via command line 224 224 Instructions for Windows Instructions for MacOS 224 224 Instructions for Linux See also 225 225 APPENDIX 225 COMMAND LINE OPTIONS NAME 225 SYNOPSIS 225 DESCRIPTION 226 Batch conversion job JSON format 228 230 ENVIRONMENT 230 FILES 230 EXAMPLES 230 Convert a score to PDF from the command line Run a batch job converting multiple documents 230 231 MIDI import operations DIAGNOSTICS 231 231 SEE ALSO STANDARDS 231 231 HISTORY AUTHORS 231 231 CAVEATS 231 BUGS 232 KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS 16

17 Navigation 232 Note input 232 Duration 232 Voices 232 Pitch 232 Interval 233 Layout 233 Articulations 233 233 Text entry Lyrics entry 233 Display 234 Miscellaneous 234 See also 234 KNOWN LIMITATIONS OF MUSESCORE 3.X 234 Local time signatures 234 Regroup Rhythms 234 234 Tablature staff linked with standard staff Mixer 234 234 Header & footer UPGRADE FROM MUSESCORE 1.X OR 2.X 234 How to upgrade MuseScore 235 Opening 1.x or 2.x scores in MuseScore 3 235 Relayout 235 Getting the sound from MuseScore 1.x 235 KNOWN INCOMPATIBILITIES 235 Hardware incompatibilities 235 235 Software incompatibilities AVG Internet Security hangs MuseScore 235 Font problem on macOS 236 Font problem on Linux 236 Save As dialog empty on Linux 236 236 NEW FEATURES IN MUSESCORE 3 Automatic Placement 237 237 Default position 237 Manual adjustments 237 Disabling automatic placement 237 Stacking order Text Formatting 237 Text Styles 237 Text Properties 238 Custom Formatting 238 Staff Type Change 238 Temporary and Cutaway Staves 238 System Dividers 238 Staff Spacing 238 Don't Break 239 239 Parts from Voices Explode and Implode 239 Timewise Note Input 239 Split/Join Measures 240 Timeline 240 Score Comparison Tool 240 Mixer 240 Piano Roll Editor 240 Capo changes 240 Fretboard Diagrams 240 External links 241 GLOSSARY 241 245 External links 17

18 Published on MuseScore https://musescore.org ) ( This handbook is for MuseScore version 3.0 and above. It is maintained and translated by the MuseScore community. Find out how you can help . ). (If you are still using MuseScore 2.x, you can access the old handbook Getting started This chapter helps you to install and run MuseScore for the first time. It will introduce you to the various learning and help resources. Learning MuseScore MuseScore provides a number of learning resources to help the new user get started. Tours When you run MuseScore for the first time, the Startup Wizard appears to help you set up some basic features of the Tours , and, as the name suggest, gives you a guided tour of the program. software. One of these features is called To activate this feature, on the page of the Startup Wizard, tick "Yes" in response to "Would you like to see Tours these tours?" This will allow the Tour to run when the program opens, introducing you to the main features of the user interface. To end the tour : press the Close button. To stop the Tour showing when you open Musescore : Uncheck "Continue taking Tours". To enable the Tour again (when program reopens): Select Help → Tours → Show Tours . To see all the Tours again (when program reopens): Select Help → Tours → Reset Tours . Currently offered tours: Introduction to User Interface. Entering notes and rests in a score. Entering symbols from a palette. Navigating the score with Timeline. Navigating the score with keyboard. Entering multimeasure rests. Autoplace positionning of symbols. Modify properties with Inspector. Selecting elements. Add and edit lines in score. Getting Started score 18

19 The interactive Getting Started score is a practical introduction to the basics of entering a score. When you open Start Center : just click to open it. Follow the MuseScore for the first time, it will be displayed in the main window of the instructions written in blue, and you will be led through the basic steps of score writing. : If you dont see the Getting Started score, you can find it in the right hand panel of the Start Center. Click the right or Note left arrows to browse through the options until it appears. Video tutorials MuseScore offers a full set of instructions videos, each covering a specific subject. You can access these videos in several ways. From the MuseScore homepage at MuseScore.org: Support/Tutorials : browse to the Videos page in the right-hand panel. Start Center In the Use the list of links in the Videos section (below). You Tube Look up directly by searching for "MuseScore in Minutes" on Other tutorials In the section on musescore.org you will also find tutorials on more specific topics (e.g. MuseScore Drumline). Tutorials Videos Lesson 1- Score setup Lesson 2 - Working with MuseScore Lesson 3 - Note Input Lesson 4 - MIDI keyboard input Lesson 5 - More Input Ideas Lesson 6 - Text, Lyrics, and Chords Lesson 7 - Tablature and Drum Notation Lesson 8 - Repeats and Endings, Part 1 Lesson 9 - Repeats and Endings, Part 2 Lesson 10 - Articulations, Dynamics and Text Lesson 11 - Layout and Parts Get Support If you experience a problem while working with MuseScore, there are several ways to get help and support. Handbook To access the Handbook: From the website: select Support → Handbook from the menu. MuseScore from the menu. From the MuseScore program: select → Online Handbook Help You can browse through the Handbook using the menus, or do a search . Context help If you select an element in your score and press F1 , a webpage opens displaying a list of links associated with that element in the . Handbook Forums MuseScore offers a number of on-line Forums for user collaboration. You may be able to find an answer here to your problem among the existing posts. A general search of the website will return a list of relevant hits to all forums and the Handbook. How To's Some tasks require the use of several different techniques. These can be difficult to find an answer for in the Handbook. Solutions for these may be found in the How To's 19

20 Post a question If you cannot find the answer to your problem, you can ask a question in the forum. Support and bug reports When you post your question: Try to be as precise as you can, when you describe what you want to do, and which steps you have already tried. Attach the score that shows the problem. This will make it much easier for others to understand the problem — use the "File attachments" option at the bottom of the page, just above the Save and Preview buttons. Report a bug If you encounter something you think is a bug, the first step is to post it in the forum. This will Support and bug reports allow others to help check if it is a genuine bug, and to advise workarounds, so you can continue your scorewriting. You will find more details on this in Bug reports and Feature requests . Installation MuseScore exists for various different operating systems, including Windows and macOS, as well as many Linux distributions and several BSD variants . All are available from the MuseScore download page. Installation When you have downloaded the software, follow the installation instructions for your operation system: Install on Windows . Install on macOS . Install on Linux . Install on Chromebook . Initial preferences The first time you start MuseScore after the installation, you will be asked to confirm your basic preferences: The settings for language and keyboard layout are retrieved from your installation, and should normally not need to be changed. Just click Next to continue: 20

21 followed by: The Workspace page allows you to specify the default toolbars and palettes. Chose an option from the dropdown list. Then click Next to continue: 21

22 You will be now questioned if you wish to take the Tours . If you are new to MuseScore keep the 'Yes' option checked, and click Next to continue: Finally click Finish to start MuseScore. 22

23 Install on Windows Install here will If you're on Windows 10, a 32-bit version of MuseScore can be installed from the Windows Store. Clicking open Musescore's page in the Store app. There you will only have to click Get the app > and MuseScore will be downloaded, installed and subsequently automatically updated. Otherwise you can get the Windows installer from the download page of the MuseScore website. Click on the link to start the download (pick your choice of 64-bit or 32-bit). Your Internet browser will ask you to confirm that you want to download this file. Click . Save File When the download finishes, double-click on the file to start the installation. Windows may prompt you with a security window to confirm this before running the software. Click Run to continue. The installation process will now start If you click Cancel , here or later, you'll see: 23

24 If instead you click Next to continue, the setup wizard displays the terms of the free software license. Read the terms of the license, make sure the box next to "I accept the terms in the License Agreement" is checked, and click Next to continue. Next the installer will ask you to confirm the location in which to install MuseScore. 24

25 If you are installing a newer version of MuseScore but still want to keep the old version on your computer, then you should change the folder (note that MuseScore 3 can coexist with MuseScore 2 and 1 with no changes needed). Otherwise click Next to continue. Click Install to continue. Give the setup wizard a few minutes to install the necessary files and configurations. You'll see 25

26 and finally Click to exit the installer. You may delete the installer file you downloaded. Finish Start MuseScore MuseScore 3 → To start MuseScore, from the menu, select → Start → MuseScore 3 . All Programs Uninstall You can uninstall MuseScore from the menu by selecting Start → All Programs → MuseScore 3 → Uninstall MuseScore ; or via Windows' Control Panel. Note that this will not remove your scores nor your MuseScore settings. Troubleshooting On Windows XP and Vista, the installer might be blocked by the system. If you don't manage to install MuseScore, right click the downloaded file and click Properties. If there is a message "This file came from another computer and might be blocked to help protect this computer" , click on "Unblock", "OK" and double click on the downloaded file again. External links How to install MuseScore on Windows without administrator rights How to run MuseScore as Administrator on Windows 26

27 Install on macOS Install download page of the MuseScore website. Click on the macOS link to You will find the DMG (disk image) file on the start the download. When the download is complete, double-click the DMG file to mount the disk image. Drag and drop the MuseScore icon to the Applications folder icon. Authenticate and enter your password to If you are not logged in as administrator, macOS may ask for a password: click proceed. When the application has finished copying, eject the disk image. You can now launch MuseScore from the Applications folder, Spotlight, or Launchpad. Uninstall Simply delete MuseScore from Applications folder. Install with Apple Remote Desktop You can deploy MuseScore to multiple computers with the "Copy" feature of ARD. Since MuseScore is a self-contained application you can simply copy the application to the '/Application' folder on the target machines. It is also possible to install multiple versions of the application as long as their names differ. External links How to run MuseScore 2.x on Mac OS X 10.6 How to change the language in MuseScore Install on Linux 27

28 As of MuseScore 2.0.3 you can, for the first time, get hold of a copy for Linux straight from the download page, just like AppImage packaging format, which runs on pretty much all Linux Windows and Mac users. This is possible thanks to the (but distributions. If you prefer, there is still the option to get it the traditional way via your distribution's package manager build from source . you may have to wait for it to get packaged by the relevant maintainer). Of course, you can always AppImage The AppImage format is a new way of packaging Linux applications. AppImages are portable - they don't have to be installed - and they run on pretty much any Linux distribution. Dependencies are included in the one AppImage file. Step 1 - Download Before you download an AppImage, you need to know your processor's architecture. These terminal commands will show it: arch or -m uname i686 armv7 x86_64 " or " The output will be something like " ": ", " i686 (or similar) - 32-bit Intel/AMD processor (found on older machines). x86_64 (or similar) - 64-bit Intel/AMD processor (modern laptop and desktop computers, most Chromebooks). armv7 (or later) - ARM processor (phones & tablets, Raspberry Pi 2/3 running Ubuntu Mate, some Chromebooks, usually 32-bit at present). Now you can head over to the download page and find the AppImage that best matches your architecture. Once downloaded, the file will be named " MuseScore-X.Y.Z-$(arch).AppImage ". Step 2 - Give execute permission Before you can use the AppImage you need to give permission for it to be run as a program. From the Terminal: This command gives the user (u) permission to execute (x) the AppImage. It works on all Linux systems. cd ~ / Downloads chmod u+x MuseScore * .AppImage Note: Use the " cd " command to change directory to wherever you saved the AppImage. From a File Manager: If you prefer to avoid the command line, there is usually a way give execute permission from inside a File Manager. In GNOME Files (Nautilus), simply: 1 . Right-click on the AppImage and select "Properties". 2 . Open the "Permissions" tab. 3 . Enable the option labelled "Allow executing file as a program". The process may be slightly different in other file managers. Step 3 - Run it! Now you should be able to run the program simply by double-clicking on it! When you downloaded the AppImage it was probably saved in your Downloads folder, but you can move somewhere else it at any time (e.g. you could put it on your desktop for easy access). If you ever want to remove it then simply delete it. Installing the AppImage (optional) You can run the AppImage without installing it, but you must install it if you want it to be completely integrated with your desktop environment. This has the following benefits: 28

29 Adds the AppImage to your Applications Menu or Launcher Sets the correct icons for MuseScore's files (MSCZ, MSCX) and for MusicXML files (MXL, XML) Makes the AppImage available via your File Manager's right-click "Open with..." menu To install it, run the AppImage from the Terminal with the "install" option ( see immediately below ). This copies a desktop file and various icons to your computer. If you want to remove them you will need to run the "remove" option before you delete the AppImage. This does not affect any scores created with any version of MuseScore. Using command line options Running the AppImage from the Terminal allows you to use various command line options. The AppImage has some special options in addition to MuseScore's normal command line options . You will need to change directory (cd) to wherever the AppImage is saved your system, for example: ~ / Desktop cd MuseScore * .AppImage [ option... ] / . Or give the path to the AppImage: ~ desktop / MuseScore * .AppImage [ option... ] / Use the "--help" and "man" options to get more information about the available command line options: / * .AppImage --help # displays a complete list of command line options . MuseScore . MuseScore * .AppImage man # displays the manual page (explains what the options do) / Distribution Packages Fedora 1 Import the GPG key: . su rpm http: // prereleases.musescore.org / linux / Fedora / RPM-GPG-KEY-Seve --import 2 Go to the download page of the MuseScore website. Click on the link for the stable Fedora download and choose . the correct rpm package for your architecture. 3 . Depending on your architecture, use one of the two sets of commands to install MuseScore for arch i386 su yum localinstall musescore-X.Y- .fc10.i386.rpm 1 for arch x86_64 su musescore-X.Y- 1 .fc10.x86_64.rpm yum localinstall If you have difficulty with sound, see Fedora 11 and sound . See also the hints for the various distributions on the . download page External links How to run the MuseScore AppImage on Linux - video How to change the language in MuseScore Install on Chromebook Desktop program MuseScore's desktop program will not work natively on Chrome OS, but there are some workaround solutions: 29

30 1 . Since Chrome OS 69, certain chromebook models are able to run Linux apps and so you can install MuseScore for Download page . Feedback about the installation process and supported hardware is Linux as provided on our welcome on the forum 2 . Via software-on-demand service such as : By just visiting this website, you can run MuseScore in the rollApp browser. You can access your scores via cloud services such as Google Drive or save them to your online File → Save Online... MuseScore account through the menu Note that currently, sound and playback does not work on . rollApp. . Crouton : Involves installing a Linux based operating system which runs in parallel with Chrome OS, and then 3 Via installing MuseScore on Linux. Android app (playback only) MuseScore's Android app on recent Chromebooks. You will need to update to the Alternatively, it is possible to install latest version of Chrome OS first. See the Chromebook support documentation for help installing Android apps on Chromebooks , and a list of supported devices . The app only supports playback of existing scores, not score editing or creation, but you can sign-in to your MuseScore account for easy access to all your scores on MuseScore.com. External links How to run MuseScore on a Chromebook Check the installation procedure from the comments in this thread How to change the language in MuseScore Language, translations, and extensions MuseScore works with your "System" language (the one used for most programs, and generally depending on your country and the language settings of the PC, or account). Change language 1 . From the menu, select Edit → Preferences... (Mac: MuseScore → Preferences... ); 2 . In the General tab, select the desired language from the drop-down list in the Language section: Resource Manager 30

31 The Resource Manager is used to install and uninstall extensions, and to handle the update of translations. To access the menu use one of the following options: From the menu bar, select → Resource Manager . Help Edit → Preferences... (Mac: MuseScore → Preferences... ), open the From the menu bar, select tab, and click on the General Update translations button. Install/uninstall extension To install or uninstall an extension: 1 . Extensions tab in the Resource Manager . Select the 2 . Select the extension. 3 . Install or Uninstall button. Click the Update translations To update translation(s): . Select the Languages tab in the Resource Manager . 1 2 . Click on the Update buttons for the language(s) you want to update. Note the Inspector won't use the new language or : The language of menus and dialoges will be changed immediately, but translations until the program is restarted. See also Helping to improve translation External links How to change the language in MuseScore Checking for updates Note: These options are only available in the Mac and Windows versions of MuseScore (except the version from the Windows Store), as only those can be updated directly from MuseScore.org. Linux distributions (and the Windows Store) 31

32 have different mechanisms to make updates available. For the versions of MuseScore that can be directly updated, there are two ways to check for updates. Automated update check MuseScore Edit → Preferences... (Mac: From the menu, select → Preferences... ); 1 . 2 Select the Update tab. . 3 . Ensure the box marked "Check for new version of MuseScore" is ticked. (It should be ticked by default): If you enable this option, MuseScore will check for updates on every start. On the Mac and Windows versions (excluding the Windows Store version), this option enables an auto-updater that will download and install updates automatically. Check for update 1 . From the menu, select Help → Check for Update : 2 A dialog will appear with the update status: either "No Update Available" or "An update for MuseScore is available:" . followed by a link to download it. See also Preferences: Update Basics The previous → " Getting started " chapter guided you through the installation process. The "Basics" chapter gives an overview of MuseScore and describes the general methods for interacting with the score. Create a new score To create a new score, open the New Score Wizard (see Create new score , below): this can also be accessed via the Start Center . Start Center This is the window that displays when you open MuseScore for the very first time: 32

33 To open the Start Center (if not already visible), use any of the following options: F4 Press . From the menu bar, select File → Start Center... From the Start Center you can: (by clicking on the icon with the plus sign). Create a new score View thumbnails of previously-opened scores: click on a thumbnail to open it. Open a score from your computer's file system: click on Open a score ... Open the " Getting Started " tutorial score. Use the arrow buttons in the right-hand pane to access the link. Search sheet music on musecore.com . Access various other facilities (see right-hand pane). Create new score New Score Wizard when the Start Center is not open, use one of the following options: To open the Click on the New Score icon in the toolbar on the top left of the window; Use keyboard shortcut Ctrl + N (Mac: Cmd + N ); From the menu, select File → New... . Enter score information 33

34 Step 1: Enter score information. Enter the title, composer, or any other information as shown above, then click on . This step is optional: you can also Next > Vertical frame ). add this information after the score is created (see Choose template file Step 2: Choose template file. In the left column is a list of solo, ensemble and orchestral templates , divided into categories according to musical style. If you have previously stored any custom templates in your user templates folder , these are displayed under the heading, " ". You can also use the Search bar (top left) to find specific templates. Custom Templates To chose a score template : Click on the name of a score template to select it, then click Next > ; alternatively, just double-click the score template name. This will automatically take you to the next page of the Wizard (see Choose key signature and tempo , below). 34

35 If you wish to create a score template from scratch, click on " Choose Instruments Next " (under "General"), then click ; alternatively, just double-click "Chose instruments." > Choose instruments (or voice parts) window is divided into two columns: The Choose Instruments The contains a list of instruments, or voice parts to choose from. This list is categorized into instrument left column families, and clicking a category shows the full list of instruments in each family. The default entry is "Common instruments" but you can choose from others, including "Jazz instruments" and "Early music". There is a search box at the bottom of the instrument window: typing the name of an instrument there will search for it in "All instruments". The starts off empty, but will eventually contain a list of instruments for your new score in the order right column that they will appear. Add instruments To add instruments to the score, use any of the following options: Add . Select one or more instruments in the left column and click Double-click an instrument in the left column. The instrument names, and their associated staff lines, now appear in the list of instruments in the right column. You can add more instruments or voice parts, as needed. Each instrument added in this way is allocated its own Mixer channel. Note : If you want staves to share the same instrument, use the or Add linked staff commands instead (see Add staff below). Add Staff / Add Linked Staff To add a staff to an existing instrument in the score: 1 . Select a staff in the score list on the right-hand side (e.g. see "Staff 1" in the image below). Click Add Staff or Add Linked Staff . 2 . Adjust the Staff type , if applicable. 35

36 Summary of commands: Share mixer Staff Edit staves independently? Examples Command added channel? Guitar staff/tab, Piano grand Yes Yes Add Staff Unlinked staff Add Linked No. Edit in one staff updates Linked Yes Guitar staff/tab Staff others See also, . Combine pitched staff with tablature Change order of instruments To change the order of instruments (or staves) in the score: Click either an instrument name or a staff, in the right-hand column, and use the arrow buttons to move it higher/lower. Delete an instrument To delete an instrument, or staff line, from the score Select an instrument, or a staff line, in the right-hand column, and click Remove . Choose key signature and tempo 36

37 Step 3: Choose key signature and tempo. The wizard asks for two things: The initial key signature and tempo of the score. Select any of the former and click Next > to continue. An initial tempo can be set here too. Choose time signature, pickup measure, and number of measures Step 4: Choose time signature etc. You can set your initial here. If the score starts with a pickup measure (also known as an anacrusis or time signature upbeat measure), then mark the Pickup measure checkbox and adjust the "Duration" accordingly. Measures is set to 32 by default: you can change the number here, or add/remove measures later from the score. Click Finish to create your new score. Adjustments to score after creation Any settings you make in the New Score Wizard can always be changed when you start work on the score itself: Add / delete / adjust measures 37

38 Insert measures . . Append measures Delete measures . . Create a pickup measure Add/edit text (Text basics). Add text Edit text . Change instrument set-up To add, delete, or change the order of instruments : → Instruments... ; or use the keyboard shortcut, I . This opens the Instruments dialog which is From the menu, select Edit Choose Instruments dialog in the New Score Wizard (see virtually identical to the ). above See also (Staff properties). Change instrument Hide a staff To hide a staff permanently Instruments dialog ( I ) and untick the "Visible" box for that staff. : Open the : See the "Hide" options in the Score dialog , and To hide a staff under certain conditions . Staff Properties Adjust layout and formatting To adjust the distance between staves and systems, set page margins etc., see Layout and formatting . Templates A Template is simply a standard MuseScore file that has been stored in one of two "templates" folders: any files in these folders are automatically displayed on the " Choose template file " page of the New Score Wizard. Two templates folders are created by default: A . system templates folder user templates folder A . System templates folder This folder contains the templates installed with MuseScore and should not be modified. It can be found in the following locations: : Usually at C:\Program Files\MuseScore 3\templates Windows . Linux : Under /usr/share/mscore-xxx if you installed from the package manager. If you compiled MuseScore on Linux yourself, then look under /usr/local/share/mscore-xxx (with xxx being the version you are using). MacOS : Under /Applications/MuseScore 3.app/Contents/Resources/templates . User templates folder Any templates that you create for future use should be stored here. Once in the user "templates" folder, they will " Choose template file " page of the New Score Wizard—under the heading "Custom automatically appear on the Templates". The default location of the user templates folder is as follows: Windows : %HOMEPATH%\Documents\MuseScore3\Templates . MacOS and Linux : ~/Documents/MuseScore3/Templates . To configure the location of your private templates folder: From the menu, select Edit → Preferences... → General . 38

39 See also Key signature Time signature Clef Tempo Staff properties External links Video tutorial: MuseScore in Minutes: Lesson 1 - Score Setup Note input MuseScore allows you to enter music notation from of four input devices : computer keyboard, mouse, MIDI keyboard, any input mode is step-time , in which notes or rests are entered one at a time. or virtual piano keyboard. The default input modes However, other are also available. New Score Wizard After exiting the , your new score will consist of a series of measures filled with measure rests: As you enter notes in a measure, the measure rests are changed to appropriate rests to fill the remainder of the measure: voices : Notes of different durations on the same beat are entered by using Basic note entry step-time from a computer keyboard . It is also This section introduces you to the basics of entering notes and rests in recommended that you work through the tutorial, "Getting Started: An introduction to note entry in MuseScore". This is available from the Start Center . Step 1. Select a starting position Select a starting position for note input by clicking on a note or rest, or , with the mouse. If you don't selecting a measure Note Input select a starting point, the cursor automatically defaults to the beginning of the score when you enter mode below ). ("Step 2" Step 2. Enter Note Input mode Note Input mode, use either of the following options: To enter Click on the "N" icon (on the extreme left of the Note Input toolbar). Press N on your computer keyboard. To exit mode, use any of the following options: Note Input Press N . Press Esc . Click on the toolbar "N" button. Step 3. Select a duration Still in Note Input mode, select a note duration using either of the following: 39

40 Click on a corresponding note icon in the Note Input toolbar (directly above the document window): below ). Enter the keyboard shortcut for that duration (see Step 4. Enter the note or rest To enter a note pitch from A–G, simply click on the corresponding letter on your computer keyboard. To enter a rest, press 0 (zero). not in Note Input mode—as long as you have a note/rest selected, or the score This method of entry also works if you are is newly-created (in which case note entry will default to the beginning). Select a note/rest duration Note Input mode: The following keyboard shortcuts are used to select note/rest duration in 64th (hemidemisemiquaver): 1 (demisemiquaver): 2 32nd 16th (semiquaver): 3 Eighth (quaver): 4 (crotchet): 5 Quarter Half (minim): 6 (semibreve): Whole 7 Double whole (breve): 8 Longa : 9 : . (changes the selection into a dotted note/rest) Dot are applied from the duration toolbar in the advanced Note , triple and quadruple dots Double workspace or via a : custom shortcut . See also: Tuplets . Input devices Music notation can be entered by: . Computer keyboard . Mouse MIDI keyboard . Virtual Piano Keyboard . Any combination of the above. Computer keyboard Basic note entry " (see above) and introduces you to the full range of commands available for This section expands on " entering notes or rests from the computer keyboard. Enter notes/rests note by typing the corresponding letter on your keyboard. Thus, after entering Note Input You can enter a type: 5 C mode, D E F G A B C . Note : When you enter a note using the keyboard, MuseScore places it closest to the previous note entered (above or below). To enter a rest , type "0" (zero). Thus, after entering Note Input mode, type: 5 C D 0 E . 40

41 Note : The duration selected in the toolbar applies to both notes rests. and a dotted note . (period/full stop) after selecting the duration. If you want to enter , press mode, type: . C Note Input D 5 E F G A . For example, after entering 4 Tuplets If you want to enter a tuplet (such as a triplet): see . If you want to write music with two or more simultaneous lines of independent melody (i.e. polyphony): see . Voices Move notes up/down To move a note up or down by a semitone: ↑ or ↓ arrow. Press the To move a note up or down diatonically: Alt + Press + ↑ or Alt + Shift + ↓ . Shift To move a note up or down by one octave: Press Ctrl + ↑ (Mac: ⌘ + ↑ ) or Ctrl + ↓ (Mac: ⌘ + ↓ ). Add accidentals When a note is moved up or down with an arrow key (see above), any accidental required is automatically generated by Accidentals . the program. Accidentals can also be added manually—see Chords above your previous entry: If you want to add a chord note , then enter a note from Press and hold to G . Shift A C , D Thus, typing Shift + F , Shift + A , E , F results in: , To add a note at a specific interval above or below one or more notes: 1 . Ensure that one or more notes are selected ; 2 Use one of the following options: . From the menu, select Notes → Add Interval... and chose an interval from the list; Press Alt + 1-9 for intervals above (intervals below are also possible by adding relevant shortcuts to the list in Preferences ). Note : To create chords with notes of different durations, you will need to use more than one Voice . Insert notes Normally, when you enter music in MuseScore, any existing notes or rests are overwritten. There are, however, several ways to insert notes: Insert extra measures into the score. Cut and paste a section of the score forward, then enter music into the gap. 41

42 To insert a note, press Ctrl Shift (Mac: ⌘ + Shift ) + the note name ( A to G ). This will insert a note of the selected + duration and move the rest of the notes to the right in the same measure. If the measure exceeds the duration of the time signature, the blue plus will appear above the measure as in Insert Mode . Delete notes : To delete a single note Delete . Select the note and press To delete a chord : Press Esc 1 Normal mode . . to ensure that you are in . Press Shift and click on a note to select the chord. 2 . Press Delete . 3 range The delete command can also be applied to a of notes/chords. Keyboard shortcuts Here is a list of useful editing shortcuts available in Note Input mode: (Up): Increase the pitch of a note by a semitone (uses ♯ ↑ ). ♭ ). (Down): Decrease the pitch of a note by a semitone (uses ↓ Alt 1-9 : Add interval (unison to ninth) above current note + J : Change note up or down to enharmonic note (alters the spelling in both concert pitch and transposed modes). Accidentals See + Ctrl (Mac Cmd + J ): Change note up or down to enharmonic (alters the spelling only in the current mode). See J Accidentals Alt + Shift + ↑ : Increase the pitch of a note using key signature Alt + Shift + ↓ : Decrease the pitch of a note using key signature R : Repeat the last entered note : Halve the duration of the last entered note Q W : Double the duration of the last entered note Q + : Decrease duration by a dot (for example, a dotted quarter note/crotchet becomes a quarter note/crotchet and Shift a quarter note/crotchet becomes a dotted eighth note/quaver). W Shift + : Increase duration by a dot (for example an eighth note/quaver becomes a dotted eighth note/quaver and a dotted eighth note/quaver becomes a quarter note/crotchet). Backspace : Undo last entered note + ← : Exchange last entered note with the note before it (repeat to keep moving note earlier) Shift + Shift : Exchange note moved with Shift + ← with the note that follows it → : Flip direction of note stem (can be reset to Auto position in Inspector ) X + Shift : Move note head to opposite side of stem (can be reset to Auto position in Inspector ) X Mouse It's easy to enter notes with the mouse, but it is not the fastest way to enter lots of notes. 1 . Note input toolbar . Click on the desired note duration symbol in the . 2 Click on the score to add a pitch of the selected duration. . To add more notes to an existing chord, simply repeat step 2. 3 . To replace an existing chord (rather than adding to it), press Shift before clicking. 4 Note : If you hover the cursor over the score in Note Input Mode it will show you a preview of the note or rest you are about to add. MIDI keyboard You can also insert pitches using a MIDI keyboard. 1 . Connect your MIDI keyboard to the computer and switch the former on 2 . Start MuseScore (this must be done after the keyboard is switched on) 3 . Create a new score 4 . Click the rest (selecting it) in measure 1 to indicate where you want note input to begin 42

43 5 . N to enter note input mode Press . Select a note duration such as for quarter notes (crotchets), as described above 6 5 Press a note on your MIDI keyboard. . 7 The pitch should be added to your score. Step-time allows you to enter one note at a time. Other note input modes are also Note : The default method of entry, . Note input modes available: see If you have multiple MIDI devices connected to your computer, you may need to inform MuseScore which is the MIDI keyboard: . From the menu, select Edit → Preferences... (Mac: MuseScore 1 Preferences... ). → 2 Click on the I/O tab and select your device under the section labeled "MIDI input". . . OK to exit. You will need to restart MuseScore to apply the change. 3 Click Virtual Piano Keyboard piano keyboard . You can also input notes using the on-screen : Press P (or select View → Piano ). To toggle the display on and off To resize the keyboard : Position the mouse pointer over the piano keys , hold down Ctrl (Mac: Cmd ) and move the mouse scroll wheel up (larger) or down (smaller). The method of note entry is similar to that for a : midi keyboard . Note Input mode . 1 Ensure that you are in 2 . To enter a: : Click on the appropriate piano key. Single note Chord Shift , then click on a piano key (in versions before : Select the note you wish to add to, press and hold 2.1, use Ctrl (Mac: Cmd )). Repeat as required. Note input modes MuseScore offers a variety of note input modes in addition to Step-time . All can be accessed by clicking the small arrow next to the "N" button on the left of the Note Input toolbar: Step-time (default) Basic note entry (above). : The default mode of note entry. See Repitch : Replace pitches without changing rhythms. Rhythm : Enter durations with a single click or keypress. Real-time (automatic) : Perform the piece at a fixed tempo indicated by a metronome beat. Real-time (manual) : Perform the piece while tapping a key or pedal to set the beat. Insert : (Called "Timewise" until version 3.0.2) Insert and delete notes and rests within measures, automatically shifting subsequent music forwards or backwards. Coloring of notes outside an instrument's range Depending on the skill of the musician, certain notes are considered beyond the range of a particular instrument. For informational purposes, MuseScore optionally colors notes red if they are outside the range of a "professional" player, and olive green/dark yellow if outside the range of an "early amateur." The colors appear on the computer screen, but not on printed copies. 43

44 To enable/disable note coloration and to set "professional" and "amateur" ranges, see Usable pitch range (Staff properties: all staves). Small notes/small noteheads Select the note(s) you want in small size. 1 . Check the "Small" checkbox in the . The one in the Note section is used to only change the size of the . 2 Inspector section will change the note head, stem, beam, and flag sizes all together. individual notehead; the one in the Chord → Style... → Sizes . By default, the small size is 70% of the normal size. You can change that setting in Format Change notes or rests already entered Change duration To change the length of a single note or rest: . Make sure you are not in (press Esc to exit) and have no other notes selected. 1 note input mode Click on the note or rest and use the duration shortcuts listed above , or the duration icons in the toolbar, to change it 2 . to the duration of your choice. Increasing the duration will overwrite the notes or rests that follow it; decreasing the duration will add rests between it and the notes or rests following. For example, to change three sixteenth rests into a single dotted eighth rest: 1 . Click on the first sixteenth rest. . Hit 4 to turn it into an eighth rest. 2 3 . Hit . to turn it into a dotted eighth rest. As the duration increases, it overwrites the other two sixteenth rests following it. Change pitch To change the pitch of a single note: 1 Make sure that you're not in note input mode and that you have no other notes selected. . . 2 Select the desired note and use any of the following methods: Drag the notehead up or down with the mouse; Press the the keyboard arrows: ↑ (Up) or ↓ (down); Type a new note letter name (A...G). Use Ctrl + ↓ or Ctrl + ↑ to correct the octave, if necessary (Mac: Cmd + ↓ or Cmd ↑ ). This will automatically turn on note input mode. + To change the enharmonic spelling of a note, select it and use the J command. For more information, see Accidentals . To change the pitches of a passage of music by a constant interval, you can use Transposition . To change the pitches of a passage of music to a different melody, while keeping the rhythm unchanged, use Re-pitch mode . If your score contains a lot of misspelled accidentals, you might try the Respell Pitches command (see Accidentals: Respell pitches ). Change rest to note and vice versa To change a rest to a note of the same duration: 44

45 1 . note input mode (press Esc to exit). Make sure you are not in . Select the rest. 2 Enter the desired pitch by entering a note letter, . 3 A–G . To change a note to a rest of the same duration: Make sure you are not in note input mode 1 Esc to exit). . (press . Select the note. 2 . Press 0 3 (Zero). Note properties Offset notes To adjust the horizontal position of a note/chord: see . To edit note properties in general (spacing, offset, size, color, notehead direction, playback etc.): see Inspector and object properties . Layout and formatting , especially the sections about notes To adjust the layout of all notes in the score: see , accidentals and tuplets . See also Note input modes Drum notation Tablature Tuplet Voices Shared noteheads Preferences External links How to enter a chord How to enter a rest How to span a stem over two staves Video tutorial: MuseScore in Minutes: Lesson 3 - Note input Video tutorial: MuseScore in Minutes: Lesson 4 - MIDI Keyboard Input Video tutorial: MuseScore in Minutes: Lesson 5 - More Input Ideas Video: Semi-Realtime MIDI Demo Part 1: New note entry modes (available as of MuseScore 2.1) Edit mode allows you to perform a wide range of editing operations on individual score elements, such as: Edit mode adjust the length and shape of slurs, lines, barlines etc. add, delete and format text in text objects. adjust the position of most score elements (but not text ). Enter/exit edit mode To enter Edit mode use any of the following methods: Double-click an element. Right-click on an element and, from the menu, select . Edit Element Alt Click on an element and press Shift + E . + To exit Edit mode use any of the following: Press . Esc Click on a blank area of the document window. Text For text edit mode , see Text editing . 45

46 Lines See , and Adjust slur . Lines: Change length Notes Offset notes Sometimes it is necessary to shift a note to the right or left—to avoid a collision with another element or to override for example: automatic notehead sharing . Enter Edit mode on the desired note; 1 Press the arrow key in the direction (left or right) that you wish to nudge the note (or use Ctrl + ← or Ctrl 2 → for larger . + adjustments); Press the Esc key. This will allow the note stem to be redrawn. . 3 . Inspector Alternatively, you can select the notehead and change the "Horizontal offset" (under "Chord") in the Adjust note stem length . Enter Edit mode on the desired note stem; 1 . 2 keyboard shortcuts (below) to extend or shorten the stem; Use . Exit edit mode. 3 . Alternatively, you can select the stem and change the "Length Offset" (under "Stem") in the Inspector To reposition a note stem, you should select it and adjust the "X" or "Y" setting for the "Offset" under "Automatic placement" in the "Element" section of the Inspector . Keyboard shortcuts Edit mode the following keyboard commands can be used to change the position of either (1) a In (e.g. score element ornament, accidental etc.) or (2) an (e.g. slur, line etc.): adjustment handle : Move left 0.1 staff space . ← : Move right 0.1 staff space → ↑ : Move up 0.1 staff space ↓ : Move down 0.1 staff space Ctrl + ← (Mac: ⌘ + ← ): Move left one staff space Ctrl + (Mac: ⌘ + → ): Move right one staff space → + (Mac: ⌘ + ↑ ): Move up one staff space Ctrl ↑ + ↓ (Mac: ⌘ + ↓ Ctrl ): Moves down one staff space Alt ← : Move left 0.01 staff space + + Alt : Move right 0.01 staff space → Alt + ↑ : Move up 0.01 staff space Alt + ↓ : Move down 0.01 staff space The following commands only apply to adjustment handles : + left by one note/rest. : Move end handle's anchor Shift ← Shift → : Move end handle's anchor right by one note/rest. + Tab : Go to next handle. To undo all edits, ensure you are in edit mode and press Ctrl + R . not See also Text editing Slur Bracket Line Beam Hairpin 46

47 Palettes To the left of the document window is the palette area: a is a folder containing musical symbols (usually related) Palette workspace which can be applied to the score. Together, the palettes form the main part of a . To view or hide the palettes : View → Palettes ; or use the keyboard shortcut, F9 . From the menu, select Single Palette Mode If you only want to allow one palette to open at a time, right click at the top of the workspace and check the "Single palette" box. This will cause a palette to automatically close when you open a different one. Open/close palette Click once on the name of the palette or its accompanying side-arrow. Apply symbols from a palette A palette symbol may be applied to the score using one of the following methods: Select one or more score elements and double click the palette symbol. Drag and drop the symbol onto the desired score element in the staff. Tip : To prevent accidental rearrangement of contents during use, right-click over a palette name and untick "Enable Editing." For example, to add tenuto marks (—) to a selection of notes: 1 . Select the desired notes. 2 . Articulations & Ornaments palette, double-click on the tenuto symbol In the Copy and paste . Once added to the score, objects can be copied, pasted, and duplicated—see Custom palettes Once you have created a custom workspace , and enabled editing (see Palette menu below), you can customize the palettes within it to your own requirements. To add an existing score element (such as a line, text, dynamic, fretboard diagram etc.) to a custom palette: + Ctrl + Shift (Mac: Cmd Press and hold Shift ), then drag the symbol onto the palette. To add a symbol to a custom workspace from the Master palette : 47

48 Drag the symbol from the Master Palette window into a custom palette. To re-arrange a symbol in a custom palette: Drag the symbol to the cell you want it to display in: it will swap places with the symbol currently occupying that cell. Palette menu Right-clicking on the name of a palette in a custom workspace brings up this menu: Palette Properties... : Adjust the appearance of the open palette: Name , Height Cell Size: Width Element Offset : Adjust the vertical offset of all elements in the palette. Scale : Make all palette elements appear larger or smaller. Show grid : Visually divide the palette into cells, one for each element. Show ‘More Elements...’ : Create a cell which opens the Master Palette. : Create a new empty palette. Insert New Palette / Move Palette Up : Reorder the palettes. Move Palette Down : Allow modifying the contents of the palette. Enable Editing : Save as an .mpal file. Save Palette : Load an .mpal file. Load Palette Delete Palette : Remove the palette from the workspace entirely. Right-clicking on an element within a palette (if editing of the palette is enabled) brings up this menu: Clear : Remove the element from the palette Properties... : Open the Palette Cell Properties dialogue: Name : The tooltip that appears when you mouse over the element. : Adjust the position of the element in the palette. Content offset (X, Y) : Make the element appear larger or smaller in the palette. Content scale Draw staff : Draw the five lines of a musical staff behind the palette element. More Elements : Open the relevant Master Palette section. Note : Changing values in "Palette Cell Properties" only affects the appearance of elements in the palette. It does not change their sizes or offsets on the score page. Behavior of applied text and lines If the symbol you are adding to the score from a palette contains a text element (e.g. staff text, dynamic, fingering, volta etc.), then properties such as font-type, font-size, text color, and alignment will adapt according to the following rules: 1 . Text properties which have not been altered by the user will adopt the relevant, prevailing text styles . 2 Custom text-properties—i.e. those changed by the user before saving the symbol to a custom palette—remain as . customized. By contrast, the line properties of lines applied from a palette always remain unchanged (i.e. as set by the user before saving to a custom workspace, or as predefined in the Basic/Advanced workspaces). See also Master palette 48

49 Workspaces The consists of several components, the main one being the palette area, situated to the left of the document workspace window. Each is a folder containing musical symbols (usually related) which can be applied to the score. Click on the palette palette name to open and close it. To view or hide the palette area of the workspace : F9 ; alternatively, from the menu, select View → Press, Palettes . MuseScore provides two preset workspaces: Basic (the default option) and Advanced (a version with more palettes and symbols). These contain symbols drawn from the various sections of the Master palette . In addition, you can create your own custom workspaces (below). To switch between workspaces Select a new workspace from the drop-down menu at the bottom of the workspace panel; alternatively, select → View , and click on one of the options. Workspaces Docking/undocking To dock or undock a workspace, see Side panels . Create a custom workspace The Basic and Advanced workspaces are preset and cannot be changed by the user. However, MuseScore allows you to create your own workspaces which are fully editable: To create a customizable : workspace 1 . Select an existing workspace: use the drop-down list at the bottom of the workspace panel if required; 2 . Click the + button (next to the dropdown list), which displays the following dialog: 49

50 Note : this can also be opened from the menu: → Workspace → New ; View . 3 Enter a name for the new workspace; 4 . Tick the components that you want joined to the workspace, namely: Toolbars : Allows you to customize the tool button display and the order in which they are displayed. Access View → Toolbars → Customize toolbars . this via : Allows you to change the menus and menu items displayed in the Menu bar. NOT IMPLEMENTED Menu bar YET; : Saves information with the workspace about the position of the GUI (Graphical user GUI components interface) components, and whether they are open or not. (e.g. Inspector, Timeline); GUI Preferences Edit → Preferences , such as Theme : Saves the preferences selected for the GUI elements in and Canvas settings; 5 Press Save . The new workspace is added to the panel. . To insert, delete, rename and reorder the palettes within a custom workspace; or to edit the palette display; or to enable editing of palette contents: see Palette menu . To add to, rearrange, or delete palette contents: see Custom palettes . Edit workspace To edit the workspace name or to change which components are associated with the workspace: View Workspace → Edit . Select → Create New Workspace dialog (above). This displays a window with the same options as the See also Palettes Master palette Inspector Displaying the Inspector The Inspector appears by default on the right of your screen. To show or hide it: From the menu, select View and check or uncheck Inspector ; alternatively, use the shortcut F8 (Mac: fn + F8 ). To undock the panel: Inspector Click the double-chevron symbol or double-click the top bar of the panel. To re-attach the panel double-click on the top bar again. See also: Side panels . What the Inspector does When you select any object in the score window, its properties are automatically displayed in the Inspector where they can be edited. Multiple elements can also be selected and edited together—as long as they are of the same type. However, if the selected objects are of different types, then the Inspector restricts you to editing color and visibility only. 50

51 "Reset to style default" and "Set to style" buttons When you select a score object, two types of buttons are clearly visible on the right-hand side of the Inspector: : . Press this button to reset a particular property to the default value—i.e. the one shown Reset to style default . in the Style menu : . Press this button to make the value of a particular property the new default for the style. This will Set as style update the Style menu and all other objects governed by that style. : You can also edit styles directly from the Style menu . Note Inspector categories categories Properties are conveniently listed under Categories can be identified by their bold lettering. in the Inspector. For example, if you select a barline, you will see the following displayed at the top of the Inspector: For details of the various categories and their properties, see below: Element All score elements—except frames, breaks and spacers—display this category in the Inspector when selected. The options are as follows: Visible invisible ; alternatively, use the shortcut V (toggle). Invisible : Uncheck this box to make selected elements elements do not appear in the music when printed out or exported as a PDF or image. If you still want them to remain on display in the document window, make sure that the "Show Invisible" option is selected in View → Show . Invisible elements will then be colored light gray. Invisible : See Automatic placement: Stacking order Stacking order Color : Click on the rectangle to open a "Color Select" dialog. Adjust the color and opacity of selected elements. Automatic placement : See Automatic placement . Offset X / Y : Allows you to position selected elements exactly (in terms of space units). A positive number moves the elements right or down; a negative number moves the elements left or up. buttons are also provided. Snap to grid Element Group This category is displayed only when you have selected a mixture of different types of elements, and allows editing of color and visibility only. Segment Leading Space : Use this to increase or decrease the space before an element. This also affects any associated lyric syllables. Chord 51

52 Offset X / : This changes the positon of every note in the same voice as the selected note(s). If you want to make Y just one note , use the category instead). changes to the position of Element : Make noteheads and stem small. Small Stemless : Make chord stemless. Stem direction : Choice of Auto, Up, or Down. Note Element ). It contains the This category allows you to make changes to selected notes (but for note position—see following properties: : Make notehead smaller (you can specify the relative size of all small notes from the menu: Format → Style... Small → Sizes... ). : See . Head group Notehead groups Head type : See Notehead types . : Position notehead to the left or right of the stem (default is "Auto"). Mirror head : Adjust tuning of note to the nearest cent . Tuning Play : Unticking this box silences the note. Velocity type : Sets the MIDI velocity of notes directly. Chose one of two options: Offset : Make the value shown in "Velocity" relative to the previous dynamic marking. User : Make the value shown in "Velocity" (i.e. the MIDI velocity is unaffected by dynamic markings). absolute : Set the MIDI velocity according to the option displayed in "Velocity type." Velocity : When ticked, the note is fixed to the top line of the standard 5-line staff. Fix to line Line : A positive number moves the "fixed" note down; a negative number moves it upwards. Select This category appears differently according to the selection you have made: , the "Select" category displays buttons which allow you to easily switch the selection to the If you select a notehead stem, beam, hook, duration dot (or dots) or tuplet number associated with the notehead (see image below). , the "Select" category allows you to select either all notes If you select a range of measures grace notes , or rests . , Beam This section is displayed in the Inspector when you select one or more note beams, and allows you to make fine Adjust beam with the adjustments to beam position and angle, and also change the spacing of beamed notes. See inspector . Clef This section appears when you select a clef: the tick box allows you to turn on/off the display of a preceding courtesy clef . Articulation This category appears when you select an articulation or ornament . The following options are available: Direction : Whether the symbol points up or down: only applicable to certain symbols. Anchor : The vertical placement of the symbol: Time stretch : Only applicable to fermatas. Allows you to vary the pause in playback. Ornament style : A choice of default or Baroque playback. Play : Turn on/off playback effect. Fretboard diagram 52

53 See Fretboard diagrams . Line This category is displayed when a line is selected. Here, you can set various general properties. : Hide or display just the line: any text remains visible. Visible Allow diagonal : The default is horizontal (unticked). Tick if you want to edit the line to create a slope. Line color/thickness/style : Set various properties of the line. Text Line Core is selected. It allows you to set the wording of a line, edit text properties, set line This category is displayed when a line hooks, and align the text in relation to the line. / Height : At the beginning of the line, specify no hook, or a vertical or angled hook; set hook length. Begin hook / Height End hook : Ditto for the very end of the line. Begin Text Continue Text / End Text : Refers to text at the very beginning of the line; at the beginning of any / continuation line; or at the end of the very last line. All have the same properties, as follows: Text : Create or edit the text associated with the line. / Size / Style Font face text properties , and/or edit the text style of the line. : Set the Align : Set the horizontal and vertical alignment of the text in relation to the line. Placement : Place the text on (Above/Below), or to the left of the line. Offset X / : Adjust the x and y offsets for exact positioning. Y Properties dialogs Some object types have additional properties. These are accessed by right-clicking on the object and choosing a "... properties" option from the context menu. The settings available in these dialoges are explained in the description of the object type in Notation or Advanced Topics . See: Articulations and ornaments Time signatures Staff and system text Measure operations Staff/Part properties See also Note input Layout and formatting Parts Measure operations Note : To ensure that inserted or appended measures display correctly, multimeasure rests should be set to off (toggle M ). Select Single measure To select a single measure, click on a space within the measure. Range of measures To select a continuous range of measures, see Shift + click selection and Shift selection . Insert Insert an empty measure into the score 53

54 Use one of the following options: Select Ins (no shortcut on Mac). a measure or a frame, then press Add → → Insert Measure . Select a measure or a frame, then chose from the menu: Measures Insert multiple measures Use one of the following options: (no shortcut on Mac); fill in the "Number of measures to insert" field + Ins a measure or a frame, then press Select Ctrl OK . and press Add → Measures → Insert Measures... ; fill in the "Number of Select a measure or a frame, then chose from the menu: OK measures to insert" field and press . Append Append an empty measure to the end of a score Use one of the following options: Ctrl + B (Mac: ⌘ + B Press ). Select from the menu: Add → Measures → Append One Measure . Append multiple measures to the end of a score Use one of the following options: Press Alt + Shift + B (Mac: Option + Shift + B ); fill in the "Number of measures to append" field and press OK . Select from the menu: Add Measures → Append Measures... ; fill in the "Number of measures to append" field and press → . OK Delete Delete a single measure the measure, and press Ctrl + Select (Mac: Cmd + Del ). Del Delete a range of measures 1 . Select the range of measures to delete; (Mac: 2 Ctrl + Del Press Cmd + Del ). . Notes : (1) In multi-staff scores, measure deletion also removes all corresponding measures in the other staves of the system; (2) If you wish to delete the measure contents (and not the measure itself), use the Del command instead at only step "2." Properties To edit the properties of a measure, right-click an empty part of the measure and select Measure Properties... : 54

55 You can use the buttons, at the bottom left of the dialog, to navigate to the previous or next measure. Staves The property allows you to show/hide the notes and staff lines for the current measure. visible The stemless property allows you to show/hide all note stems for the current measure. Notes that normally have a stem such as half notes (minims) and quarter notes (crotchets) only show the note head when marked as stemless. Measure duration This feature allows you to adjust the time signature of a single measure regardless of the time signature indicated in the pickup measure (also known as anacrusis or score. You can use it to create a ), cadenza , ad lib section etc. upbeat Nominal is the apparent time signature and cannot be edited. Actual can be set to anything you like regardless of the nominal time signature. Example : In the image below, the quarter note pickup measure has a nominal time signature of 4/4, but an actual time sig. of 1/4. The measures in the middle are in normal 4/4 time. The complementary measure at the end of the staff, with a dotted half note, has an time sig. of 3/4. actual Other Exclude from measure count "Exclude from measure count" for "irregular" measures, i.e. ones that should not get counted in the measure Use Exclude from measure count numbering. Normally, a pickup measure is marked as " ". Break multi-measure rests This property will separate a multi-measure rest at the start of the selected measure. This option should be checked before you turn on the "Create multi-measure rests" option in Format → Style... → Score . Multi-measure rests are automatically broken at important breaks, such as rehearsal marks, time signature changes, , for irregular measures , etc. The default for scores is off double barlines, parts is on . 55

56 Measure number mode This allows you to control how measure numbers display on the selected measure. Chose "Auto," "Always Show," or "Always Hide" from the dropdown list. Layout stretch You can increase or decrease horizontal space between score elements (notes, rests, etc.) with this option. This provides a more precise control over the exact same measure spacing property as the menu commands or keyboard shortcuts for ( and } ), which are accessed outside of the Measure Properties dialog while a measure is { Increase/Decrease Stretch selected. Add to measure number You can also use the "Add to measure number" option to influence the measure numbering. You can enter positive or negative numbers here. Please note that this affects all subsequent measures. A value of "-1" has the same effect as marking a measure to be excluded from measure count. Play Count If the measure contains an end repeat barline, you can define how often it is played. Numbering By default, MuseScore numbers the first measure of each System (except for the first measure in a ), but other section numbering options are available: see → Style... → Measure Numbers . Format Mark the checkbox next to the "Measure Numbers" ("Bar Numbers") to turn on automatic measure numbers. Mark "Show first" if you want the first measure numbered. Mark "All staves" if you want numbers on all staves. Otherwise, only the top staff of each system shows measure numbers. Choose to show numbers on "Every system", which numbers the first measure of each line; or show numbers by "Interval" and specify the size of the interval. For example, an interval of 1 numbers every measure; an interval of 5 numbers every fifth measure. Split and join You may want have to have a longer or shorter measure without changing the time signature. You can change the duration of the measure in Measure Properties , but there is also the option to split or join measures. Join measures Method A . To join two measures only : Select the barline between the two measures and press Ctrl Delete . + . To join : Method B any number of measures . Select the measures you want to join; 1 2 From the menu bar, select Tools → Measure → Join Selected Measures . . Notes : (1) If you select measures on only one staff in a score with multiple staves, the same measures will be joined in each staff of the system. (2) Beaming may be automatically modified. Split a measure Chose one of the following methods: Select a note; then hold Ctrl and double-click a barline in a palette . Hold Ctrl and drag a barline (from a palette) to the note that starts the next measure. → Select Tools → Measure a note; then, from the menu bar, select Split Measure Before Selected Note/Rest . Note : If you select only one note from one staff, each staff of the system will be split at the same place. 56

57 External links How to delete measures (1.x) How to span a measure over multiple systems How to get scores without time signature (and clef) Voices voice same staff. Voices is a musical line or part which can have its own rhythm independently of other voices on the A are sometimes called "layers" in other notation software. on You can have up to 4 staff line. In a polyphonic measure, voice 1 usually takes the up-stem notes and voices each takes the voice 2 notes. down-stem N.B. Be careful not to confuse the concept of MuseScore voices (1, 2, 3, 4) with the order of voices found in vocal scores closed and (SATB etc.). In particular, when creating a SATB score, use only (MuseScore) voices 1 and 2 for both upper lower staves. There is no need to use (MuseScore) voices 3 and 4 unless there are more than two parts in the same staff. How voices are displayed Selecting a section of the score highlights each voice in a different color: voice 1 blue, voice 2 green, voice 3 orange and voice 4 purple. When to use voices If you need stems pointing in opposite directions within a chord, on a single staff. If you need notes of different durations within a single staff, played simultaneously. How to enter notes in different voices The following instructions show you how to notate a passage of music in two voices: 1 . Enter voice 1 notes first : Make sure you are in note input mode : the Voice 1 button becomes highlighted in blue in the toolbar. Enter the notes in the top voice first. When inputting, some notes may have down-stems, but these will flip automatically when the second voice is added. The following excerpt shows a treble staff with just the voice 1 notes entered: . Move cursor back to start of section : When you have finished entering a section of voice 1 notes, press the ← key 2 Ctrl repeatedly to move the cursor, note-by-note, back to the first note of the section; or alternatively use ← + (Mac: Cmd + ← ) to move the cursor back one measure at a time. Or else you can simply exit note input mode (press Esc ) and click directly on the first note. 3 Enter voice 2 notes : Make sure you are in note-input mode and that the voice 1 note at the beginning of the section . is selected. Click on the "Voice 2" button (on the right of the toolbar), or use the shortcut Ctrl + Alt + 2 (Mac: Cmd + Option + 2 ). Enter all the lower voice notes (down-stem). The following image shows the above example after the addition of voice 2 notes: 57

58 Deleting and hiding rests All rests can be made , if required: select the desired rest(s) and press V , or uncheck the "Visible" checkbox in the invisible . Rests in voices 2, 3 or 4 (but not deleted (by selecting them and pressing Delete ) but it is Inspector voice 1) can also be not recommended: make them invisible instead. Timewise Delete A voice 1 rest can only be deleted by removing that part of the measure from the score as well: see ; or Delete measure(s) . Restoring deleted rests If a rest has been deleted in voices 2-4, you will need to restore it before you can enter a note on that beat in that voice XML (the problem may arise, for example, in imported MIDI files). The easiest way to fix such a measure is to or exchange that voice with voice 1 twice. For the exact method, see Exchange voices of notes (below). Exchange voices of notes To swap the notes between any two voices: . Select one or more continuous measures (or a range of notes); 1 . Tools → Voices ; 2 From the Menu bar, select . Select the option for the two voices you want to exchange. 3 : (a) The selection can encompass content of any voice, but only two will be processed at once. (b) If you select a Notes partial measure the operation will still apply to the whole measure. Move notes to another voice (without swapping) You can also move notes from one voice to another (without note-swapping): 1 . Ensure you are not in note input mode . 2 . Select one or more noteheads (in any voice). 1-4 3 Note Input toolbar or use the shortcut Ctrl + Alt + 1–4 (Mac: Cmd + Option + Click on the destination voice in the ). . Note : For a successful move, the following conditions need to be met: The chord in the destination voice must be the same duration as the note to be moved there. Alternatively, if the destination voice is occupied by a rest, it must be of sufficient duration to accommodate the moved note. Notes should be tied . not See also Keyboard shortcuts: Voices Noteheads: Shared noteheads External links How to merge/combine/implode two staves in one with two voices Video tutorial: How To Write Two Parts On One Staff: Voices Copy and paste copy , cut MuseScore supports standard paste and swap with clipboard operations. These commands can be applied , to a range of: Musical notes : e.g. to repeat a section of music, or shift a passage by a beat or a measure. Other score elements : such as articulations, staff text, dynamics, fingering etc. Note : Lines cannot be copied but they can be duplicated (see below). 58

59 Copy/cut/paste/swap commands are accessed in three ways: From the (above the document window). Edit menu right-clicking on an element or range of elements. From the menu displayed by . Using one of the standard keyboard shortcuts Summary of commands Command Kbd Shortcut (Win) Kbd Shortcut (Mac) Right-click menu Main menu + X Cmd + X Cut Cut → Cut Ctrl Edit Ctrl C Cmd + C + Edit → Copy Copy Copy Ctrl + V Cmd + V Paste Edit → Paste Paste Swap with Edit → Swap with Ctrl Cmd + Shift + X Swap with clipboard + Shift + X clipboard Clipboard : Before carrying out a copy, cut, paste or swap procedure, you should be in normal mode . Press the Esc key to exit Note into normal mode. Notes You can cut, copy, paste or swap notes as follows: Copy or cut To copy/cut a single chord . Hold down Shift and click on a note in the chord. 1 . Apply a Copy or Cut option (see table above). 2 To copy/cut a range of chords 1 . on the first note or measure that you want to select. Click . Shift Click on the last note or measure that you want to select. A blue rectangle highlights the region you selected. 2 + Apply a option (see or Cut . table above). Copy 3 Paste . Click on the note or measure where you want your pasted selection to begin. 1 . 2 Paste option (see table above). Apply a Swap with Clipboard swap with clipboard The operation combines two commands into one: (1) First it overwrites a selected part of the score with the contents of the clipboard, just like the paste command; (2) Secondly, it transfers the overwritten part of the score the clipboard, just like the back to command. copy It can be used, for example, to swap two equal-length sections of a score, A and B : 1 . Select section A , then apply the cut command; 2 . Esc or clicking on a blank area of the document window); Clear the selection (by pressing . Or, if . Shift 3 B Press B begins at the start of a measure, you can also simply and click on a note at the start of section select the measure; 4 . Apply a Swap with clipboard option (see table above). 5 Section B is now in the clipboard. Paste it back to the blank area of score left by step "1." . Copy pitch of a single note only It is possible to copy the pitch of a note only (and no other properties), by clicking on the notehead and applying the standard copy and paste, or copy and swap procedure. The pitch of the destination note changes to match that of the copied note but the duration remains the same. Other elements 59

60 Some elements such as staff text, dynamics, fingering, etc. can be cut, copied and pasted only one at a time . However, multiple-selection " cut/copy/paste: such as (sforzato, staccato etc.), fretboard other elements support " articulations chord symbols , and diagrams . Note : The Swap with clipboard command is only intended for use with sections of music and not other score elements. Copy or cut . Select the element (or elements). 1 . Apply a Copy or Cut option (see 2 above). table Paste . on the note where you want your pasted selection to begin. 1 Click . Apply one of the Paste options (see table above). 2 In the case of articulations, they are pasted to the destination notes in exactly the same order (continuous or intermittent) as they were in the initial selection. Quick repeat To quickly copy and paste a note, measure, or passage: 1 . Select a chord, measure, or passage as described above . 2 . Press R . MuseScore copies and pastes the selected notation to a point immediately after the last note in the selection. Any existing music in the destination range is replaced. Duplicate To instantaneously copy and paste a text element, line, or other object: . Hold down Ctrl + Shift (Mac: Cmd + Shift 1 ), click on the element and drag it anywhere in the score. 2 . Release the mouse button, and the selected element is cloned to the new location. Selection filter The Selection Filter allows you to chose exactly which voices and elements you want to include in your selection. To display the Selection filter, press F6 (Mac: fn + F6 ); or from the menu, chose View → Selection Filter . The Selection Filter appears by default below the . To change the viewing location, see Viewing and Navigation: Palettes Side panels . Example : Suppose you want to copy measures 1 and 2 in the following passage (see image), to give measures 3 and 4: 1 . Make sure the Selection Filter is displayed (see above); 2 . Uncheck the "Articulations & Ornaments" and "Slurs" tickboxes; 3 . Copy and paste the desired measures (in this example, 1-2 into 3-4). 60

61 Note : The Selection Filter works with the command as well. swap with clipboard See also If you want to change notes without altering the rhythm, you may combine re-pitch mode with copy and transposition or paste. External links Video tutorial: Lyrics, copying & dynamics Selection modes Objects in the score—such as notes, measures, articulations etc.—can be selected in several ways: (1) one at a time , (2) as a continuous . , or (3) as a range list Select a single object . Normal mode Most score objects can be selected by simply clicking on them in Select a single note Normal mode , click on a notehead. In Note : Selecting a single note then copying and pasting it, will only copy and paste the pitch—not duration or other properties (such as stemless). To copy the entire note, including all properties, you need to hold down —as for chord Shift selection (below). Select a chord In Shift , then click on a notehead in the chord. Normal mode , press and hold Select a single measure Click on a blank space within the measure. : To select a range of consecutive measures, see Shift selection and Note (below). Shift + click selection Select a continuous range of objects continuous range of notes, chords or measures: There are several ways to select a 1. Shift selection . Normal mode ; Make sure you are in 1 Select the first 2 , chord , rest or measure in the range. You can extend the selection up or down to adjacent . note Shift staves, if needed, using ↑ or ↓ ; + 3 Then choose one of the following options: . Shift . → To advance the selection one chord at a time to the right: Press + To advance the selection one chord at a time to the left: Shift + ← . Press To advance the selection one measure at a time to the right: Press Shift + Ctrl + → (Mac: Shift + Cmd + → ). To advance the selection one measure at a time to the left: Press Shift Ctrl + ← (Mac: Shift + Cmd + ← ). + Shift Shift Home (Mac: To advance the selection to the beginning of the line: Press + Fn + ← ). + + To advance the selection to the end of the line: Press End (Mac: Shift + Fn + → ). Shift To extend the selection to the beginning of the score: Press Shift + Ctrl + Home (Mac: Shift + Cmd + Fn + ← ). + To extend the selection to the end of the score: Press Ctrl + End (Mac: Shift + Cmd + Fn + → ). Shift 2. Shift + click selection To select a range of or rests : notes 1 . Make sure you are in Normal mode ; 2 . Click on the first note or rest in the range; 61

62 3 . Shift , then click on the last desired note or rest. Press and hold : The final selected element can be in the same staff or in staffs above or below the initial note/rest. All selected Note elements will be enclosed in a blue rectangle, including associated lines and articulations (but not voltas). You can repeat the operation to extend the selected range as required. Select a range of measures 1 Click on a blank space in the first desired measure; . 2 . Hold down Shift , then click on a space in the last measure of the desired range. Note : As with selecting notes, the range can be extended vertically as well as horizontally. 3. Drag selection This method can be used to select notes or rests, or, independently, to select non-note symbols such as staccato dots, lyrics etc.: Press and hold Shift , then drag the cursor across the desired range. 4. Select All whole musical score including notes, rests and associated elements. Use one of the following This method selects the options: Press + A (Mac: Cmd + A ). Ctrl Edit → From the menu bar, select Select All . 5. Select section This method is used to select a —a region of the score starting and/or ending with a section break : section 1 . Click on an empty space in a measure in the section; 2 . From the menu bar, select Edit → Select Section . Note: See Copy and paste: Selection filter to disable certain types of elements from being selected in a range selection. Select a list of objects To select a (or discontinuous range) of score elements: list 1 . Click on the first element; . Hold down Ctrl 2 Cmd ) and successively click on the desired additional elements. (Mac: Note : This method cannot be used to select measures. Use single or range selection instead. Select all similar To select all elements of a specific type (e.g., all barlines, all text elements, all staccato markings): 1 . Select an element; . Right click and chose 2 ; Select... 3 . Several options are available: All Similar Elements : Selects all elements in the score similar to the chosen object. All Similar Elements in Same Staff : Selects all elements in the same staff similar to the chosen object. All Similar Elements in Range Selection : only applies if a range has been selected. Selects all elements in the range similar to the chosen object. More... : opens a dialog that lets you fine-tune more options. For example, if you have a notehead selected, the dialog will look something like this: 62

63 Select Same notehead: In this example, only noteheads of the same will be selected; group Same pitch: Only noteheads of the same pitch will be selected; * Same string: (tablature only) selects fretmarks on same string. ) will be selected; * Same type: All noteheads (of any group * Same duration: Only noteheads of same duration will be selected; * Same note name: Noteheads of that name in all octaves will be selected; * Same staff: Only noteheads on the same staff will be selected. * Same voice: Selects all notes of same voice. * In selection: * Same system: Action * Replace selection: The default option—starts the selection from scratch; Keeps everything you have already selected, and adds the current selection to it; * Add to selection: * Search in selection: * Subtract from selection: Keep everything you have already selected, but takes away the current selection. What selections are useful for Copy and paste Edit mode Inspector and object properties Tools See also Basics Note input chapter, esp. Notation chapter, esp. Accidental Text chapter, esp. Text editing and Grid-based movement of symbols and staff text Undo and redo MuseScore remembers an unlimited number of undo/redo actions. shortcuts The standard are: Ctrl + Z Undo ⌘ + Z ) (Mac: Redo Ctrl + Shift + Z or Ctrl + Y (Mac: ⌘ + Shift + Z ) Or use the toolbar buttons: 63

64 Viewing and navigation This chapter describes the options available in the Menu, and in the Zoom and Page View/Continuous View View menus (located in the toolbar above the score). It also details the various navigation commands and functions. View menu Show sidebars/panels F9 Palettes : : Shift + F9 Master palette Inspector : F8 : F11 Play Panel Navigator : : F12 Timeline : F10 Mixer Synthesizer Selection filter F6 : Piano keyboard : P Score comparison tool Zoom in/out There are several ways to zoom the score in or out: Keyboard shortcut : Zoom In: Ctrl + + (Mac: Cmd + + ) Zoom Out: Ctrl + - (Mac: Cmd + - ). View menu : View Zoom In Zoom In: → View → Zoom Out . Zoom Out: Mouse Zoom In: Scroll up with the mouse wheel while holding down Ctrl (Mac: Cmd ) Zoom Out: Scroll down with the mouse wheel while holding down Ctrl (Mac: Cmd ). Drop-down menu : To set a specific zoom, use the dropdown menu in the standard toolbar to set the view magnification of the score (25–1600 %) or display it using the options "Page Width", "Whole Page", or "Two Pages". To return to 100% zoom : Use the shortcut Ctrl + 0 (Mac: Cmd + 0 ). Toolbars The Toolbar area is located between the Menu bar and the document window . 64

65 It contains the following toolbars: File Operations : New score, Load score, Save, Print, Undo, Redo. / Page View Zoom . : Enable MIDI, Rewind, Play/Stop, Loop, Play Repeats, Metronome. Playback controls Concert Pitch : Displays score in written or concert (sounding) pitch. snapshot of part of the score. Image Capture : Allows you to take a : Note entry mode, Duration, Tie, Rest, Accidentals, Flip stem direction, Voice (1, 2, 3, 4). Note Input Show/hide toolbars To show or hide certain toolbars: Select → Toolbars , and tick/untick the options as required. View Alternatively, right-click on an empty space in the toolbar area, or the title bar of the Inspector, and, from the menu, Note check or uncheck the required options ( : This option also allows you to show or hide the Timeline, Score Comparison Tool, Script Recorder, Piano Keyboard, Selection Filter, and Drumset Tools). Customise toolbar area View → Toolbars , and click on "Customise Toolbars..." Select The dialog shows the toolbars that can be customized on the left, the current tool buttons for the selected toolbar in the middle, and the buttons that can be added on the right. When you have selected a toolbar in the left panel, you can do any of the following actions: : Select the buton in the middle panel, and press . Remove a toolbutton → : Select the button in the right panel, and press ← . Add a toolbutton : Select the button in the middle panel, and move it up or down using ↑ or ↓ . Move a toolbutton Workspaces Select this option to or to edit an existing workspace . create a custom workspace Show Status bar The Status bar , at the bottom of the screen, gives information about selected score elements. Tick/untick this option to display or hide. Split display It is possible to split the document display so as to view two documents at once, or to view two different parts of the same document. Tabs allow you to choose which document to display in each view. You can drag the barrier separating the two scores to adjust the amount of space in the window devoted to each: Documents Side by Side : Divides the window vertically into two score views. 65

66 Documents Stacked : Divides the window horizontally into two score views, one above the other. Visibility options This section allows you to display or hide various non-printing elements: invisible for printing and export. If this option is ticked, Show Invisible : View/hide elements that have been made invisible elements are shown in the score window as light gray. : View/hide Show Unprintable symbols. breaks and spacer Show Frames : View/hide the dotted outlines of frames . : View/hide Show Page Margins . Page Margins Mark irregular measures A blue dash at the top right of a measure indicates that its duration differs from that set by the time signature. Full screen Full Screen mode expands MuseScore to fill your screen so more content is visible. Page/Continuous View You can switch between different views of the score using the drop-down list in the toolbar area: To scroll the score: : Move the mouse wheel up or down. Vertically Horizontally : Press Shift and move the mouse wheel up or down. Page View In Page View , the score is formatted as it will appear when printed or exported as a PDF or image file: that is, page by breaks page, with margins. MuseScore applies system (line) and page automatically, according to the settings made in Page settings and Style: General . In addition, you can apply your own system (line), page or section breaks. To choose between or vertical page scrolling, see Preferences: Canvas (Scroll pages) . horizontal Continuous View In Continuous View , the score is shown as one unbroken system. Even if the starting point is not in view, measure numbers, instrument names, clefs, time and key signatures will always be displayed on the left of the window. : Because the layout is simpler, MuseScore may perform faster in Continuous View than Page View. Note Single Page View In Single Page View the score is shown as a single page with a header but no margins, and with an infinite page height. System (line) breaks are added automatically, according to the settings made in Page settings and Style: General . In 66

67 addition, you can apply your own system (line) or section breaks. Side panels workspaces , and Selection filter are conveniently displayed as side panels to the left and right of the The Inspector score window. To undock a side panel use one of the following methods: Drag the panel; Click on the double chevron at the top of the panel; Double click in the title area at the top of the panel. To dock a panel use one of the following procedures: Drag the panel to the top/bottom of an existing side panel and it will stack vertically above/below that panel. Drag the panel to the middle of an existing side panel and it will overlay that panel. Both panels can then be accessed by tabs. Alternatively, double-clicking the title bar of the panel will restore it to its previously docked position. Navigation Commands Various commands are available to help you navigate more easily through the score. These are listed under Keyboard . shortcuts: Navigation Navigator The is an optional panel which displays page thumbnails of the score at the bottom or to the right of the Navigator document window. To view or hide the Navigator, select → Navigator ; or use a customised shortcut . View if scrolling The Navigator appears at the bottom of the document window if scrolling pages horizontally; or on the right Preferences: Canvas ). pages vertically (see The blue box represents the area of the score that is currently visible in the document window: drag the box, or click directly on the navigator panel to bring another part of the score into view. You can also drag the scrollbar. Timeline The Timeline panel provides a detailed overview of the score, with expanded possibilities for navigation and interaction. To display the Timeline , press F12 ; or select View → Timeline . For details, see . Timeline Find The Find function allows you to speedily navigate to a specific measure, rehearsal mark or page number in the score: 1 . Press Ctrl + F (Mac: Cmd + F ), or select Edit → Find . This opens the Find (or Go to ) bar at the bottom of the workspace. 2 Use one of the following options: . To go to a numbered measure : enter the measure number (counting every measure, starting with 1, irrespective of pickup measures , section breaks or manual changes to measure number offsets). 67

68 To go to a numbered page : enter the page number using the format pXX (where XX is the page number). : enter the number using the format rXX (where XX is the name of the To go to a numerical rehearsal mark rehearsal mark. : enter the name of the rehearsal mark starting with a letter rehearsal mark To go to a (the search is case insensitive). : It is best to avoid naming rehearsal marks with the single letters "R," "r," "P", "p," or one of these letters with an N.B. integer (e.g. "R1" or "p3"), as this can confuse the search algorithm. See also Save/Export/Print File format Layout and formatting Concert pitch You can chose to display the score in either written or concert (sounding) pitch. Written pitch displays the score as it should look when printed for musicians to read. However, during preparation you may prefer the convenience of seeing transposing instruments the as they sound , without transposition. In this case you should select the "Concert notated pitch" option. written concert pitch: To toggle the score display between or Press the Concert Pitch button (located in the top right of the toolbar area). When this button is highlighted the score is in concert pitch. Concert Pitch button is off , and Before printing the score, exporting it to PDF or saving it online, you should ensure that the that the individual parts are correctly transposed. See also Transposition: Transposing instruments Accidental: Respell pitches External links Concert pitch (Wikipedia article) Transposing Instrument (Wikipedia article) (MuseScore forum discussion) Concert pitch or not? Open/Save/Export/Print In the File menu you can find options for opening, saving, exporting and printing your file: Open native format files (*.mscz and *.mscx), MuseScore can also open MusicXML , Apart from and compressed MusicXML MIDI files, as well as a variety of files in other formats . To open any supported file: 1 . Chose one of the following options: Press Ctrl + O . Click on the "Load score" icon on the left side of the toolbar area. From the menu bar, select → Open... . File . Select a file and click Open ; or simply double-click a file. 2 Open recent... allows you to chose from a list of recently-opened scores. Save Save... , Save As... , Save a Copy... and Save Selection... allow you to save native MuseScore files (.mscz and .mscx). 68

69 Save... : Save current score to file. : Save current score to new file. Save As... Save a Copy... : Save current score to new file, but continue to edit original file. : Save selected measures to new file. Save Selection... Save Online... To save and share your scores on the web at MuseScore.com . For details, see Share scores : online . Export and Export Parts... allow you to create non-MuseScore files, such as PDF, MusicXML, MIDI, and various audio Export... . In the Export dialog, you can choose which format to export to. and image formats : Export current score to format of your choice. Export... : Export current score and all to separate files in a format of your choice. Export Parts... linked parts MuseScore remembers which format you picked the last time and makes that the default for the next time. Print Print... allows to print your MuseScore file directly to a printer from MuseScore. Depending on your printer you will have different options, but generally you can define the page range, number of copies and collation. Print If you have a PDF printer installed, you could also "export" to PDF using , but it's usually better to use the native PDF option under Export for more accurate rendition. Note : For this to work properly with Adobe PDF, make sure to uncheck "Rely on system fonts only, do not use document fonts" in Printer properties. See also File format Part extraction Share scores online Go to to view other scores from MuseScore. musescore.com/sheetmusic MuseScore.com You can save and share your scores online at . You can choose to save a score privately for personal access from any computer, or share it publicly. MuseScore.com enables the viewing and playback of scores in your web browser - an additional feature entitled VideoScores allows synchronization between the score and a YouTube video. For use outside of a web browser, you can download the score in a variety of formats (including PDF, MIDI, MP3, MusicXML, and the original MuseScore file). Create an account . Visit MuseScore.com and click on " Create new account ". Pick a username and enter a valid email and press 1 "Create New Account". 2 . Wait a few minutes for an email from MuseScore.com support. If no email arrives, check your spam folder. 3 Click the link in the email and visit your user profile to change your password. . Share a score directly from MuseScore To save a score online: 1 . Make sure that the Concert Pitch button is off , and that the individual parts are correctly transposed. 2 . From the menu, select File → Save Online... . The "Log in to MuseScore" dialog will appear: 69

70 3 Enter your email address or MuseScore username, and password, then click OK . Note : If you don't have a . MuseScore account yet, create one first by clicking on the "Create an account" link. That will open your browser app and bring you to musescore.com/user/register . 4 . Upon successfully logging in, you'll be able to enter your score information. Title : The title of the score. Description : The descriptive text that will appear next to it. Make the score private : If ticked, the score can only be viewed via a private link. If unticked, the score is 70

71 visble to all. License Note : Creative Commons license , : Chose an appropriate copyright license from the drop-down list. allows people to use your scores under certain restrictions. Tags to help identify scores on MuseScore.com. Use commas to separate multiple tags. : You can add tags If the score already exists online, it will be updated automatically—you can add additional information in the . 5 changlog section of the dialog if required. This can retrieved on MuseScore.com under "Revision history" for that score. Uncheck Update the existing score to save online as a new score. If you are using a different 6 than the default one and if you are able to export MP3 files (may not be the . SoundFont Upload score audio will be visible: case on some Linux versions), a checkbox synthesizer settings and If the checkbox is checked, MuseScore will render the audio of the score using the current upload the audio to MuseScore.com. Upload a score on MuseScore.com You can also upload a score directly on MuseScore.com. 1 Click the Upload link on MuseScore.com. . 2 . You have the same options as with the Save Online menu. . You have also access to more information, such as 3 . Genre Note : Should you reach the five score upload limit , you can still upload scores directly from MuseScore , but only the last five are visible. If you wish more than this amount, upgrade to a Pro Account first. Edit a score on MuseScore.com If you want to make changes to one of your scores on MuseScore.com, edit the MuseScore file on your own computer, save it, and then do the following: directly from within MuseScore , simply go to → Save Online... again to update the If you originally shared the score File online score. uploaded the score via the Upload page on MuseScore.com, then you must follow these steps to If you originally update the online score: . 1 Go to the score page on MuseScore.com. . Click the three dots menu ⋮ 2 on the right and choose "Update this score". 3 . In the form, you can upload a replacement score file as well as change the accompanying information and privacy settings. Switch to the direct method of updating an online score It is much more convenient to update online scores from directly within MuseScore than by updating the score manually from the score page. Follow these steps if you originally uploaded the score via the and now want to Upload page switch to the direct method: 1 Go to the score page on MuseScore.com and copy the URL. . 2 . Open the score file on your computer with MuseScore. 3 . From the menu, select File → Score Properties... and paste the URL into the "Source" field. Now whenever you want to update the online score simply go to File → Save Online... . External links How to delete a score saved on MuseScore.com Notation 71

72 Notation In the previous " Basics " chapter you learned how to enter notes and interact with the palettes . The "Notation" chapter → describes the different types of notation in more detail, including more advanced music notation. See also " Advanced topics ". → Barlines Barlines palette: Barline symbols are available in the Change barline type To change an existing barline, use one of the following: Select a barline, or measure, then double click an icon in the Barlines palette. Drag an icon from the Barlines palette onto a barline, or a measure, in the score. Inspector . Select an existing barline, then adjust "Style" in the "Barline" section of the To change a non-single to a single barline : Select the barline and press Del . To hide a barline : Select the line and press V , or uncheck Visible in the Inspector. Insert barline To insert a new barline between existing ones, either: Drag an icon from the Barlines palette onto a note or rest. Select a note or rest, then double-click an icon in the Barlines palette. Custom barlines It is possible to create custom barlines by selecting one or more barlines, and adjusting the properties in the "Barlines" section of the Inspector : : Chose from a range of preset barlines. Style : joins the selected barline to the barline in the staff below. Span to next staff Span from : Sets the position of the top of the barline. "0" is the top staff line. Positive numbers start lower down the staff, negative numbers above. Span to : Sets the position of the bottom of the barline (see "Span from"). Span presets : Use the buttons to apply preset customised barlines. See also, Mensurstrich . Changes to color and horizontal/vertical offset can also be made in the Inspector. Connect barlines Barlines may extend over multiple staves, as in the grand staff of a piano, or in an orchestral score to join instruments in the same section. To join barlines: 1 . Double-click on a barline to enter Edit mode . 72

73 2 . Click on the lower blue handle and drag it down to the staff you wish to connect to. The handle snaps into position so there is no need to position it exactly. 3 Press Esc to exit edit mode . This will update all other relevant barlines as well. . See also Measure operations Add fermata to barline Clefs Commonly used Clefs (Treble, Bass, Alto, Tenor) can be found in the Clefs palette in the Basic workspace . For a more complete range, see the Clefs palette in the Advanced workspace (see image below). Add a clef Add clef to beginning of measure Method 1 : Add clef to beginning of a measure, whether or not it is the first measure in a system Select a measure and double-click a clef symbol in the palette, OR Drag a clef from the palette onto a measure. Method 2 : To change the clef at the start of a system Select the existing clef at the beginning of the system and double-click a new clef from the palette, OR Drag a new clef from the palette directly onto the existing clef. Add mid-measure clef Click on a note, then double-click a clef in the palette. Note : If the clef is not the first in the system, it will be drawn smaller. In this image, the top staff starts with a treble clef and switches immediately to bass clef, then after a note and a rest, changes back to treble clef. 73

74 Note : Changing a clef does not change the pitch of any note. Instead, the notes move to preserve pitch. If you want, you Transposition in conjunction with a clef change. can use Courtesy clefs courtesy clef will be generated at the end of the previous When a clef change occurs at the beginning of a system, a system. To show or hide all courtesy clefs: . From the menu, select Format → Style... → Page ; 1 . 2 Check/uncheck "Create courtesy clefs." It is also possible to show/hide courtesy clefs on a case-by-case basis: 1 "Create courtesy clefs" should already be ticked in the "General" menu (see above); . . Select a clef and tick/untick "Show courtesy" in the Inspector 2 . Remove a clef Select a clef and press Del . Hide clefs Display clef only in the first measure (for all staves) 1 . From the menu, select Format → Style... → Page ; 2 . Uncheck "Create clef for all systems." Display clef only in the first measure (for a particular staff) 1 Right click on the staff, select Staff properties... and uncheck "Show clef;" . . 2 master palette and select the "Symbols" section; Open the 3 . Drag and drop a clef from the master palette onto the first measure of the staff; OR select the first note and double- click a clef in the master palette. Note : This option may be useful to TAB users who do not want the clef to repeat on every subsequent line. Hide all clefs in a particular staff . Right click on the staff, and select Staff properties... ; 1 2 . Uncheck "Show clef." Key signatures Standard key signatures are available in the Key Signatures palette in the Basic or Advanced workspaces. It is also possible to create custom key signatures (below). 74

75 Add a new key signature Add new key signature to staves all Use any of the following methods: Drag a key signature from the palette onto an empty part of a measure. Select a measure and double-click a key signature in the palette. Select a note and double-click a key signature in a palette. Add new key signature to one staff only one staff line, leaving others unchanged: If you wish to change the key signature of only Press Ctrl ⌘ ) and hold while you drag a key signature from a palette onto a measure. (Mac: Replace an existing key signature all staves Replace key signature for Use any of the following methods: Drag a key signature from the palette onto the key signature to be replaced (or onto the measure containing the key signature). Select the key signature to be replaced, and double-click a new key signature in a palette. Replace key signature for staff only one If you wish to replace the key signature of only one staff, leaving others unchanged: Press Ctrl ⌘ ) and hold while you drag a key signature from a palette onto the key signature to be replaced (or (Mac: onto the measure containing the key signature). Remove a key signature Use any of the following methods: Click on an existing key signature and press . Del Drag the empty key signature from the palette (in the advanced workspace) onto the measure. Naturals on key signature changes By default, MuseScore only shows cancelling naturals when the key signature changes to that of C Major/A minor (no sharps or flats). In all other cases, it simply shows the new key signature without cancellations: However, you can opt to display cancelling naturals for all key signature changes: 75

76 1 . Format → Style... → Accidentals . You'll see the options: From the menu, select . 2 Select one of the three options. . If you are in a part and want the new option to apply to all parts, click on Apply to all parts . 3 . 4 OK to exit. Click For example, selecting the option " ♯ or ♭ " gives: Before key signature if changing to fewer And the option " After key signature if changing to fewer ♯ or ♭ . Before if changing between ♯ and ♭ " gives: Key signature changes and multi-measure rests Multi-measure rests are interrupted if there is change of key signature: Courtesy key signatures To turn off the display of a particular courtesy key signature: Inspector . Select the relevant key signature and untick "Show courtesy" in the "Key Signature" section of the To turn off the display of all courtesy key signatures: From the menu, select Format → Style... → Page , and untick "Create courtesy key signatures." Note section breaks . : Courtesy key signatures are not displayed at Custom key signatures To create a custom key signature: 1 . Press Shift + K to display the Key signatures section of the Master palette . 76

77 2 . Create Key signature panel, drag accidentals from the palette onto the "staff" above to create the desired key In the Clear signature. Use the button, if required, to remove all accidentals from the "staff." 3 . Press Add to move the new key signature into the library (center panel). Playback of custom key signatures is not currently supported. Note: To move a key signature from the Master palette to a : custom palette Drag and drop the key signature onto a palette. To apply a key signatures to the score directly from the Master palette , use one of the following methods: Select a measure and double-click a key signature in the Master palette. Drag a key signature from the Master palette onto a measure. Time signatures Time signatures can be found in a Palette of the same name in both the Basic and Advanced workspaces . Add or replace a time signature Use any of the following methods: Select a time signature, measure, note or rest, and double-click a time signature in a palette. Drag and drop a time signature from a palette onto a space in a measure, or onto an existing time signature. Delete a time signature To delete a time signature in the score, select it and press Del . Create a time signature If the time signature you require is not available in any of the existing palettes , it can be created as follows: 1 . Press Shift + T to display the Time signatures section of the Master Palette . 2 . Select a time signature to edit in the center panel. 77

78 3 . Create Time Signature panel, edit the various parameters (numerator, denominator, text, beaming) to get the In the Reset . time signature and properties you want. To restore the default beaming pattern, press Press to add the newly-created time signature to the center panel. To delete a time signature from the center 4 Add . panel, right-click on it and select Clear . . Drag and drop the time signature from the Master Palette to the desired score location. 5 custom palette This can be saved to a for future use, if desired. Time signature properties Time Signature Properties To display the dialog: Right-click on a time signature and select Time Signature Properties... . Global value add a time signature to the score . : Shows the global time signature and is set automatically when you It is the reference for beats (as shown in the status bar ) and tempo markings. Actual value : Shows the time signature associated with a particular staff. This is normally the same as the global time signature, but can be set independently if required. See Local time signatures . : Allows you to edit the displayed text without affecting the underlying time signature. For an example, Appearance Additive meters . see ; Allows you to change the default beaming of notes associated with a time signature. See Note Groups Change default beaming . Change default beaming To adjust note-beaming for a particular time signature: 1 . Right-click on the time signature and select, Time Signature Properties... ; 2 To break a note beam in the Note Groups panel, click on the note following it. To reset the beam, click in the same . place. Alternatively, you can change beaming by dragging a beam icon onto a note, as follows: Start beam at this note. Do not end beam at this note. 1/8th note beam to left of this note. 1/16 note beam to left of this note. Checking the box for "Also change shorter notes," means that any beam changes at one level are applied automatically to shorter durations as well. The Reset button cancels any changes made in that session. 78

79 Additive (composite) meters Additive (or composite) time signatures are sometimes used to clarify the division of beats within a measure. To create an additive time signature: 1 Time Signature properties... ; . Right-click on a time signature in the score and select In the Appearance section, adjust the "Text" property as required; 2 . . Adjust note beaming in the Note Groups section if required. 3 : The Note section of the Master palette also allows you to create additive time signatures (see above). Time Signatures Local time signatures In certain cases a score may show staves with different time signatures running at the same time. For example, in Bach's 26. Goldberg Variation: In the above example, the is 3/4, but the time signature of the upper staff has been set global time signature independently to 18/16. To set a local time signature for just one staff: Hold down Ctrl (Mac: Cmd ) and drag and drop a time signature from a palette onto an empty measure. Resize time signature Select one or more time signatures and, in the "Time Signature" section of the , adjust the "Scale X" (width) Inspector and "Scale Y" (height) values. Pickup measures and cadenzas Occasionally you will need to decrease or increase the duration of a measure without changing the time signature—for Measure operations: Measure duration . example, in a pickup measure (anacrusis) or in a cadenza etc. See Time signature changes and breaks Multi-measure rests are interrupted when a time signature change occurs. Also, a section break will prevent a courtesy time signature being shown at the end of the previous measure. See also Key signature External links How To Using Polyrhythm, mixed meters and local time signatures in MuseScore Additive meters at Wikipedia. Accidentals The most common types of accidentals are provided in the Accidentals toolbar above the score and in the Accidentals palette in the basic workspace 79

80 A more comprehensive range can be found in the Accidentals palette in the advanced workspace. Add accidental are automatically added to a note, as appropriate, when you increase or decrease its pitch: Accidentals ↑ : Increase the pitch of a note by one semitone (favors sharps). : Decrease the pitch of a note by one semitone (favors flats). ↓ To add either (i) a double flat or double sharp, (ii) a courtesy (also known as or reminder ) accidental, or (iii) a cautionary non-standard accidental, use one of the following options: Select a note and click on an accidental in the toolbar above the score. Select a note and double-click an accidental in the Accidentals palette (basic or advanced workspace). Drag an accidental from the Accidentals palette on to a note. If you wish to add brackets to a cautionary accidental , use one of the following: Select the accidental in the score and double-click the parentheses symbol in the Accidentals palette. Drag the parentheses symbol from the palette onto the accidental. Select the accidental and chose from the dropdown in the Inspector . Bracket type If required, accidentals can be deleted by clicking on them and pressing . Del Change enharmonic spelling To change the enharmonic spelling of a note, or notes, in both written concert pitch views: and . Select a note, or group of notes; 1 . Press J ; 2 3 . Continue pressing J to cycle through the enharmonic equivalents. To change the enharmonic spelling in the written pitch view, without affecting the concert pitch view, or vice versa: 1 Select a note, or group of notes; . J . Ctrl + J (Mac: 2 + Press ); Cmd 3 . Continue pressing the same combination of keys to cycle through the enharmonic equivalents. Note : If the pitches of selected notes are not all the same, the effect may be unpredictable. Respell pitches From the menu, select Tools → Respell Pitches . See also Key signature: Change External links Accidental at Wikipedia Enharmonic at Wikipedia Arpeggios and glissandi Arpeggio and Glissando symbols can be found in the "Arpeggios & Glissandi" palette in the advanced workspace . This palette also includes strum arrows, an arpeggio bracket, wind instrument articulations, and slide in/slide out symbols. 80

81 To add a symbol to the score, use one of the following methods: Select one or more notes, then double-click a symbol in the "Arpeggios & Glissandi" palette. Drag a symbol from the "Arpeggios & Glissandi" palette onto a note. Any symbol can be customized by adjusting its properties in the Inspector . Edit handles are also provided in most cases to . If needed for future use, you can save the result in a custom palette Edit mode allow adjustment of length/curvature in . Arpeggios When an arpeggio or strum arrow is added to the score, it initially spans only one voice . However, you can easily adjust its height by double-clicking the symbol and dragging the handles up or down (for finer adjustment use the keyboard arrows). of the symbol can be turned on or off in the Playback . Inspector Glissandi (slides) A Glissando slide , spans two consecutive notes, normally in the same voice. or, more informally, a Chord glissandi are also possible. Adjust start and end points 1 . Double-click the symbol to enter edit mode; 2 Click on the start or end handle: . Use Shift + ↑ ↓ to move the handle up or down, from note to note. Use Shift + ← → moves the handle horizontally, from note to note. This method also allows you to move handles between notes in different voices or even from one staff to another—for Ctrl + arrow to make final adjustments cross-staff glissandi, for example. You can also use the keyboard arrow buttons or to the positions of the handles. Custom glissandi To customize the glissando to your requirements, select it and adjust the Inspector properties as follows : Type : Choose between a straight or wavy line; 81

82 Show text : Edit, or delete the wording, font-face, font-size and font-style. : If there isn't enough room between Note notes, the text is not displayed; Play style : Chose how the glissando plays back. There are four options: Chromatic, White keys, Black keys, Diatonic; Play : Check/uncheck the box to turn playback on or off. Wind instrument articulations , Doit , Plop and Scoop Fall edit symbols are provided. To change the length and curvature, select the symbol, enter mode and adjust the handles as described in . Edit mode: Lines Slide in/out Slide in Slide out lines can also be found in the "Arpeggios & Glissandi" palette. To edit the length and angle of a and line, double-click on it and drag the handle (or use keyboard arrows for finer adjustment). External links Arpeggio at Wikipedia Glissando at Wikipedia Articulations and ornaments A comprehensive set of symbols can be found in the palette in the Advanced workspace: Articulations and the palette (Advanced workspace): Ornaments There is also an abbreviated version of Articulations in the Basic workspace. Articulations Articulations are the symbols added to the score to show how a note or chord is to be played. The principal symbols in this group are: Fermatas Staccato Mezzo-staccato / Portato Staccatissimo Tenuto Sforzato Marcato Specialist articulations are also included for bowed and plucked strings, wind instruments etc. Ornaments Ornaments include: 82

83 Mordents, Inverted Mordents, Pralltrillers Trills Turns Bends and acciaccaturas can be found in the Grace Notes palette. Note: Appoggiaturas Add articulation/ornament Use either of the following methods: Select range of notes, then double-click a symbol in a palette. a note or a Drag a symbol from a palette onto a notehead. Add accidental to an ornament To apply an accidental to an existing ornament, such as a trill: . Select the note to which the ornament is attached; 1 Open the . of the Master palette ; 2 Symbols section . Search for and apply the desired accidental to the score (small accidentals can be found using the search term 3 "figured bass"); 4 Drag the accidental into position (or reposition using keyboard shortcuts or the Inspector ). . Add fermata to a barline A fermata can be applied directly to a by selecting the barline and double-clicking the fermata from a palette. This barline does not affect playback though. Keyboard shortcuts Shift + S Toggle Staccato: Toggle Tenuto: Shift N + Shift + Toggle Sforzato (accent): V Toggle Marcato: Shift + O Add Acciaccatura (grace note) : / Keyboard shortcuts can be customized in MuseScore's Preferences . Adjust position Immediately after adding an articulation or ornament from a palette, the symbol is automatically selected: It can then be up or down from the keyboard as follows: moved Press up/down arrow keys for fine positioning (0.1 sp at a time); Ctrl + ↑ or Ctrl + ↓ (Mac: Press + ↑ or Cmd + ↓ ) for larger vertical adjustments (1 sp at a time). Cmd To flip a symbol to the other side of the note (where applicable), select it and press X . To enable adjustments in all directions from the keyboard: 1 . Double click on the symbol to enter Edit mode , or click on it and press Ctrl + E (Mac: Cmd + E ) , or right-click on the symbol and select "Edit element"; 2 Press arrow keys for fine positioning (0.1 sp at a time); or press Ctrl + Arrow . Cmd + Arrow ) for larger adjustments (1 (Mac: sp at a time). You can also change the horizontal and vertical offset values in the . To position more than one symbol at a Inspector time, select the desired symbols and adjust the offset values in the Inspector. Note: The symbol can also be repositioned by clicking and dragging, but for more precise control, use the methods above. Articulation and ornament properties These can be edited from the Articulation section of the Inspector and may include: 83

84 Placement : Above or below the staff. : Auto / Up / Down. Direction Anchor : Adjust the vertical placement of the symbol. : For fermatas, adjust the pause length. Time stretch Ornament style : Default or Baroque. Play : Turn playback on or off. properties, see Bends . For Bend Format... → Global settings for articulations and ornaments can be found in Style... → Layout and formatting . See also Grace notes External links Ornaments at Wikipedia Bends Bend Tool , located in the Articulations A variety of simple and complex (multi-stage) bends can be created with the palette of the Advanced workspace. Apply a bend To apply one or more bends to the score, use one of the following options: Select one or more notes and double-click a bend symbol in the palette. Drag a bend symbol from the palette on to a note. Edit text and line properties Various font properties, and line thickness, can be edited in the Bend section of the Inspector. Text and line Properties Format → Style... applying to all bends in the score can be edited in Bend → Edit bend properties Select a bend symbol in the score and press "Properties" in the Bend section of the Inspector . Preset options are available, if needed, on the left hand side of the Bend properties window. The current bend is represented by a graph consisting of gray lines connected by square, blue (see image above). The slope of the nodes line indicates the type of bend: Up-slope = Up-bend Down-slope = Down-bend Horizontal line = Hold The vertical axis of the graph represents the amount by which the pitch is bent up or down: one unit equals a quarter- tone: 2 units a semitone, 4 units a whole-tone, and so on. The horizontal axis of the graph indicates the length of the bend: each gray line segment extends for 1 space (sp) in the score. 84

85 A bend is modified by adding or deleting nodes in the graph: To a node, click on an empty intersection. add delete a node, click on it. To the bend by 1 sp; deleting a node the bend by 1 sp. The Start and End points of the Adding a node lengthens shortens bend can be moved up and down only. Adjust height The height of the bend symbol is automatically adjusted so that it appears just above the staff. This height can be reduced, if necessary, with a workaround: 1 . Create another note on the top line (or space) of the staff, vertically above the note at which you want the bend to start. 2 . Apply the bend to the higher note first: this will give you a bend symbol with the lowest height. . 3 To increase the height of the bend move this note downward. 4 Drag the bend symbol downwards to the correct position. . . Inspector ). 5 Mark the top note invisible and silent (using the Adjust position To adjust position use one of the following: Drag the bend symbol with a mouse. Inspector . Click on the symbol and adjust the horizontal and vertical offsets in the Ctrl + E (Mac: Cmd + E ); or right-click on the symbol and select "Edit Double click on the symbol; or click on it and press element." Then use the arrow keys for fine positioning (0.1 sp at a time); or Ctrl + Arrow (Mac: Cmd + Arrow ) for larger adjustments (1 sp at a time). Custom bends After a bend has been created in the score it can be saved for future use by dragging and dropping the symbol to a palette Custom Workspace + Shift (Mac: Cmd + Shift while holding down Ctrl ). See Beams Note beaming is set automatically, based on the time signature. To adjust default beaming : right-click on a time signature and select "Time Signature Properties." See Change default beaming for details. However, if you want to adjust the note beaming of individual notes, use the beam symbols found in the Beam Properties workspaces instead: palette in the "Basic" or "Advanced" Beam symbols The following is a list of beam symbols and their effects: Icon Name Description Start a beam at this note (or rest); the note is willing to attach itself only to the next note. It will Beam start not connect to the note before it. The note is willing to attach itself to either the note before or after. This applies to Beam 16th Beam middle sub and Beam 32 sub as well. No beam The note will not connect to any other note. Beam 16th sub Start a second level beam at this note. 85

86 Description Name Icon Beam 32nd sub Start a third level beam at this note. Automatic Beam Apply default beaming as determined by the current . time signature Feathered beam, Start feathered beam to indicate gradually slower tempo. slower Feathered beam, Start feathered beam to indicate gradually faster tempo. faster Be aware that the beam between two notes/rests is determined by both of the note/rests. For example: Two consecutive notes with a status of start beam here will not have a beam between them. If the two consecutive notes are willing to connect to each other they will beam, if one of them is not willing, the two notes will not beam. Change note beaming (except feathered beams, below), use either of the following methods: To change one or more note beams onto a note in the score. workspace Drag and drop a beam symbol from a Select one or more notes in the score and double click the desired workspace beam symbol. feathered note beams , use either of the following methods: To apply Drag and drop a feathered-beam symbol from a workspace onto a note beam in the score. Select one or more note beams in the score, then double click on a feathered-beam symbol in the workspace. : (1) Feathered beams may use 2 or 3 lines depending on the tempo and the desired rate of the change; (2) To Notes run of beamed sixteenth notes; (3) To create a 3-line create a 2-line feathered beam, you need to start with a continuous continuous feathered beam, you need to start with run of beamed thirty-second notes; (4) Playback of feathered beams is not supported. Adjust beam angle To adjust with the keyboard or mouse: . 1 edit mode on the note beam—the right adjustment handle is automatically selected. Enter 2 . Use the up/down arrows or drag the right end handle to change the angle of the beam; 3 . Press Esc to exit edit mode. To adjust with the Inspector : 1 . Click on a note beam. . Inspector ; 2 Tick the "User position" box in the "Beam" section of the 3 . Set the "Position" values to get the desired beam angle. Adjust beam height To adjust with the keyboard or mouse: . 1 edit mode on the note beam—the right adjustment handle is automatically selected. Enter 2 . Press Shift + Tab or click the left handle to select it; 3 . Use the up/down arrows or drag the left end handle to change the height of the beam; 4 . Esc to exit edit mode. Press To adjust with the : Inspector 1 . Click on a note beam. 2 . Tick the "User position" box in the "Beam" section of the Inspector ; 3 Set the "Position" values as desired. . Make beam horizontal 1 . Select a note beam 2 . Tick the "Force Horizontal" box in the "Beam" section of the Inspector; 86

87 3 . adjust the beam height with the keyboard/mouse: If desired, Format → → Beams . If you want all note beams in the score to be horizontal there is a "Flatten all beams" option in Style... Adjust feathered beams To adjust feathered beams: 1 . Select a note beam. . Adjust the values in the "Grow left" and "Grow right" boxes in the "Beam" section of the Inspector 2 . Local relayout MuseScore spaces notes according to their time values, allowing for accidentals, lyrics etc. In systems where there is more than one staff, this may result in irregular note spacing, as in the following example: is a tickbox option in the Inspector allowing you to specify those passages in the score where you want Local relayout the note spacing to be independent of other staves in the system. Applying "Local relayout" to the note beams in the top staff of the previous example results in a more even distribution of notes: To do a local relayout: 1 . Select one or more note beams. 2 . Tick the option Local relayout in the "Beam" section of the Inspector . Flip note beam To flip a beam from above to below the notes, or vice-versa: . 1 Select one or more note beams. 2 . Use any of the following options: X Press the key; Press the "Flip direction" icon, , in the toolbar. Select a "Direction" option (Auto, Up or Down) in the "Beam" section of the Inspector . Reset Beam Mode To restore beams to the mode defined in the local time signatures: 1 Select the section of the score you want to reset. If nothing is selected, the operation will apply to the whole score; . 2 . Select Format → Reset Beams . See also Cross-staff notation Edit mode Note input 87

88 How beams work External links How to add a beam over a rest How to place a beam between notes Brackets workspace and a curly in the Brackets MuseScore provides (Advanced brace ). brackets palette Add To add a bracket or brace to systems, use one of two methods: Drag a bracket/brace icon from a palette on to the staff where you want the bracket/brace to start. Select a measure on the staff where you want the bracket/brace to start, and double-click the desired icon in a palette. Delete Del Select the bracket and press . Change Drag the desired icon from a palette onto an existing bracket/brace in the score. Edit When you first apply a bracket it only spans one staff. To extend to other staves: 1 Enter Edit mode . . 2 . Drag the handle downwards to span the required staves. The handle snaps into position, so exact placement is not required. Style Format → Style... → The default thickness and distance from the system of brackets and braces can be adjusted in System . Breaths and pauses Breath and pause markings are available in the Breaths & Pauses palette (Advanced workspace . Add symbol caesura / "tram lines" / "railroad tracks") to the score, use one of the following options: To add a breath, or pause (aka Select a note or rest and double-click a breath or pause symbol in a palette Drag a breath or pause symbol from a palette onto a note or rest in the score. The symbol is placed after the note. Its position can be adjusted by editing the X and Y offsets in the Inspector , or, in edit mode , using the arrow keys . 88

89 Adjust pause length You can adjust the pause length (in seconds) of the added symbol in the . Inspector Grace notes A Short grace note , or grace note is a type of musical ornament, usually printed smaller than regular notes. The Long grace note , has no Appoggiatura , appears as a small note with a stroke through the stem. The Acciaccatura , or stroke. Create grace notes palette in the Basic or Advanced workspace. Grace notes can be found in the "Grace notes" Add a grace note Use one of the following methods: palette ; Select a regular note and double click a grace note in a Drag a grace note symbol from a palette onto a regular note; Select a note and press to create an acciaccatura only. / sequence This will add a grace note of the same pitch as the regular note. To add a of grace notes to a regular note, simply repeat the above actions as many times as required. See also, Change pitch (below). : When a grace note is added to the score, a slur is not automatically created with it, so the latter needs to be added Note Slurs . separately. See Add a chord of grace notes Grace note chords are built up just like regular chords: 1 . Enter the first note of the chord as shown above 2 . Select this first grace note and enter subsequent notes as you would for any other regular chord (i.e. Shift + A ... G ). You can also create a grace note chord by using the add interval Alt + 1 ... 9 for intervals from a unison to shortcut in step 2: a ninth above. Change pitch The pitch of a grace note can be adjusted just like a regular one: . Select one or more grace notes 1 2 Adjust pitch using the keyboard arrow commands, namely: . ↑ or ↓ to increase or decrease the pitch by a semitone; Alt + Shift + ↑ or Alt + Shift + ↓ to increase or decrease the pitch one step at a time, according to the key signature. Change duration If you want to change the duration of a previously created grace note, select it and choose a duration from the toolbar or enter with one of the keys 1 ... 9 (see Note input ). Manual adjustment The position of a grace note after a note (such as a trill termination) may have to be adjusted by selecting the note, going into edit mode and using the left/right keyboard arrows; or change the chord offset values in the Inspector. External links Grace note at Wikipedia 89

90 Appoggiatura at Wikipedia at Wikipedia Acciaccatura Hairpins Add a hairpin are symbols used to indicate gradual changes in volume in the score. There are two kinds: (getting Hairpins crescendo louder) and decrescendo (getting quieter). To create a hairpin: Select a range of notes or measures; 1 . 2 . Use one of the following shortcuts: : to create a crescendo hairpin. < : to create a diminuendo hairpin (decrescendo). > Alternatively, use one of the following options: Select a range of notes or measures, and double-click a hairpin in a palette. Drag and drop a hairpin from a palette onto a staff line. Adjust length and height hairpins is a type of Line with playback properties A length is adjusted similarly: , and its 1 . Double-click on the hairpin to enter edit mode . Then click on the end handle that you want to move: 2 . Use one of the following shortcuts: Shift + to move the end handle, and its anchor , right by one note or rest. → + to move the end handle, and its anchor, left by one note or rest; Shift ← playback integrity and allows it to cross line breaks: This method of extending or shortening the hairpin maintains 3 To fine-tune the horizontal position of an end-handle (without changing playback), use the following shortcuts: . → to move the handle right by 0.1 sp . ← to move the handle left 0.1 sp. Ctrl → (Mac: Cmd + → ) to move the handle right one sp. + Ctrl + ← (Mac: Cmd + → ) to move the handle left one sp. To change the height of a hairpin : Adjust the lower handle at the mouth of the hairpin (e.g. the blue square below): Cresc. and dim. lines 90

91 In addition to hairpins, there are cresc. _ _ _ dim. _ _ _ lines with the same function in the Lines palette. and Text Line Core section of the Inspector. You can adjust the text, if desired, in the To turn a hairpin into its equivalent text line : Select the hairpin and, in the Inspector , select the appropriate line from "Type." Hairpin section of the Edit hairpin properties Properties of the hairpin can be edited in the Inspector, as follows: Element : Edit the Y offset to change the height of the hairpin above or below the staff. : Edit line properties such as color, line style and thickness. Line : Add text and set text properties. Text line core : Hairpin : Change the type of hairpin: crescendo, decrescendo or text. Type : Set hairpin above or below the staff. Placement Dynamic range : i.e. which staves will be affected by hairpin playback. : ... across the span of the hairpin; Velocity change : The width at the mouth of the hairpin. Height Continue height : The width of the hairpin at the end of a system, before it continues to the next system. Hairpin playback Crescendo and diminuendo lines only affect playback from one note to the next: they have no affect (currently) on the playback of a single note or a series of tied notes. By default, hairpins will affect playback only if dynamics are used before and after the hairpin. For example, a p f dynamics will cause a dynamic change on playback. However, between any crescendo spanning notes between and a diminuendo between p two successive dynamics only the first appropriate hairpin will have effect: f will be ignored; and of two or more crescendos between p and f , all but the first will be ignored. A hairpin may be used without dynamic marks, by adjusting "Velocity change" in the Inspector (values in the range 0 to 127). Lines The Lines palette of the Advanced workspace contains the following lines: As you can see, the palette includes: Slurs , Hairpins , Volta brackets , Octave lines , and many others. 91

92 Applying lines to the score Most lines (except , Volta brackets and the Ambitus ) can be applied from a palette in the following ways: Slurs just one note To apply a line to Click on a note, then + Click on the next note; 1 . Ctrl 2 . Double-click a line. To apply a line across a range of notes Select a range of notes; 1 . 2 . Double-click a line. To apply a line from a note to the end of that measure Use any of the following methods: Click on a note, then double click a line. Drag and drop a line onto the score. To apply a line across a range of measures . Select one or more measures; 1 . 2 Double click a line in a palette. Lines and playback properties Hairpins , Voltas , Ottavas etc., have a playback effect as well as being indicative. Each end handle Some lines, such as is connected by a dotted line to an anchor on the staff (visible in Edit mode ). These anchors indicate the extent of the playback effect. Adjust vertical position In Normal mode , apply one of the following methods: Click on one or more lines and change the vertical offset in the Inspector ; Shift and drag it up/down with a mouse. Click on a line, press and hold Edit mode. Note : You can also adjust the vertical position in Change length . Enter Edit mode and click on an end handle; 1 . 2 Apply one of the following shortcuts: Shift → to move the end handle, and its anchor, right by one note (or, in the case of Voltas , one measure) + Shift ← to move the end handle, and its anchor, left by one note (or, in the case of Voltas, one measure); + Note : This method allows the line to span systems when required, and ensures that playback coincides with the line's visual extent. 3 . if you wish to change the position of an end handle without changing the position of its anchor, apply one of the following: to move the handle right by 0.1 sp (1 sp = one staff space = the distance between two staff lines). → ← to move the handle left 0.1 sp. Ctrl + → (Mac: Cmd + → ) to move the handle right one sp. → Ctrl ← (Mac: Cmd + + ) to move the handle left one sp. Note : You can also drag the endpoint handles with a mouse. Text lines 92

93 A text line text embedded within it—such as a volta , ottava , guitar barre line etc. is a line that has line properties alway remain unchanged, but the properties When you apply a text line to the score from a palette, the text for text lines. For details, see style may, under certain circumstances, assume those of the current Behavior of applied text and lines . Custom lines Any line in the score can be customised by adjusting its properties in the Inspector , as follows: Select the line; 1 . and . are needed, make a selection from Begin hook , End hook line hooks Height (in the Text LIne Core section); 2 If . To add text , tick Begin Text , Continue Text 3 End Text , then type in the "Text" box: or Begin : Text added here appears at the beginning of the line; : Text added here appears at the beginning of a continuation line; Continue End : Text added here appears at the end of the line; Edit . and alignment as required; 4 text properties . Edit Placement : "Above" or "Below" sets the text so that it is on the line. "Left" places the text to the left of the line; 5 6 . Line section. The Diagonal option Make adjustments to the line color, thickness and style (solid, dashed etc.) in the end handles allows you to create a diagonal line by dragging the ; 7 . To save the result for future use, see Custom palettes . Copying lines Once applied to the score, lines cannot be copied using the usual copy and paste procedures. However, you can duplicate lines within a score: press and hold + Shift (Mac: Cmd + Shift ), click on the line and drag it to the desired location. Ctrl Extended ornament lines To add an accidental to an extended ornament, such as a trill line, select the line and double-click a symbol from the Accidentals palette. External links Piano pedal marks at Wikipedia Guitar Barre at Wikipedia Measure rests Full measure rest whole rest , centred within a measure (shown below), is used to indicate that an entire measure (or a voice within a A measure) is silent, regardless of time signature. To create one or more full measure rests custom durations : Use the following method if all selected measures are "standard"—i.e. with no Select of measures. range 1 a measure, or 2. Press . Del If one or more of the measures contains a custom duration , use the following method instead: 1 . Select a measure, or range of measures. + 2 Ctrl + Shift + Del (Mac: Cmd Press Shift + Del ). . To create a full measure rest in a particular voice 1 . In the appropriate voice, enter a rest that extends for the full measure. (Mac: 2 Make sure the rest is selected, then press Ctrl + Shift + Del . Cmd + Shift + Del ). 93

94 Multimeasure rest A indicates a period of silence for an instrument: the number of measures is shown by the number Multimeasure rest above the staff. Multimeasure rests are automatically interrupted at important points, such as double barlines, rehearsal marks , key- or etc. section breaks time signature changes, To display multimeasure rests To turn multimeasure rests on or off: Press M on your keyboard. Alternatively: . From the menu, choose Format → Style... . 1 . 2 Click on the "Score" tab, if it is not already selected; . 3 Tick/untick "Create multi-measure rests." Note : It is recommended that you enter all notes in the score first before enabling multi-measure rests. Break multimeasure rest You may want to have a multi-measure rest divided into two multi-measure rests: . Ensure that the option to display multimeasure rests in the score is off (see above ). 1 2 . Right-click on the measure where you want the second multi-measure rest to start; 3 . Measure Properties and tick "Break multi-measure rest." From the menu, chose Measure operations: Break multimeasure rest See also: . Octave lines are used to indicate that a section of music is to be played one or more octaves above or below Octave (Ottava) lines written pitch: The line may be dotted or solid. Ottavas are available in the palette of the Basic and Advanced Lines workspaces . 8 ─────┐ or 8va ─────┐ : Play one octave above written pitch 8 or 8va ─────┘ : Play one octave below written pitch ─────┘ 8va alta/bassa lines are particularly common in piano scores, though they are sometimes used in other instrumental 1 15ma alta (2 octaves above) and 15ma bassa (2 octaves below) are also occasionally used. music. Musescore automatically adjusts playback of the score under the ottava to the correct pitch. Apply an octave line See Applying lines to the score . And to adjust the vertical position, see Lines: Adjust vertical position . 94

95 Change length See . Lines: Change length Custom lines Ottavas can be customized just like any other line. See Custom lines and line properties . External links at Wikipedia Octave Gerou/Lusk. Essential Dictionary of Music Notation ( 1 ). ↩ . Internet Archive Slurs A slur legato —smoothly and without is a curved line between two or more notes indicating that they are to be played Ties separation. Not to be confused with , which join two notes of the same pitch. There are a number of ways to add a slur to a score, and all may be useful depending on the context (adding a slur from lines palette is also possible but not recommended). the Add slur in note-input mode 1 . While in Note input mode , type in the first note in the slurred section; 2 . Press S to begin the slurred section; 3 . Type in the remaining notes in the slurred section; . S again to end the slurred section. 4 Press Add slur in Normal mode Method 1 1 Make sure you are in Normal mode ; . 2 . Select the note where you want the slur to start: 3 . Press S to add a slur extending to the next note: 4 (Optional) Hold Shift and press → (right arrow key) to extend the slur to the next note. Repeat as required: . 5 . (Optional) Press X to flip the slur direction: 6 . Press Esc to exit edit mode : 95

96 Method 2 1 Make sure you are in Normal mode ; . . Select the note where you want the slur to start; 2 Chose one of the following options: . 3 Ctrl ( only on a Mac) and select the last note that you want the slur to : Hold down To add a slur to one voice ⌘ cover. voices: Hold down To add slurs to ( ⌘ on a Mac) and select the last note that you want the slurs to all Shift cover. 4 . Press S . Adjust slur position of a slur: If you only want to adjust the . Select the slur; 1 Use any of the following methods: 2 . Drag the slur. Adjust the horizontal and vertical offset values in the . Inspector To adjust all the properties of a slur (length, shape and position): . 1 not in note input mode ; Make sure you are 2 . Double-click the slur to enter edit mode (or select it and press Ctrl + E ; or right-click it and select "Edit Element"); 3 . Click on a handle to select it, or use Tab to cycle through the handles; 4 . left and right handles from note to note, use the following shortcuts: To move the + : Move to next note. Shift → Shift + ← : Move to previous note. + ↑ : Move to lower voice (voice 2 to voice 1 etc.). Shift + ↓ : Move to higher voice (voice 1 to voice 2 etc.). Shift 5 . To adjust the position of any handle, use any of the following methods: Drag the handle. Use the arrow keys for fine adjustment (0.1 sp. at a time). For larger adjustments (1 sp. at a time) use Ctrl + Arrow . 6 . Esc to exit edit mode . Press Note : The two outer handles adjust the start and end of the slur, whilst the three handles on the curve adjust the contour. The middle handle on the straight line is used to move the whole slur up/down/left/right. Extended slurs A slur can span several systems and pages. The start and end of a slur is anchored to a note/chord or rest. If the notes are repositioned due to changes in the layout, stretch or style, the slur also moves and adjusts in size. This example shows a slur spanning from the bass to the treble clef. Using the mouse, select the first note of the slur, hold to add the slur. down (Mac: ⌘ ) and select the last note for the slur, and press S Ctrl X flips the direction of a selected slur. Dotted slurs Dotted slurs are sometimes used in songs where the presence of a slur varies between stanzas. Dotted slurs are also used to indicate an editor's suggestion (as opposed to the composer's original markings). To change an existing slur into 96

97 a dotted or dashed slur, select it and then in Inspector ( F8 Line type from Continuous to Dotted or Dashed . ) change See also Tie Edit mode Note input Ties A is a curved line between two notes of the same pitch, indicating that they are to be played as one combined note tie below). Ties are normally created between adjacent notes in the same voice (see external links , but MuseScore also voices . supports ties between non-adjacent notes and between notes in different In note-input mode , if you specify a tie immediately after entering a note or chord, the program automatically generates the correct destination notes to go with the ties. Or, you can simply create ties "after the fact," between existing notes. : pitch, should not be confused with same Note slurs , which join notes of different pitches and Ties, which join notes of the legato indicate articulation. Add ties to single notes Normal mode : In . (Mac: Ctrl 1 Cmd ) + click to select more than one note: Click on a note, or use . Press + or the toolbar tie button, : 2 . Ties will be created between the selected note(s) and the following note(s) of the same pitch. In : Note input mode . 1 Select a single note (one that is not part of a chord). 2 . Select a new note duration for the following note, if required (but see "Note" below). . Press + or the tie button, 3 . Note : This shortcut works, as described above, only if there is no chord following the selected note. If there is, then the duration is ignored and the tied note is added instead to the following chord. Add ties to chords In : Normal mode 1 . Use one of the following selection options: Hold down Shift and click on any note in the chord; Click on the stem of the chord; 2 Press + , or click on the toolbar tie button . . Ties will be created between all the notes in the selected chord and the following notes of the same pitches. In Note input mode : 1 . Make sure one note is selected in a chord . 2 Select a new note duration for the following chord, if required (but see "Note" below). . 3 . Press + or the tie button, . 97

98 Note : This shortcut works, as described above, only if there is no chord following the selected note. If there is, then the duration is ignored and the tied notes are added instead to the following chord. Flip a tie X flips the direction of a selected tie, from above the note to below the note, or vice-versa. See also Slur External links How to create ties leading into a 2nd ending Ties (music) at Wikipedia Tremolo Tremolo Tremelo symbols can be found in the palette in the advanced workspace : both one note and two note tremolos are possible. Tremolo is the rapid repetition of one note, or a rapid alternation between two notes or chords. A one-note or one-chord tremolo is indicated by strokes through the stem of the note or chord. If the tremolo is between two notes, the bars are drawn between the notes. Tremolo symbols are also used to notate drum rolls. Add a Tremelo Single note tremolo : Select the note and double-click the desired symbol in the Tremolo palette. Two note tremolo : Select the first note of the pair, and double-click the desired symbol in the Tremelo palette. Note : In a two note tremolo, every note has the value of the whole tremolo duration. To enter a tremolo with the duration of a half note (minim), enter two normal quarter notes (crotchets), and after applying a tremolo symbol to the first note, the note values automatically double to half notes. External links Tremolo (Wikipedia) Tuplets Tuplets are used to write rhythms beyond the beat divisions usually permitted by the time signature. For example, a triplet consists of three notes in the time of two: duplet consists of two notes in the time of three: And a Create a tuplet The exact method of tuplet entry depends on whether you are starting off in Note input mode or Normal mode . We'll start off with a simple example: the creation of an eighth note triplet. 98

99 Create a triplet in normal mode 1 Select a note or rest that specifies the full duration of the desired triplet group. In the case of an eighth note triplet, . you will need to select a quarter note or rest—as in the example below: ); alternatively use the menu, Ctrl + 3 (Mac: ⌘ + 3 Press the keyboard shortcut for a triplet, Add → Tuplets → Triplet . This will 2 . give the following result: 3 . The program automatically changes to note-input mode and selects the most appropriate duration—in this example an eighth note. Now enter the desired series of notes/rests. For example: Create a triplet in note input mode . Ensure you are in note input mode (press N ). 1 . 2 Navigate to the note/rest (or blank measure) where you want the triplet to start (use the left/right arrow keys as required). 3 . Select a final duration for the whole triplet group. In the case of an eighth note triplet, click on the quarter note in the note input toolbar (or press 5 on the keyboard). 4 . Press the keyboard shortcut for a tuplet, Ctrl + 3 (Mac: ⌘ + 3 ); alternatively, use the menu, Add → Tuplets → Triplet . This creates a triplet number/bracket and appropriately divides the original note/rest (see image above). 5 The program automatically selects the most appropriate duration—in this example an eighth note—allowing you to . immediately start entering the desired series of notes/rests. Create other tuplets To create other tuplets substitute one of the following commands at the relevant step above: Ctrl + 2–9 (Mac: Cmd + 2–9 Press ). 2 for a duplet, 3 for a triplet etc. From the menu, select Add → Tuplets , then click on the desired option. For more complex cases, see below . Custom tuplets To create other tuplets than the default options (e.g. 13 sixteenth notes in the space of one quarter note): 1 In Note input mode , select a note duration equaling the total duration of the tuplet; or, if in Normal mode , select a . note or rest of the desired overall duration; 2 . Open the Create Tuplet dialog from the menu: Add → Tuplets → Other... ; 3 . Select the desired number ratio (e.g. 13/4 for thirteen sixteenth notes in the space of a quarter note) under "Relation" in the "Type" section. Specify "Number" and "Bracket" using the radio buttons in the "Format" section; 99

100 4 . OK to close the dialog: Click . 5 Enter the desired series of notes/rests. Delete a tuplet Select the number/bracket and press Del . Change display of tuplets Using the Inspector To change the display properties of tuplets in the score, select the tuplet numbers/brackets, and adjust the desired properties in the "Tuplet" section of the Inspector : : Auto places the bracket/number in the default Direction always places the bracket above the note position. Up heads; Down always places the bracket below the note heads. Number type : Choice of Number, Ratio, or Nothing. Bracket type : Automatic hides the bracket for beamed notes and shows the bracket if the tuplet includes unbeamed notes or rests. Bracket displays the bracket. Nothing hides the bracket. Using the Tuplets Style dialog To make fine adjustments to the way that all tuplets in the score are displayed: from the menu, select Format → Style... → Tuplets . The legend below illustrates some of the properties that can be adjusted in the Tuplets style dialog: 100

101 (2) Vertical distance from stem. (3) Vertical distance from note head. (5) Distance before stem of first note (6) Distance after stem of last note. External links How to create triplets and other tuplets How to create nonstandard tuplets Tuplet at Wikipedia [video] The User Guide to Tuplets in MuseScore Repeats and jumps Simple repeats simple repeat by placing a start and an end You can create a repeat barline at the beginning and end of a passage. These barlines are applied from the palette. Repeats & Jumps : If the start of a repeat coincides with the beginning Note section , the start repeat barline can be omitted if of a piece or desired. Similarly, an end repeat barline can be omitted at the end of a score or section. 1st and 2nd endings First create a simple repeat (as shown above), then apply the first and second time endings—see Voltas . Playback To hear repeats during playback, make sure the "Play Repeats" button on the toolbar is selected. Likewise, you can turn off repeats during playback by deselecting the button. To set the number of times that a repeat section plays back: 1 . Make sure the start and end repeat barlines are in place (e.g. Simple repeats above). 2 . Right-click on the last measure containing the end repeat barline and select Measure properties . 3 Adjust " Play count " as required. . Repeat symbols and text Text and symbols related to repeats are located in the " Repeats & Jumps " palette (in the Basic and Advanced workspaces). This palette contains: Symbols for measure repeat, Segno, Coda, and repeat barlines D.S., D.C., To Coda, and Fine text 101

102 To add a repeat symbol to the score use either of the following: onto (not above!) the desired measure (so the measure changes Drag and drop a repeat symbol from the palette color). Select a measure, then double-click the desired repeat symbol in the palette. Jumps are symbols in the score which tell the musician, and playback, to skip to a named marker (see below). Jumps Jumps include the various kinds of D.C. (Da Capo) and D.S. (Dal Segno) text. , some text boxes and a checkbox are displayed in the Jump section of the Inspector If you click on a jump . These have the following effects on playback: Jump to : Playback jumps to the marker whose "Label" is the same as the "Jump to" tag. Play until : Playback continues until it reaches a marker whose "Label" is the same as the "Play until" tag. : Playback jumps to the next marker Continue at whose "Label" is the same as the "Continue" tag. Play repeats : Ticking this box tells MuseScore to play repeats after D.C. (Da Capo) or D.S. (Dal Segno) jumps. If simple Repeats this option is not ticked then are not taken after jumps and playback works as if it were the last repeat. : The tags start and end , referring to the beginning and end of a score or section , are implicit and don't need to be Note added by the user. Markers are the places referred to by the jumps . A list of markers (in addition to the implicit "start" and "end") follows: Markers : Segno (tag: ) segno : Segno Variation (tag: varsegno ) : Coda (tag: codab ) : Coda Variation (tag: varcoda ) : (tag: fine Fine ) coda ) : (tag: To Coda Marker section of the Inspector: If you click on a marker, the following properties appears in the Marker type : This can be changed from the dropdown list, if required. : This is the (identifier) tag associated with the marker. See also, Label (above). Jumps Examples of jumps : At the "D.C." sign, playback jumps to the start (i.e. to the implicit tag) and plays the entire Da Capo (D.C.) start end score or section again (i.e. up to the implicit tag). Da Capo (D.C.) al Fine : At the "D.C. al Fine" sign, playback jumps to the start (i.e. to the implicit start tag) and plays the score up to the Fine (i.e. the fine tag). Dal Segno (D.S.) al Fine : At the "D.S. al Fine" sign, playback jumps to the symbol (i.e. the segno tag) and Segno Fine (i.e. the fine tag) then plays up to the Dal Segno (D.S.) al Coda : At the "D.S. al Coda" sign, playback jumps to the Segno symbol (i.e. the segno tag) and then plays up to the To Coda (i.e. the coda tag). Playback then continues at the Coda symbol (i.e. the codab tag). 102

103 Note : The properties (i.e. the tag names) of jumps and markers can be set via the . You need to modify them if Inspector using multiple jumps and markers. See also Barlines Volta External links MuseScore in Minutes: Repeats and Endings, part 2 (video tutorial) (MuseScore HowTo) How to separate a coda from the rest of the score Voltas Volta brackets, or first and second ending brackets, are used to mark different endings for a repeat. To add a volta to the score Use one of the following methods: Select a measure, or range of measures and double-click a Volta icon in the . Lines palette Lines palette , then adjust the length as required (see below). Drag-and-drop a volta from the To change the number of measures that a volta covers 1 . Double-click the volta to enter edit mode . The end handle is automatically selected. 2 . Press Shift + → to move the end handle forward one measure. Press Shift + ← to move the handle backward one measure. Repeat as required. Note Shift commands will alter the playback start and end points of the volta. To make fine adjustments to the : Only the start or end points you can use other keyboard arrow commands , or drag the handles with a mouse, but these do visual not affect the playback properties. When you select a start or end handle, a dashed line appears connecting it to an anchor point on the staff. This anchor shows the position of the start or end point of the Volta. playback Volta properties To make changes to Volta text : Select the volta, and edit the properties in the Text Line Core section of the Inspector . 103

104 To specify the order of repeats : Volta section of the ) type in a number, or sequence of numbers Select the volta, and in "Repeat list" ( Inspector separated by commas, to indicate the repeat(s) in which the volta is to be played. first ending shows the number "1"; a For example, a , the number "2" and so on. More complex repeats second ending are also possible: e.g. a "Repeat list" displaying "1, 2, 4, 5, 7" indicates that the volta is to be played during repeats 1, 2, 4, 5, and 7, and so on. Playback Sometimes a repeat plays more than two times. If you want to change the number of times MuseScore plays a repeat, go Measure operations: Other properties . to the measure containing the end repeat barline and change its "Play count". See External links MuseScore in Minutes, Lesson 8: Repeats and Endings, Part 1 How to create ties leading into a 2nd ending Transposition is the act of raising or lowering the pitch of a selection of notes by the same interval . You can chose to Transposition manually or by using the transpose notes either . Transpose dialog Manual transposition 1 . Select the notes that you wish to transpose; 2 . Use any of the following options: To transpose chromatically : Press or ↓ . Repeat as required; ↑ ; Press Alt To transpose diatonically Shift + ↑ or ↓ . Repeat as required; + To transpose by an octave : Press Ctrl + ↑ or ↓ (Mac: Cmd + ↑ or ↓ ). Automatic transposition MuseScore's Transpose dialog gives you more options for transposing notes. 104

105 Note : By default this dialog opens from the menu, but you can also chose to open it using a keyboard shortcut (see Tools ). Preferences Transpose Chromatically By Key To transpose notes up or down to the nearest key: 1 . Select the notes you want to transpose; no selection equals "select all."; . From the menu bar, choose Tools → Transpose... ; 2 3 . Tick "Transpose Chromatically" and "By key;" . 4 Tick/untick "Transpose key signature" and "Transpose chord symbols" if required; 5 . Tick one of "Closest," "Up" or "Down;" and select a destination key signature from the drop-down menu; . 6 Click OK. By Interval To transpose selected notes up or down in semitone increments: 1 . Select the notes you want to transpose; no selection equals "select all."; 2 . From the menu bar, choose Tools → Transpose... ; 3 . Tick "Transpose Chromatically" and "By Interval;" . 4 Tick/untick "Transpose key signature" and "Transpose chord symbols" if required; 5 . Tick "Up" or "Down;" and select a transposition interval from the drop-down menu; . 6 Click OK. Transpose Diatonically To transpose selected notes up or down by a diatonic interval: 1 . Select the notes you want to transpose; no selection equals "select all."; 2 . From the menu bar, choose Tools → Transpose... ; 3 Tick "Transpose Diatonically;" . 4 . Tick/untick "Transpose key signature" and "Transpose chord symbols" if required; 5 . Tick "Up" or "Down;" and select a transposition interval from the drop-down menu; 6 . Click OK. Transposing instruments 105

106 Transposing instruments , such as the B-flat trumpet or E-flat alto sax, sound lower, or higher than their written pitch. MuseScore has a number of features to facilitate the scoring of these instruments. Concert pitch , but you can chose to display the score in MuseScore's default viewing mode shows the musical notation in written pitch all instead. In the latter mode, the musical notation of instruments matches the actual pitches that you hear concert pitch on playback. Concert Pitch To change the view to concert pitch : Press the button to highlight it. You should ensure that the Concert pitch button is OFF before printing the main score or any parts. Change staff transposition Instrument transpositions are already set up in MuseScore. However, if you want a rare instrument or transposition that is not available in MuseScore, you may need to edit the instrument transposition manually. . 1 Staff/Part Properties... . Right-click an empty part of the instrument staff and select . 2 At the bottom of the window, select the interval of transposition, any octave shifts, and whether the interval is "Up" (sounds higher than written) or "Down" (sounds lower than written). Change Instrument... You can also use the button in the Staff/Part Properties window to automatically change the transposition to that of a different standard instrument. External links How to transpose (MuseScore How-To) Concert pitch or not? (forum discussion) Drum notation Entering percussion notation is somewhat different to entering notation for pitched instruments (such as the piano or violin). Percussion staff types New Score Wizard or the Instruments dialog, MuseScore automatically When you create a percussion staff using the choses the most appropriate staff type (1-, 3-, or 5-line) for the instrument: this can be changed, if required, using the Chose instruments / Instruments page. Any additional changes (e.g. to a 2-line staff) can be "Staff type" column on the made from the score itself (see Advanced Style Properties ). On a 5-line percussion staff, each instrument is assigned a vertical staff position (line or space) and a notehead shape. For a drumset, one or two voices can be used. If the latter, voice 1 (the upper voice) usually contains (up-stem) notes played by the hands while (the lower voice) usually contains (down-stem) notes played by the feet (see image voice 2 below). Note input methods You can add notes to a percussion staff from any of the following: External MIDI keyboard; Piano keyboard (virtual); Computer keyboard; Mouse. These methods can be used in any desired combination: MIDI keyboard 106

107 To add notes to a percussion staff from a MIDI keyboard : . Ensure that the MIDI keyboard is connected and functioning correctly. 1 note input : If you click on the percussion staff without entering the percussion mode, you can Note demo instruments from the MIDI keyboard. Click on the note or rest where you want to start. . 2 . Enter note input mode. 3 4 voice . For example, snares, sidesticks and all cymbals are normally added to voice 1; bass drum . Select the correct to voice 2. Set note duration . . 5 Press an instrument key to add a note to the score. To add another note at the same position, keep the first key held . 6 down while pressing the second key. : Refer to a Note for details about which MIDI keyboard key corresponds to which percussion instrument. GM2 drum map Some keyboards (e.g., Casio) display percussion symbols next to the keys as an aid to the user. Piano keyboard To add notes to a percussion staff from the virtual Piano Keyboard : → Ensure that the Piano keyboard is displayed. Press (or select it from the menu, . P Piano Keyboard ). 1 View Note note input mode, you can demo the percussion : If you click on the percussion staff without entering instruments from the Piano keyboard. 2 . Click on the note or rest where you want to start. 3 . Enter note input mode. 4 . Select the correct voice . For example, snares, sidesticks and all cymbals are normally added to voice 1; bass drum to voice 2. 5 Set note duration . . . 6 Click on a (virtual piano) key to add a note to the score. 7 . To add another note to an existing one, press Shift and hold it while pressing the new note (in versions before 2.1, Ctrl (Mac: Cmd )). use Note : Refer to a for details about which piano key corresponds to which percussion instrument. GM2 drum map By default, the piano keyboard is docked at the bottom of the screen—to the left of the Drum input palette. However you can undock it by dragging, then dock the panel in several ways: Drag the panel downwards to the center and it will overlay the Drum input palette, full length. Both panels can then be accessed by Tabs. Drag the panel downwards to the right/left and it will dock to the right/left of the Drum input palette. Computer keyboard To enter notes on a percussion staff using your computer keyboard: 1 . Click on the note or rest where you want to start. 2 . Enter note input mode. The Drum input palette now appears at the bottom of the screen (see below ). 3 . note duration . Select the desired . Press the shortcut key (A–G) for the instrument that you wish to enter—refer to the Drum input palette window. 4 . If you wish to add another note to an existing one in that voice, press Shift + [A–G]. 5 Note : Voice allocation is determined by the color of the note in the drum input palette: blue for voice 1, green for voice 2. Mouse To add a note to a percussion staff . Use the following method to add a note or to replace an existing chord new 1 . Select the note or rest where you want to start. You can also select a measure . 107

108 2 . N to to enter note input mode . The Drum input palette now appears at the bottom of the screen (see below ). Press . Set . 3 note duration . 4 Chose one of the following options: Double-click a note in the Drum input palette . Drum input palette , then click a note or rest in the score. Select a note (e.g. Bass drum, or Snare) in the To add a note to an existing chord in the percussion staff 1 Ensure you are in note input mode . . . equal to the note you are adding to. note duration 2 Select a . 3 Drum input palette . Click on the new note in the 4 . Click above or below the existing note in the percussion staff. Note : Voice allocation is determined by the color of the note in the drum input palette: blue for voice 1, green for voice 2. Drum input palette When a percussion staff is selected and mode is ON, a window opens at the bottom of the screen called the note input . This window is input, but for mouse input, and displays shortcuts for computer keyboard Drum input palette essential can be ignored if using a or the virtual Piano Keyboard . MIDI keyboard Each note in the palette represents a percussion instrument: hovering the mouse pointer over the note displays the instrument name. The letters A–G (shown above certain notes in the palette) are designated as shortcuts for entering particular instruments (bass drum, snare, closed hi-hat etc.), rather than referring to note pitches. They can be changed or reallocated as desired in the Edit Drumset window. When the is open, double-clicking a note in the palette or entering a shortcut letter will add that Drum input palette instrument note to the percussion staff. The color of the note in the palette shows the voice allocated for that note—blue for voice 1, green for voice 2. This can be changed in the Edit Drumset dialog if required. This voice allocation applies only to keyboard and mouse entry of notes: entry via a MIDI keyboard or the virtual Piano keyboard allows any voice to be used. Edit Drumset To open the Edit Drumset window, use one of the following options: Click on the Edit Drumset button at the left of the Drum input palette . Right-click on a percussion staff and select "Edit Drumset...". 108

109 The Edit Drumset dialog displays the percussion instruments available and the MIDI notes/numbers to which they are allocated. It also determines how each instrument is displayed on the staff— its name, position, notehead type and note- stem direction. Any changes made here are automatically saved in the parent MuseScore file . Clicking on a row in the left-hand column allows you to edit the display properties for that note as follows: : The name you want displayed in the Drum input palette when you mouse over the note. Name Notehead group : Chose a notehead for that instrument from a drop-down list of options ( : chosing "Custom" Note activates "Edit noteheads" (below). Edit Noteheads : Allows you to cutomise the display further by specifying the noteheads for particular note durations. : Assign to one of four voices. This does not affect input from a MIDI keyboard or the virtual Piano keyboard. Default voice : This number indicates the staff line/space on which the note is displayed. "0" means that the note is displayed Staff line on the top line of the 5-line staff. Negative numbers move the note upwards step by step, while positive numbers move it downwards in the same way. : Assign a keyboard shortcut to enter that note. Shortcut Stem Direction : Auto, Up or down. The customized drumset can be saved as a .drm file by pressing . You can also import a customized drumset using Save the Load button. Roll To create a drum roll, use Tremolo . External links How to create jazz drum notation [MuseScore How-To] Video tutorial: MuseScore in Minutes: Lesson 7 - Tablature and Drum Notation Drum Parts [video] Editing the Drum Palette in MuseScore 1.1 [video] Saving Drumset Changes in MuseScore 1.1 [video] Guide to Drum and Percussion Notation Tablature Music for fretted, stringed instruments is commonly notated using tablature , also known as tab , which provides a visual representation of the strings and fret numbers: Tablature can also be combined with traditional staff notation: Create a new tablature staff If you wish to create tablature as part of a new score, use the New Score Wizard . If you want to add tablature to an existing score, use the Instruments dialog. Or, alternatively, you can convert an existing standard staff . See below for details. With the New Score wizard 109

110 To create tablature in a new score (for combined staff/tablature systems see → below ): . Open the . 1 New Score wizard Enter the score details (optional). Click . . Next 2 On the 3 page, click on Choose Instruments under "General". . Chose template file . On the 4 page, select the desired tablature in the "Strings – plucked" category, in the left-hand column. Instruments Then click . Add . 5 Complete the rest of the New Score Wizard. : If the desired tablature is not available in the Choose Instrument list, add a tablature staff anyway at step 4 Note (above). Then edit the tablature to your exact requirements using the dialog. Staff/Part properties With the Instruments dialog To add a single tablature staff to an existing score (for combined staff/tab system see below ): 1 . Open the instruments dialog (press I ; or from the menu bar, select Edit → Instruments... ). 2 . Add instruments ("Create a new score"). Add the tab staff as described in By changing staff type To convert an existing standard staff to tablature, or tablature to a standard staff: . Right click on the staff and select Staff/Part Properties... . If "Instrument" is already set to a plucked-strings type, then exit 1 staff properties and go to step 3. . If "Instrument" is not a plucked-strings type, click on Change instrument and select an appropriate instrument from 2 "Strings – Plucked." 3 . Click on Advanced Style properties , select the appropriate tablature option from "Template", then press < Reset to Template . You can fine tune the display if necessary using the "Fret Marks" and "Note Values" tabs. 4 Click OK twice to exit. . Edit string data Change tuning Note : If you only want to view (rather than change) the instrument tuning, follow steps 1 and 2 only. 1 . Right-click on the staff and select Staff/Part Properties... . 2 . Press the Edit String Data... button at the bottom of the dialog box. The String Data dialog opens: 110

111 3 . Edit String... . Or, alternatively, just double-click the string pitch. Click on a string pitch and select . Select a new pitch in the box and click OK . Or, alternatively, just double-click the new pitch. 4 Note Selection to close the Click to close the " . " dialog box. Then click OK OK "Staff/Part Properties" dialog. 5 String Data : (1) If tuning is changed when the tablature for that instrument already contains some notes, fret marks will be Notes (if possible); (2) Any change of tuning to a particular instrument applies only to the score at hand, adjusted automatically and does not change any program default settings. Add a string . Right-click on the staff, select Staff/Part Properties... , then press Edit String Data . 1 . New String... . 2 Click on a string pitch and select . Select the new pitch and press OK 3 —or, alternatively, just double-click the new pitch. The new string is inserted below the selected string. Note : After adding a tablature string you will need to adjust the number of lines in the Staff/Part properties dialog. Delete a string 1 . Right-click on the staff, select Staff/Part Properties... , then press Edit String Data . 2 . Delete String . Click on a string pitch and select : After deleting a tablature string you will need to adjust the number of lines in the dialog. Note Staff/Part properties Mark unfretted string "open" This feature is used to mark a (bass) course as unstopped (i.e. outside of the fingerboard and always sounding open): as on a Baroque lute or Theorbo etc. This means that only "0" (zero) or "a" is accepted as a fret mark: any other fret mark will be converted to 0/a. . Right-click on the staff, select 1 , then press Edit String Data . Staff/Part Properties... 2 . Check one or more boxes in the "Open" column. Change number of instrument frets This property defines the maximum fret number which can be entered on a tablature staff. 1 . Right-click on the staff, select Staff/Part Properties... , then press Edit String Data . 2 Select or enter a new number in the " Number of frets " spin box. . Change tablature display You can customize both the appearance of a tablature staff and the way that it displays the fret marks. To access these options: 1 . Right click on the staff and select Staff/Part Properties... . 2 . Click on the Advanced Style Properties... button. 111

112 Combine pitched staff with tablature Plucked-string instruments—such as the guitar—are commonly notated using both a music staff tablature (TAB) and unlinked or : together. MuseScore gives you the option of having the two staves either linked Unlinked Staves 1 : The advantage of using this option is that each staff can be edited independently. To transfer . copy and paste music notation from one staff to the other, it onto the other staff. select the desired range and : The staves are "mutually updating": i.e. any change you make to the notation in one staff is 2 . Linked Staves immediately applied to the other staff as well. When the same note is entered in two different voices, MuseScore tries to ensure that the : A note on fret mark conflicts occur are marked with red squares: these appear fret marks do not overlap on the same string. Any overlaps which do not only in the document window and on any printed copy. In almost all cases (e.g. frets 0 to 4 on the 6th string), overlapping is the desired result and no further adjustment is required. You can hide the red marks by selecting "View" and unticking "Show Unprintable." Create a staff/tablature pair with the New Score wizard Open the New Score wizard . 1 . Enter the score details (optional). Click Next . . 2 . On the Chose template file page, click on 3 under "General". Choose Instruments 4 Select a pitched staff in the "Strings – Plucked" section of the left-hand column. Then click Add . . . Select the newly-created staff line (i.e. marked "Staff ...") in the right-hand column and chose one of two options: 5 to create an unlinked staff/tab pair. Click Add Staff Add Linked Staff to create a linked staff/tab pair. Click . In the Staff type column, click on the dropdown list for the newly-created staff and select a tablature option (this can 6 Staff/Part Properties ). be modified later, if required, on the score page—see . ↑ button if needed. 7 Change the staff order using the . Complete the rest of the New Score Wizard, or click Finish . 8 : To create unlinked staves with separate mixer channels, instead of step "5" (above), select a Tablature staff in the Note left-hand column and click Add . Then continue with steps 6 and 7. Create a staff/tablature pair in an existing score 1 . Open the Instruments editor (press I , or from the menu bar, select Edit → Instruments... ). 2 . Then follow steps 4–8 above. Create a staff/tablature pair from an existing staff To add tablature to a plucked-string staff in the score (or vice versa): Open the Instruments editor (press I , or from the menu bar, select Edit → . Instruments... ). 1 . Then follow steps 5–8 above. 2 Enter notes in tablature Using a computer keyboard . 1 Normal mode , select the measure or existing note from which you want to begin note entry. In 2 Switch to note input mode ( N ): a short 'blue rectangle' appears around one tablature string: this is the current string . . . 3 (see below ). Select the duration of the note or rest that you wish to enter 4 . Press the up/down arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired string. Use the left/right arrow keys to navigate through the score. 5 . Press 0 to 9 to enter a fret mark from 0 to 9 on the current string; to enter numbers with several digits press each ) can also be used: convenient when working in French tablature. For digit in sequence. to K (skipping I A L , M , Keys N , use the alphanumeric keyboard and type respectively 1 0 , 1 1 , 1 2 ... ( Note : You cannot enter a number higher than the "Number of frets" value set in the dialog). Edit String Data Press ; (semicolon) to enter a rest of the selected duration. 6 . You can enter notes in different voices if required—just as you would in a standard staff. 112

113 See also, Edit notes (below). Historical tablature Period notation for bass strings (lutes and sim.) is supported: French tablature : letters with prefixed slash-like strokes right under the tab body: i.e. 7th string: "a", 8th string: "/a", 9th string: "//a" and so on, all in the first position below the tab body. : numbers with 'ledger line'- like segment of string above the tab body: i.e. 7th string: "0" one Italian tablature position above the tab body with one 'ledger line'; 8th string: "0" two positions above the tab body with two 'ledger lines' and so on. Input of fretmarks is via computer keyboard only: by moving the note entry cursor below (French) or above (Italian) the tab body, 'shadow' slashes or ledger lines will indicate the target string to which the fret mark will be applied; pressing one of the fret keys, will enter (and lay out) the note on that string. Using a mouse To enter notes into tablature with a mouse: below ). Enter note input mode and select the note or rest duration (see Click on a string to create a note there. Notes are initially created on fret 0 (or a for French tablatures): to correct, type in the right number from the keyboard. Alt + Shift + ↑ or Alt + Shift + ↓ You can also increase/decrease the fret mark using . You can enter notes in different if required—just as you would in a standard staff. voices Edit notes See also, (below). Select note duration In note input mode, you can use any of the following methods to set note duration in tablature: Shift + 1 to Shift + 9 : Sets duration from a 128th note to a longa (availability of these shortcuts may depend on the Press platform and/or keyboard layout); Press 1 to Numpad NumPad : Sets duration from a 128th note to a longa (if a numeric keypad exists and NumLock is 9 on); Click on a note duration icon in the Note Input toolbar above the document window; Press Q W to increase it. to decrease the selected duration and Edit notes In Note input mode note-input mode : To edit an existing fret mark in Position the cursor above the fret mark and simply retype the number. Alt + Shift + ↑ or Alt Increment or decrement the fret mark using Shift + ↓ . + In Normal mode To edit an existing fret mark in Normal mode : 1 . Select one or more fret marks. 2 . Use any of the following commands: To increment or decrement, without changing the string: Press ↑ ↓ . / Alt To increment or decrement, changing strings, when possible, to minimize the fret number: Press Shift + ↑ / ↓ + To move to an adjacent string (if the string is free and can produce that note): Press Ctrl + ↑ / ↓ (Mac: Cmd + ↑ / ↓ ). Alternatively, use the mouse to drag the fret mark up or down to an adjacent string. Note : The fret mark cannot be higher than the "Number of frets" value set in the Edit String Data dialog. Crosshead notes 113

114 To change a fret mark to a crosshead note: 1 Select one or more fret marks (in non-note-input mode). . . Press + X to toggles ghost noteheads on/off. 2 Shift Summary of keyboard commands Note input mode Type: to get: ↑ Select above string as current. ↓ Select below string as current. Select a duration (128th note to a to Shift Shift 9 + 1 + longa) NumPad 1 to NumPad Select a duration (128th note to a longa) 9 Decrease current input duration. Q Increase current input duration. W 9 Enter a fret digit / letter. 0 to to Enter a fret digit / letter ( I excluded). A K + Shift Alt ↑ Increase current fret mark. + Alt Shift + ↓ + Decrease current fret mark. ; (semicolon) Enter a rest Normal mode Type: to get: 0 to Change duration of selected note or rest (128th note to longa) 9 + + ↑ Increase the pitch of the selected note (MuseScore chooses the string). Alt Shift ↑ Increase the pitch without changing string. Decrease the pitch of the selected note (MuseScore chooses the Shift + ↓ Alt + string). ↓ Decrease the pitch without changing string. + ↑ (Mac: Ctrl + ↑ ) Move note to above string, keeping the pitch. Cmd Ctrl + ↓ (Mac: Cmd + ↓ ) Move note to below string, keeping the pitch. Shift + Toggle the ghost notehead on/off. X External links Video tutorial: MuseScore in Minutes: Lesson 7 - Tablature and Drum Notation Sound and playback MuseScore has "Sound and playback" capabilities built-in. This chapter covers the playback controls and ways to extend the instrument sounds. Mid-staff instrument changes When a musician is required to double on a different instrument for a section of a piece, the instruction to switch instruments is generally placed above the staff at the beginning of that section. A return to the primary instrument is handled in the same manner. MuseScore enables users to insert a special class of text called text for this purpose. This class of Change Instrument text is different from either Staff or System text in that it links the text to the playback and changes the sound to the new instrument. Effect of instrument change 114

115 When an instrument change is made: The sound played will be changed to that of the new instrument from that point onward, but the display mixer remains unchanged. Subsequent notes are automatically adjusted to indicate the correct written pitch for the new instrument (but the new below ). still needs to be added manually—see key signature The new instrument name will be displayed in front of the following systems. Add an instrument change 1 . Select the start point of the change by clicking on a note or rest; . 2 View menu ), and click on Text to open the text sub-palette: Open the main palette by typing F9 (or from the 3 . Double-click on Change Instr ; 4 . The words "Change Instr." will appear above the anchor note or rest; 5 . Double-click the text, then type Ctrl + A to select all of it; 6 . exit text edit mode ; Type the actual text you wish to be displayed, and . 7 Change Instrument ...": Right-click the text and choose " 8 . Choose the instrument, then click OK: ; 9 Insert a new key signature , if required, at the change, for the staff in question. . Note : Mid-staff instrument changes are limited to the same type of staff . For example, you cannot change between a percussion staff and a pitched instrument staff or vice versa. See also Change instrument Mid-staff sound change 115

116 External links How to change instrument sound (e.g. pizz., con sordino) midway through score Mixer The Mixer allows you to change instrument sounds, adjust volume and panning, and make other adjustments to the playback for each staff. Opening the Mixer To display/hide the mixer, use one of the following: F10 (Mac: fn Press F10 ). + From the main menu, select View → Mixer . The Mixer is split into a Details Area on the top and a Track Area below. Track Area Master Gain as well as a row of tracks. The track area is at the bottom and displays the Master Gain The Master Gain controls the overall output volume. To adjust it, click and drag the slider handle or enter a value in the box underneath. Track Area The Track Area displays allows you to adjust the volume of the instruments used by your staves. MuseScore creates one "part track" for each staff in your score. These part tracks can be further subdivided into "channel tracks" corresponding to the different sounds used within the staff. While many staves only need a single channel track, others require multiple channels so that the instrument can play more than one sound (e.g. a violin which can play in arco, 116

117 tremolo or pizzicato voices); or because of a Mid-staff instrument change These extra channel tracks can be shown or . hidden by clicking the arrow button on top of the track control. Expanded part track, showing the child tracks in pink. Channel display arrow Every part track has a button on the top with an arrow on it. When clicked, this will toggle whether the channel tracks of Channel tracks do not have an arrow button. the staff are displayed next to it. Instead, the name of the track they are a part of is displayed. Mute and Solo At the top of each track is a green solo button and a red mute button: each can be toggled on or off. If any Solo button is checked then only tracks that have Solo lit will play. If no solo is lit, all parts can potentially play. Mute does the opposite: any track that has mute lit will not play. By using a combbination of mute and solo buttons, you can control which instruments are heard during playback. Pan The dial below the mute button controls panning left and right. You can click and drag on the dial to change the pan value. : MuseScore does not yet support pan values for the part track, so the part track displays the pan value of the first Note channel instead. Setting the pan value of the part track will automatically set all of its children to the same value as well. Volume The slider in the middle of the track controls the playback volume. Note : MuseScore does not yet support volume values for the part track, so the part track displays the volume value of the first channel instead. Setting the volume value of the part track will automatically set all of its children to the same value as well. Track name The text box at the bottom of the track contains the current name of the tracks part or channel. Details Area The details area displays and provides finer control of the currently selected track. 117

118 Name The name of the part this track is associated with. Note : The Both part tracks and channel tracks display the part name. part name is editable, but this only have effect for the Mixer.The cannel name is no editable. Track Color Double clicking on this swatch will allow you to This is a color the user can choose to help distinguish a particular part. choose a different color for displaying the name of this track. Setting the color of a part track will automatically change the colors of all its child tracks. Channel If a channel track is selected, the channel name is displayed here. Drumset Indicates if this part represents a melodic instrument or a drumkit. For regular melodic instruments, each pitch in the same patch usually has the same timbre, while drumkit patches usually have different timbres for each pitch. Patch This is the actual Sound from the soundfont, that is used to render your instrument. Volume The overall loudness with which the sound is played. Pan The panning applied to the part. Port and Channel The output MIDI port and channel the part is played on. Reverb / Chorus The reverb/chorus value sent to MIDI out. This is information sent to MIDI devices and will not affect MuseScore's built in audio playback Mute Voice This allows you to mute individual voices within each staff. Each row represents a different staff within a part. So pressing '2' on the top row will mute the second voice on the first staff of the part. Hide Details Button At the bottom of the details area is a wide button with a tiny triangle on it. Clicking this button will hide the details area to give you more room. Clicking on it again will restore the details area. 118

119 Sound The "Sound" drop-down menu lists every instrument supported by your current . If you have multiple SoundFont Synthesizer , all the patches from all the SoundFonts (and/or SFZ files) will appear in a single SoundFonts loaded in the long list—in the order previously set in the Synthesizer. : To find an instrument, click on the "Sound" list and type the first letter of the instrument name. Repeat as required. Tip Mid-staff sound change (pizz., con sordino, etc.) Some instruments come with multiple channels in the Mixer that can be used to change sounds midway through a score. For example, a staff for a stringed instrument (violin, viola, cello etc.) is allocated three channels: one for "arco" (or "normal"), another for "pizzicato" and another for "tremolo." A trumpet staff will have one channel for "normal" and another reserved for "mute," and so on. The following instructions use pizzicato strings as an example, but the same principle can be applied to any other instrument staff that allows sound changes. 1 . Select the first note of the section you want to be pizzicato; Staff Text . Add → 2 → From the main menu, choose ; Text 3 . Type "pizz." This text is for visual reference only and does not affect playback; 4 . Right-click on the applied staff text and select Staff Text Properties... ; 5 . In the "Change Channel" tab of the "Staff Text Properties" dialog, select one or more voices on the left; . pizzicato ; 6 From the dropdown menu, select 7 Click OK to return to the score. . Every note after the staff text you added now sounds pizzicato. To return to a normal strings sound later in the piece, follow the same guidelines as above except type "arco" in step 3 and select normal in step 6. See also SoundFont Synthesizer Change instrument External links How to change instrument sound (e.g. pizz., con sordino) midway through score Piano Roll Editor The Piano Roll Editor allows you edit individual notes and tweak aspects of their playback. Opening the Piano Roll Editor To open the Piano Roll Editor (PRE), right click on a measure in the score and choose the Piano Roll Editor option from the context menu. The Piano Roll Editor will open showing the staff and measure where you clicked. If the Piano Roll 119

120 Editor is already open, it will be updated to show the new staff and measure you clicked on. Overview playback The Piano Roll Editor is divided into several sections. At the very top is a row of buttons and controls that affect and can modify notes. The name of the part being edited is at the top right. The central portion contains the Note Display Area which allows you to view and edit notes. Each note is displayed as a block, with yellow blocks representing selected notes, and darker green blocks representing unselected notes (these colors can be changes in the Preferences). Given sufficient space, each block will display its pitch on the left and the voice it is assigned to on the right. Changing the size of the note blocks is covered in the section. navigation To the left of the Note Display Area is the Keyboard . By clicking on a key in the Keyboard, you can hear a sample of that note playing. As you move the mouse in either the Node Display Area or the Keyboard, a key on the keyboard will light to corresponding to they pitch your are over. You can also hover your mouse over a particular key to get more information about that pitch. If you are using a Drumkit, the keys of the keyboard will show the name of the drum assigned to that particular pitch. For instruments that are not concert C, the keyboard will be adjusted so that the C of the keyboard matches the C of the instrument. 120

121 Along the top of the Note Display Area is the Measure Ruler which displays the current position of the playback head, as well as the current looping range if it set. The bottom of the editor contains the Levels Display Area . It is a bar graph showing extra data values assigned to each or cutoff time. To the left of the Levels Display Area is a dropdown menu allowing you to select velocity note, such as its the type of data you wish to see displayed or edited. Navigation There are several ways to move about in the Piano Roll Editor. First of all, you can click and drag on the scroll bars on the edges of the Note Display Area. The mouse wheel can also be used to pan and zoom as follows: : Mouse wheel. Scroll vertically Scroll horizontally : + mouse wheel. Shift : + mouse wheel. Zoom vertically Ctrl : Ctrl Zoom horizontally Shift + mouse wheel. + To jump to a particular measure, switch back to score view and find the measure you wish to see. Then right click on the measure and select Piano Roll Editor. The Piano Roll Editor will scroll to center on the measure you clicked. Selecting Notes In the Note Display Area, you can click on single notes or click and drag to select a group of notes. Holding down the modifier keys will affect how your selection changes: Shift : Invert existing selection: i.e. notes that were previously selected are deselected, and notes which were not selected are selected. Useful for toggling a note between selected and not selected. : Add notes to selection. Ctrl + Shift : Subtract notes from selection. Ctrl Editing Notes To change the pitch of a selection of notes : Drag a selected note up or down to a new pitch; or press the ↑ or ↓ arrows. Note : Dragging the note horizontally to change the start time is not supported at the moment. To delete a selection of notes : Press the Del key. To move a note selection to another voice : Click the desired voice number button at the top of the editor. To add notes : Notes can be inserted by clicking in the Piano Note Area with the modifier keys held. These edit operations will use the beat or subbeat line to the left of the spot where you click as the point where a note is altered: Ctrl : A note of the current insert note duration will be added at the subbeat and pitch where you clicked. The note 121

122 insert length is the same as the one you use to add notes in note entry mode in the score. If you wish to change the duration, you will need to select this in the Score View as the Piano Roll Editor does not currently have these buttons. If notes already exist in this location, a chunk will be cut out of them to make room for the note you are inserting, unless they happen to have the same start time and duration of the note you're adding, in which case the new note will simply be appended to the existing chord. Tuplets are currently not supported, and so will be ignored. Shift : Looks for a chord that already spans this subbeat line. If it finds one, appends a new pitch to the existing chord. Otherwise, this is a rest and the rest will be replaced with a note of equal start time and duration to the existing rest. + Shift : Looks for a chord or rest that spans this subbeat. This chord will be cut in two at this subbeat line. Tuplets Ctrl are currently not supported, and so will be ignored. To edit note event data : Note event data can be changed in the Levels Display Area. To edit event data such as velocity or cutoff time, first select the notes you wish to edit in the note area. Then click in the Levels Display Area on the corresponding bar; the value of the level will changed to correspond to the point where you clicked. You can also click and drag in this area to change the levels of several notes with a single gesture. If you want the levels to all be set to the same value, hold Shift while dragging. Only selected notes will have their value changed - this is to prevent you from accidentally changing the values of other notes. The Levels area can display the same data in multiple ways. For example, velocity data can be displayed both as absolute (ie, relative to the output midi volume) and relative (ie, as an offset to the dynamics value). You can switch between these display modes as you see fit. Controls From left to right the controls have these functions; First Row Undo Undoes the last action Redo Redoes the last action MIDI Toggle Toggles MIDI input Rewind Rewind to start of score. Play Starts/stops playback. Loop Playback Sets the range of and toggles looping playback. Play Repeats Toggles whether repeats are played. Pan Roll During Playback 122

123 If set, the window will automatically scroll to center on the playback head during playback. Metronome Toggle metronome. Wave Currently does nothing. Voice Numbers Moves selected notes to chosen voice. Part Name of part currently being viewed/edited. Second Row Cursor Provides feedback on the current measure and pitch of the position of the mouse within the Note Display Area. Subdiv Subdivides the beat by adding extra divisions to the Note Display Area. The value indicated the number of time the beat will be subdivided. So for 4/4 time, a division of 2 will draw grid lines at every eighth note; a division of 3 at every sixteenth note, and so on. Setting the subdivision is necessary for some editing operations if you wish to place notes off the beat. For larger numbers of subdivisions, you may need to be zoomed in to see the extra grid lines since grid lines are not drawn below a certain density. Combines with the tuplet control which also affects grid line placement. Tuplet Adds additional grid lines, subdividing the beat to show the rhythmic placement of tuplets. For example, setting tuplets to 3 will show the beat subdivided into tree parts. Combines with the subdiv control to show subdivisions of the tuplet. For example, setting tuplets to 3 and subdiv to 2 will draw grid lines showing the tuplet beats subdivided into two parts - i.e., the beat will be subdivided into 6. Selecting a tuplet mode other than 1 will disable some of the note insertion tools for the Piano Roll Editor. For larger numbers of subdivisions, you may need to be zoomed in to see the extra grid lines since grid lines are not drawn below a certain density. Stripe pattern Changes the pattern of stripes shown behind the notes in the Note Display Area. By default the pitches of C major are highlighted, but you can change this to highlight the pitches of a different key, or even scales such as the diminished or whole tone. Velocity Shows the velocity of the currently selected note (only one note may be selected). Indicates the loudness of the note. This can be expressed as 'Offset' or 'User': 123

124 Offset: Value is treated as a multiplier for the velocity already set by the dynamics. User: This is the raw value being sent to MIDI and overrides the dynamics value. Values are between 0 and 127, where 64 is "middle, neither loud nor soft". When you switch from User to Offset or visa versa, the value will be recalculated to best match the value in the other system. This way you could, for example, switch to User mode to set the value as you would like it to sound in MIDI output and then switch to Offset so that this value respects the dynamic marking instead of overriding it. At the moment you switch back, the offset value will be recalculated to match the User value in loudness but will no longer act as an override so you may later change the dynamic. Pitch Shows the pitch and octave of the selected note in text format (i.e. f#4). The pitch will chance if the note is dragged Up or down to a new pitch. Currently cannot be edited. OnTime Shifts the start of the note in time, which can be used to modify the playing style. Negative values will make the note sound earlier, positive will make it sound later. The duration of the note corresponds to a value of 1000 (e.g. setting the value to 250 will make the note sound 1/4 of its duration later). Length Set the time that the note is sounding, which may be used to modify the degree of "legato". Lower values will make the note sound more staccato, higher values will make it sound more legato. The duration of the note corresponds to a length of 1000, but the value can be set higher. 950 is usually considered "non-legato". Keyboard Some keys are hooked up to perform special actions: : Move selected notes up one semitone ↑ ↓ : Move selected notes down one semitone Del : Delete selected notes Space : Start/stop playback Customization The Piano Roll Editor will display in both normal mode and dark mode. If you wish to change the colors the Piano Roll Editor uses to display in these modes, they can be adjusted in the Preferences under the Advanced tab. All the Piano Roll Editor related properties begin with ui/pianoroll/light for light mode and ui/pianoroll/dark for dark mode. Play mode Playback toolbar Play toolbar Basic playback functions are accessed from the located above the document window: From left to right, the icons are: Toggle 'Midi input' : Rewind to start position : Playback returns to the beginning of the score, or to the start of the loop (if one is set). Start or stop playback : See Start/stop playback . Toggle loop playback : See Loop playback . Play repeats : Turn off if you want playback to ignore repeats. Pan score during playback : Turn off if you want the score to remain stationary. Play metronome : Toggles metronome ON and OFF. Playback commands Start/stop playback To start playback: 1 . Click on a note, rest or the blank part of a measure to establish the starting point. Note : If no selection is made, 124

125 playback returns to the place it left off; or, if no previous playback, to the start of the score. 2 Press the Play button; or press Space . . During playback you can jump to a specific note or rest in the score by simply clicking on it. To stop playback: button; or press Space . Press the Play During playback Once playback has started, the following commands are available: Go back to previous chord: ← Advance to next chord: → Ctrl + ← (Mac: Cmd + ← ) Go back to start of previous measure: Ctrl + → (Mac: Cmd + → ) Advance to start of next measure: button (playback toolbar). Home ⌘ Rewind to start of score: Home ); or press the Rewind (Mac: + During playback you can still use keyboard shortcuts to open and close panels , such as Play, Synthesizer, Mixer etc. Loop playback Playback should be off , and the "Loop playback button" on . Select the desired region of the score for loop playback. Press the playback button. Playback will now cycle within the region marked by the blue flags. Use the "Loop playback" button to toggle the loop on or off. See also: Play Panel (below). Play panel To open the Play Panel use one of the following options: F11 (Mac: Fn Press F11 ). + From the menu bar, select View → Play Panel . The Play Panel allows you to make temporary changes to tempo and volume, to loop playback between specified points etc. Loop playback : Select a start note and click on the Loop in button; select an end note and click on the Loop out button. Press Play during playback. to hear the loop. The controls also work Rewind, Play : Playback controls. Metronome : Toggle metronome playback ON or OFF. Count in : (Conductor icon) Adds a count-in when you start playback at the start of a measure. Extra beats are added if you start mid-measure. Toggles ON and OFF. Tempo : Make temporary change to tempo. This is displayed as a percentage and as a bpm (beats per minute). Double-click to reset. (Note: Permanent changes to tempo should be made using tempo text ) Volume : Make temporary change to volume (resets when program is reopened). Note: To change the default 125

126 playback volume of the score, see . Synthesizer SoundFonts and SFZ files Audio playback is provided by MuseScore's onboard virtual (or software ) synthesizer , which houses a large selection of —including percussion and sound effects. instruments MuseScore supports virtual instruments in two formats: SoundFont (.sf2/.sf3): A single file containing one or more virtual instruments. SFZ (.sfz): A set of audio and definition files containing one or more virtual instruments. SoundFonts General MIDI ) SoundFont, MuseScore comes with its own GM ( , containing over 128 MuseScore_General.sf3 instruments, sound effects and various drum/percussion kits. GM (General MIDI) is a universal format, so once your score is set up for correct playback using MuseScore's native Soundfont, you should be able to it in a format of your choice and have it play back on any other user's computer. export Many different Soundfonts are available on the Internet: some free, some commercial. For a list of free soundfonts, see below . Install a SoundFont After finding and decompressing a SoundFont (see → below ), double-click to open it. In most cases, the SoundFont file type will already be associated with MuseScore, and MuseScore will start and a dialog will appear asking if you want to install the SoundFont. Occasionally an application other than MuseScore will be associated with the SoundFont file type; if this is the case, you will need to right-click or control-click on the file, so as to display a menu from which you can choose to open the file in MuseScore. In either case, when the dialog appears asking if you want to install the SoundFont, click "Yes" to place a copy of the SoundFont file in MuseScore's SoundFonts directory. This directory can be viewed or changed in MuseScore's Preferences, but the default location is: Windows: %HOMEPATH%\Documents\MuseScore3\Soundfonts macOS and Linux: ~/Documents/MuseScore3/Soundfonts In contrast to user-added SoundFonts, the initial default SoundFont installed with MuseScore is located in a system directory, meant only for that purpose, which should be modified. This directory and its default SoundFont file is: not Windows (32-bit): %ProgramFiles%\MuseScore 3\sound\MuseScore_General.sf3 Windows (64-bit): %ProgramFiles(x86)%\MuseScore 3\sound\MuseScore_General.sf3 macOS: /Applications/MuseScore 3.app/Contents/Resources/sound/MuseScore_General.sf3 Linux (Ubuntu): /usr/share/mscore-xxx/sounds/MuseScore_General.sf3 (with xxx being the MuseScore version) Uninstall To uninstall a SoundFont, simply open the folder where its file is installed and delete it. SFZ An SFZ is a collection of files and directories, an SFZ file and a bunch of actual sound files in WAV or FLAC format, with the SFZ file being a text file that basically describes what sound file is located where and to be used for what instrument and pitch range. Install an SFZ After downloading an SFZ (see → below ), you need to manually extract all the files that belong to the SFZ (the SFZ file itself and all the subdirectories) into the directory listed above . Leave the subdirectories and their contents as they are. Uninstall 126

127 To uninstall an SFZ, simply open the folder where its files are installed (see above ) and delete them all. Synthesizer The installed , it needs to Synthesizer is MuseScore's central control panel for sound output. Once a SoundFont has been be loaded into the Synthesizer in order for MuseScore to use it for playback. To make a different SoundFont the default, Set as Default load it in the Synthesizer and click . → To display the Synthesizer, go to Synthesizer . For more details, see Synthesizer . View List of downloadable soundfiles GM SoundFonts The following sound libraries conform to the General MIDI (GM2) standard. This specification gives you a sound set of 128 virtual instruments, plus percussion kits. GeneralUser GS (29.8 MB uncompressed) Courtesy of S. Christian Collins Magic Sound Font, version 2.0 (67.8 MB uncompressed) (148MB uncompressed) Arachno SoundFont, version 1.0 Maxime Abbey Courtesy of MuseScore 1 came with TimGM6mb (5.7 MB uncompressed) License: GNU GPL, version 2 Courtesy of Tim Brechbill MuseScore 2 (up to version 2.1) comes with FluidR3Mono_GM.sf3 (13.8 MB). MuseScore 2 (as of version 2.2) and 3 come with MuseScore_General.sf3 SF2 version (208 MB)). (35.9 MB) ( MIT license License: released under the S. Christian Collins Courtesy of (369 MB uncompressed) Timbres of Heaven, version 3.2 Courtesy of Don Allen Orchestral soundfiles Sonatina Symphonic Orchestra (503 MB uncompressed) Downloads: SoundFont | SFZ format License: Creative Commons Sampling Plus 1.0 Aegean Symphonic Orchestra Courtesy of (352 MB uncompressed) Ziya Mete Demircan Piano soundfiles SF2 Pianos Acoustic grand piano, release 2016-08-04 Description: Yamaha Disklavier Pro Grand Piano, sf2 format, 36MiB compressed, 113MiB uncompressed, 121 samples, 5 velocity layers More information: http://freepats.zenvoid.org/ including other soundfonts. License: Creative Commons Attribution 3.0 Courtesy of Roberto Gordo Saez Salamander C5 Light Courtesy of Ziya Mete Demircan (24.5 MB uncompressed) 127

128 SFZ Pianos Salamander Grand Piano version 2 | Downloads: version 3 Description: Yamaha C5, 48kHz, 24bit, 16 velocity layers, between 80 MB and 1.9 GB uncompressed License: Creative Commons Attribution 3.0 Courtesy of Alexander Holm (244 MB uncompressed) Detuned Piano License: Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 3.0 Plucked Piano Strings Description: 44.1kHz, 16bit, stereo, 168 MB uncompressed License: Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 3.0 The City Piano Description: Baldwin Baby Grand, 4 velocity layers, 696 MB uncompressed License: Public domain Courtesy of Big Cat Instruments Kawai Upright Piano, release 2017-01-28 Description: 68 samples, 44KHz, 24bit, stereo, 2 velocity layers, 58MiB uncompressed special exception License: GNU General Public License version 3 or later, with a Courtesy of Gonzalo and Roberto Unzipping downloaded soundfiles Since soundfiles are large, they are often zipped (compressed) into a variety of formats, including .zip, .sfArk, and .tar.gz. You need to unzip (decompress) these files before they can be used. ZIP is standard compression format supported by most operating systems. sfArk is a compression format designed especially for compressing SoundFont files. To decompress it, use (cross-platform software); or this online service: https://cloudconvert.com/sfark-to-sf2 Polyphone 7-Zip ; Mac users can use The .tar.gz is a popular compression format for Linux. Windows users can use Unarchiver , or macOS' built-in Archive Utility. Note that if using 7-Zip, you will need to apply decompression twice —once for GZip and once for TAR. Troubleshooting If the toolbar play panel is greyed out, or not visible, follow the instructions below to get your sound working again: . Right-click on the menu bar and make sure there is a check mark next to the Playback Controls menu item. If this step 1 does not solve your problem, go to Step 2. 2 . If the play panel disappears after changing the SoundFont, go to Edit → Preferences... → I/O tab and click OK without making any changes. After restarting MuseScore, the play panel should reappear. If you are setting up a SoundFont for the first time, please use one of the recommended SoundFonts listed above. If playback stutters, then your computer may not not able to handle the SoundFont being used. The following advice may help: Reduce the amount of RAM (memory) used by MuseScore by using a smaller SoundFont. See the list above for suggestions. Increase the amount of RAM available for MuseScore by quitting all applications except MuseScore. If you still have problems and a large SoundFont is important to you, consider more RAM for your computer. See also Synthesizer Mixer External links How to change the SoundFont or add another The SFZ Format (for details about the sfz specification) 128

129 Swing MuseScore's feature allows you to change the playback of your score from a straight to a swing rhythm. Swing can swing be applied globally or only to a section of the score, and is fully variable. Apply swing to a score section Click on the note where you want swing to start; 1 . Double-click in the Text palette; . Swing 2 Edit the Swing text as required; 3 . If you need to vary swing from the default setting, right click the Swing text and select System text properties... Click on . 4 the "Swing Settings" tab and adjust note duration and "Swing ratio" as required. edited and formatted just like any other text object. Swing text can be Triplet in tempo marking Often this notation is used to indicate swing: MuseScore does not have a way to include a triplet in text as a tempo marking, but there is an easy workaround: 1 Add Swing text as described above and make it invisible (shortcut V , or untick "Visible" in the Inspector ); . . 2 Image of the required tempo marking to the score. This can be downloaded from the bottom of Add an appropriate the "How To" page: How to create a visual swing marking . 3 . Resize and reposition the image as required. Return to straight rhythm If you want playback to return to straight time after a swing section: 1 . Add Swing text to the first note or rest of the "straight" section (see above ). 2 . the text to indicate a return to straight time: e.g. "Straight." Edit . System Text Properties... . Click on the "Swing Settings" tab and set "Swing to "Off." 3 Right-click on the text and select Apply swing globally If you wish to apply swing to the whole score, you can do so from the menu: . Select Format 1 → Style... → Score . 2 . In the "Swing Settings" section, set the desired note value and "swing ratio." External links . How to create a visual swing marking Swing (jazz performance style) (Wikipedia) Synthesizer Overview To display the Synthesizer : from the menu, select View → Synthesizer . The Synthesizer controls MuseScore's sound output and allows you to: Load and organize different sound sample libraries to play back the music. Apply effects such as reverb and compression. Adjust overall tuning . Alter the output volume. The Synthesizer window is divided into four sections/tabs: 129

130 Fluid : A software synthesizer that plays SF2/SF3 sample libraries. SoundFont : A software synthesizer that plays SFZ format sample libraries. Zerberus multi-effects to the score. Master Effects : Used to apply tuning : Used to adjust overall playback Tuning . Save/Load Synthesizer settings The buttons at the bottom of the Synthesizer window have the following functions: Button Function all current synthesizer settings as the default settings. These are automatically applied to the Set as Saves Default Synthesizer when you open MuseScore. Loads the last saved default Load Default settings to the Synthesizer. Save to Saves all current score only. current synthesizer settings to the Score Load from Loads the settings from the current score to the synthesizer. Score Notes "Synthesizer settings" include the order of Soundfonts and SFX files, effects set-up, master tuning and volume. : (1) (2) Only one set of Synthesizer settings can be in effect at a time—i.e. if multiple scores are open at once, it is not possible to make changes to the Synthesizer in one score and leave other scores' settings untouched. (3) Changes to synthesizer settings will not be heard in exported audio files unless saved to the score first (see table, above). See also Tuning (below). Fluid Click on the Fluid tab to access the control panel for SF2/SF3 SoundFont sample libraries. By default, the SoundFont FluidR3Mono_GM.sf3 should already be loaded. You can load, rearrange and delete soundfonts as required. Playback can be shared between any combination of different soundfonts (and/or SFZ files). The order of soundfonts in is reflected in the default order of instruments in the mixer . Fluid To load a soundfont . Click on the 1 button Add 2 . Click on a soundfont in the list. To be able to load the soundfont, it first needs to be installed in your Soundfonts folder . This will ensure that it appears in the list in step 2 (above). To reorder the soundfonts . Click on a soundfont 1 2 . Use the up/down arrows (on the right-hand side) to adjust the order. 3 . Repeat with other soundfonts in the list if required. The order of virtual instrument sets in the Synthesizer is reflected in the order of instruments listed in the Mixer . So, if playback of a score depends on a mix of instrument sets, it is advisable to save the Synthesizer configuration to the score in question by pressing the Save to Score button. When you next wish to play back the score, press the Load from Score to load the same configuration. However, remember this only sets the order of instruments—not the instruments themselves, 130

131 which should be in place on your computer. To remove a soundfont . Click on the name of the soundfont 1 Click on the Delete button. 2 . uninstall it from the Soundfonts folder: it will still be This removes the soundfont from the synthesizer but does not available if you wish to reload it later. Zerberus Zerberus tab to access the control panel for SFZ sound sample libraries. You can add Click on the delete or reorder files , in a similar way to the tab. Note that, as with Fluid, the the SFZ files must first be installed in your soundfonts Fluid folder before they can be loaded into the synthesizer. Volume The slider on the right of the Synthesizer controls the playback volume: any changes made here last only to the end of the sesssion, unless saved to the score or set as the new default. Effects The Master Effects tab of the Synthesizer allows you to add reverb and compression to your score. To turn an effect on or off: Select an option from the drop-down list next to or Effect B (the effects are applied in series, A → B). Effect A Synthesizer To store and load effects configurations, use the buttons at the bottom of the Synthesizer window. See (above) for details. settings Zita 1 reverb The Zita 1 stereo reverb module allows you to simulate the ambience of anything from a small room to a large hall. The pre-delay, reverb time and tone of the reverb can be finely tuned using the controls provided: Delay : Set a pre-delay for the reverb from 20-100 ms. Low RT60 (Low frequency reverb time): Use the grey control to adjust the center frequency (50–1000 Hz) of the low frequency band which you want to affect: the green control adjusts the reverb time (1–8 secs) of this frequency band. (Mid-range reverb time): Adjust the reverb time (1–8 secs) of the mid-range frequency band. Mid RT60 HF Damping : Adjusts the high frequency component of the reverb. Increasing this value increases the frequency of the cut-off point and makes the reverb appear brighter and longer. EQ1 : Allows you to cut or boost (-15 to +15) a frequency band (center = 40 Hz - 2 KHz) in the lower part of the spectrum. EQ2 : Allows you to cut or boost (-15 to +15) a frequency band (center = 160 Hz - 10 KHz) in the higher part of the spectrum. Output : Controls the amount of effect applied. "Dry" is no effect. "Wet" indicates 100% reverb. "Mix" is a 50/50 balance of wet/dry signal. 131

132 Note : EQ1 and EQ2 affect the tone of the reverb only, the dry (unprocessed) signal. not To quickly set up an effects patch, set "Output" to "Mix" and adjust the "Mid RT60" control to the desired reverb time. Then fine tune the effect as explained above. SC4 compressor stereo compressor gives you fine control over the playback's dynamic range, reducing the volume variation The SC4 between loud and soft sounds. It offers the following controls: RMS : Adjusts the balance between RMS (0) and Peak (1) compression. In the former, the compressor responds to averaged-out levels in the signal; in Peak mode, the compressor responds to peak levels. Attack : (1.5–400 ms) The length of time it takes for compression to engage fully after the signal exceeds the threshold level. : (2–800 ms) The time it takes for compression to return to zero after the signal falls below the threshold Release level. Threshold above which compression starts to take effect. Lowering the threshold increases : (in dB) The signal level the amount of signal that is compressed. Ratio : The amount of compression applied to the signal above the threshold. The higher the ratio, the greater the compression. Varies between 1:1 to 20:1. : Allows you to select a range between "soft knee" and "hard knee". The softer the knee, the more gradual the Knee transition between uncompressed and compressed signal. : Compression tends to lower the volume, so use this control to boost the signal as required. Gain To quickly set-up, try setting RMS = 1, Threshold = -20 db, Ratio = 6. Increase Gain to restore the lost volume. Then fine- tune as explained above. Tuning The Tuning tab is where you can adjust the program's master tuning . For Concert Pitch instruments, A4 = 440 Hz by default. To change the Master tuning: Master tuning Change Tuning . Enter a new value in the field, then press : (1) This tuning applies to all scores in the Notes session only. To make this the program default or to store it to a current particular score, see Save/Load Synthesizer settings . (2) To apply the new tuning to exported audio files (WAV, MP3, OGG), press Save to Score before exporting. See also SoundFont Mixer Tempo Tempo markings can be found in the Tempo palette of the Basic and Advanced workspaces . They are supplied as metronome marks, but can be subsequently edited to display any tempo or expression you want. Playback tempo can be varied throughout the score by using multiple tempo markings, visible or invisible. 132

133 Add a tempo marking Use any of the following methods: keyboard shortcut + Shift + T . Select a note or rest and press the Alt chose → menu bar Text... → Tempo Marking . Add Select a note or rest, and from the palette ; Tempo Select a note or rest and double-click an appropriate metronome mark in the Drag-and-drop a metronome mark from the palette directly onto a note or rest. Tempo Note : If a tempo marking is applied from the menu or using a keyboard shortcut, the beat note automatically follows the you time signature. The advantage of applying from a palette is that can chose which beat note to use. Edit tempo To change the tempo of an existing metronome mark in the score: . Enter Edit mode 1 for the tempo mark in question; 2 . Edit the metronome number and/or the beat note as required; 3 . Exit Edit mode. You can also override the tempo of an existing metronome mark from the Inspector : 1 . Select the tempo mark; . Tempo text section of the Inspector ; 2 Untick "Follow text" in the 3 . Set the desired playback tempo in the "Tempo" field underneath. Note play panel is at a percentage other than 100%. : Playback may be faster or slower if the tempo setting in the Edit tempo text Tempo marks can be edited and formatted just like any other text object. To set text properties or text style, see Text styles and properties . The tempo indicated by a metronome mark usually persists even if overwritten by an expression—such as Andante, add further text to a plain metronome mark. e.g. Moderato etc. You can also Overriding the tempo marking You can temporarily override the indicated tempo , and play the score back at any tempo you like using the play panel : 1 . Display the play panel: View → Play Panel or F11 (Mac: fn + F11 ): 133

134 2 . Move the tempo slider up or down as required. The tempo is shown both as an absolute value and as a percentage of the currently indicated tempo mark. Double-click the tempo slider to reset it. Note: BPM is always measured and displayed in quarter note beats per minute, regardless of the (denominator of the) time signature in effect. Ritardando and accelerando playback accel. rit. ") and You can simulate (" ritardando ") playback by adding hidden tempo markings to the score. (" accelerando staff/system text in addition. The printed indication to the musician should be added as In the example illustrated below, the tempo was originally 110 BPM (beats per minute). At the ritardando, the tempo Visible decreases by 10 BPM on the first note of each measure. Each tempo change is made invisible by unchecking the Inspector checkbox in the , so that only the ritardando shows on the printed score: A plugin has been developed to automate this process: TempoChanges Fermatas Articulations and Ornaments palette, have a Time stretch property that can be set via the Fermatas, available in the Inspector . By default, this property is set to 1.00. To have MuseScore play back a fermata for twice its normal duration, click on the fermata and set "Time stretch" to 2.00. This of course does not work for fermatas applied to barlines , as barlines don't have a duration to stretch. See also Play mode Time signature Dynamics Dynamics are symbols indicating the loudness of a note or phrase of music. They can be found in the Dynamics palette workspace . in either the Basic or Advanced Master Palette ( Shift + F9 ). Additional dynamics are available in the Note : if you wish to adjust the overall playback volume of the score, use the volume slider in the Play Panel , or Synthesizer . Add a dynamic To apply a dynamic to the score , use one of the following methods: Select a note and double-click a dynamic symbol in a palette. Drag a dynamic symbol from a palette onto a note. To create a crescendo or decrescendo , see Hairpin . Adjust properties 134

135 The default loudness of the score is mf (mezzoforte)—set at MIDI velocity 80 (out of 127). Depending on the dynamic governing a particular section of the score, velocity (and hence loudness) may be less than or greater than this. To edit the velocity (i.e. make playback louder or softer): section of the edit the Velocity value—higher for louder, lower for Select the dynamic and, in the Inspector Dynamic softer. To adjust the range (i.e. the staves in the system affected by the dynamic): Select the dynamic, and in the Inspector , chose an option from "Dynamic range". The Dynamic section of the default is "Part," which means that all staves for a particular instrument will be affected. "Staff" limits the effect to the staff attached to the dynamic. "System" means that all staves in the system will be affected by the dynamic. Customise a dynamic edited Any dynamic can be after being added to the score, just like standard text. You can also edit the velocity and dynamic range etc. (see above). If desired, you can save the result for future use in a . custom palette External links Video tutorial: Lesson 10 - Articulations, Dynamics and Text at Wikipedia Dynamics Capo playback MuseScore allows you to transpose the playback of a staff, without affecting the music notation. This simulates the effect capo (Wikipedia) on the instrument. of a To add a capo: 1 . Add staff text to the note/rest from which you want capo playback to start; 2 . Right-click on the staff text, select Staff Text Properties... , then click on the Capo Settings tab; 3 . Capo fret to the fret number you wish to apply the capo at (each fret Check the "Capo Settings" checkbox, and set increases the pitch by a semitone); 4 Click Ok to apply your changes; . . Edit the wording of the text as desired. 5 Capo playback will apply from the note that the staff text is attached to, until either the next staff text with "Capo Settings" enabled, or until the end of the score. A Capo fret setting of "No capo" will remove any capo previously set for a staff, returning it to its original tuning. Text There are many different kinds of text objects in MuseScore (see tables below); text may also be found incorporated into lines . This chapter shows you how to create, format and edit text objects, and also includes information about the following types of text: Text type Uses General purpose text attached to a single staff: appearing only in that instrument Staff text part. System text General purpose text attached to a single staff: appearing in all instrument parts. Chord symbols Display the chords associated with a melody: usually above the staff. Fingering Numbers or letters attached to notes showing which fingers to use. Lyrics Create lyrics attached to a melody. Rehearsal marks Facilitate rehearsals, divide score into sections, bookmark passages etc. For other types of text available in MuseScore, follow the links below: Text type Uses Dynamics Indicate the loudness of a note or phrase. Figured bass Period notation for keyboardists. 135

136 Title/composer/lyricist details at the start of a score; songsheet lyrics Uses Text type Frame text etc. Headers/Footers Page numbers, copyright info etc. at the top/bottom of a page. Instrument text Apply mid-staff instrument changes. Da Capo, Dal segno, Fine etc. Repeats and jumps Swing text Change from straight to swing time, and vice versa. Tempo marks Apply metronome and/or expression marks. Text-lines Voltas, ottavas, pedal lines, guitar barre lines etc. Text basics Add text To add a text-based element to the score, use one of the following general methods: : For example, press Ctrl + T to enter Staff text , Ctrl Keyboard shortcut L to enter Lyrics , and so on. + Menu command Add → Text allows you to chose from a range of text-based elements. : : Select a note and double-click an icon in one of the palettes; or, alternatively, drag a symbol from a Workspace Swing text , Tempo text etc. palette onto the staff. e.g. : (1) The exact method depends on the type of text you are adding (see Text ). (2) For general-purpose text boxes Notes attached to staves, see Staff and system text . Text formatting When a is created in MuseScore, it assumes the corresponding Text Style : all staff text , for example, has a text object unique Text Style, as have tempo markings, dynamics, chord symbols etc. Each Text Style consists of a number of text properties (font-face, font-size, font-style etc.), which can be viewed, mainly, in the dialog Text Styles Format → Style... ( Text Styles ). → A newly-created text object starts off with identical text properties to the Text Style. These can be viewed in the Inspector: However, these text properties are not limited to those of the default Text Style: if need be, you can edit them in the Inspector of Text Style. independently Finally, if you want to apply formatting to specific characters in a text object (font-face, font-size, Bold, Italic, Underline, superscript, subscript), you can do so in text edit mode . Adjust position of text objects To position a text object, use any of the following methods: Drag the object. Select the object and adjust the X or Y offset values in the Inspector . Select the object and apply any of the following keyboard shortcuts: : Move text left 0.1 staff space . ← → : Move text right 0.1 staff space. ↑ : Move text up 0.1 staff space. ↓ : Move text down 0.1 staff space. 136

137 Ctrl + (Mac: ⌘ + ← ): Move text left one staff space. ← + → ⌘ + → ): Move text right one staff space. Ctrl (Mac: ↑ ⌘ + ↑ ): Move text up one staff space. + (Mac: Ctrl ↓ (Mac: ⌘ Ctrl ↓ ): Moves text down one staff space. + + Text anchors When you apply a text element to the score, its anchor position will depend on the type: Title, Subtitle, Composer, Poet : Anchored to a frame. : Anchored to note heads. Fingering : Anchored to a time position (a note/chord, but not a rest). Lyrics : Anchored to a time position. Chord symbol : Anchored to a time position. Staff text System text : Anchored to a time position. Text editing Enter/exit text edit mode To enter Text edit mode use one of the following methods: Double click on a text element. Right-click on a text element and select Edit element . Ctrl + Click on a text element and press (Mac: Cmd + E ). E In this mode you can apply formatting to individual characters, including options such as bold , italic , underline, subscript, superscript, font family and font size. These are accessed from the Text toolbar below the document window: To exit Text edit mode use one of the following: Press Esc . Click on a part of the score outside the edit window. Keyboard shortcuts , the following keyboard shortcuts are available: In Text edit mode B (Mac: + + B ) toggles bold face . Ctrl ⌘ + Ctrl (Mac: ⌘ + I ) toggles italic . I Ctrl + U (Mac: ⌘ + U ) toggles underline. Home End ← → ↑ ↓ moves cursor. Backspace (Mac: ) removes character to the left of the cursor. Delete (Mac: → Del or fn + Delete ) removes character to the right of the cursor. Delete ↵ starts new line. F2 fn + F2 ) Inserts special characters (see below). (Mac: Symbols and special characters You can use the Special Characters window to insert quarter notes, fractions, and many other kinds of special symbols or characters into your text. A few symbols can also be accessed by shortcut (see below). 137

138 To open Special Characters , use any of the following methods: icon in the text toolbar (below the score window). Click on the (Mac: fn + F2 ). Press F2 Text edit mode ; (2) The Special Characters dialog should not be confused with the menu item Note : (1) This only works in of the same name in the macOS version of MuseScore. The dialog is divided into 3 tabs: Common symbols, musical symbols and unicode symbols. The musical and unicode tabs are further subdivided into alphabetically-arranged categories. Double-clicking an item in the Special Characters dialog immediately adds it to the text where the cursor is positioned. Multiple items can be applied without closing the dialog box, and the user can even continue to type normally, delete characters, enter numerical character codes etc., with it open. Special character shortcuts Text edit mode the following keyboard shortcuts can be used to access certain special characters: In Ctrl + + B : Flat. Shift + + F : Forte. Ctrl Shift + Shift + Ctrl : Natural. H Ctrl + Shift + M : Mezzo. Ctrl + Shift + N : Niente. Ctrl + + P : Piano (dynamic mark). Shift + + R : Rinforzando. Ctrl Shift + Shift + Ctrl : Sforzando. S Ctrl + Shift + Z : Z. Ctrl + Shift + # : Sharp. See also Chord symbol Lyrics Frame Edit mode Text styles and properties Text styles A Text Style applies to all text objects in the score of a particular type. Staff text objects, for example, have a unique style, as do all tempo markings, all lyrics, all chord symbols and so on. You can view and edit all text styles by selecting Format → Style... → Text Styles . This gives you access to the following text 138

139 properties for each style: : Change the name of a user style if desired. Name Font size / Font style : The name of the font (e.g Times New Roman / Arial etc.), its size in points, and Font face , any optional Italic, Bold or Underline formatting. Align : Horizontal (left, right, center) and Vertical. Offset X / Y : Horizontal and vertical offsets in sp. units. Size changes with staff space setting score scaling . : Whether text size changes in proportion to Frame : Chose to have a circular or square frame around the text. Foreground color : of the frame border. Background color : of the background within the frame. Border : Thickness of the line of the frame in space units. Text margin : Inner frame margin in space units. : For box frame, radius of rounded corner. Border radius Notes : (1) Opacity is set by the parameter "Alpha channel" in the "Select Color" dialog: a value between 0, transparent, and 255, opaque. (2) Other text properties, such as font color, can be set in the . Inspector You can also edit the text properties of a Text Style by selecting an object of the desired style in the score, adjusting its properties in the Inspector , and clicking the Set as style buttons as you go. This will automatically update the Text Style and all relevant text objects in the score. Text objects If you want to format a particular text object in the score differently to its Text Style , select it and adjust its text properties in the Inspector : If you have made changes to a particular text property in the Inspector, but want to revert that property to the Text Style 139

140 definition, press the "Reset to style default" button. Save and load text styles and loaded into other MuseScore style file Text Styles (together with all other styles in a document) can be saved as a Save and load style . files. See See also Text editing Header/Footer Behavior of applied text and lines Staff and system text Staff Text or System Text is invaluable as general purpose text. To apply to the score, use one of the following methods: Staff text , press Ctrl + T ; or for System text , press Shift + Ctrl + T . Select a note or rest; then for Add Select a note or rest; then select the desired option from . → Text Select a note or rest, then double click the desired text from a palette. Drag the desired text from a palette onto a note or rest. This will create an empty bounding box for . Press Esc or click on an empty space outside the box to exit. text entry Apart from their indicative use, staff and system text also have optional playback properties: see below. : Summary of differences Appears in Instrument Playback (if Applies to? Text style applicable) parts? Staff only Staff only Staff instrument only Staff text All system System Text All instruments All system staves staves Staff text is applied to one (or Grand staff) in the score, and is indicative only for that staff; any playback effect Staff Text staff associated with the text is limited in the same way. The text will appear in the corresponding instrument part . If you choose to hide empty staves , any staff text belonging to an empty staff will also be hidden. Solo Staff text can, for example, be used to apply indications such as Pizzicato to one staff in a score. Depending on or what the instructions of the staff text are, MIDI playback of that staff at the text location can be altered to match the instructions by right-clicking on the staff text and selecting Staff Text Properties... . See Mid-staff sound change . Staff text properties To access Change channel , Swing Settings , and Capo Settings : Right-click on the text and chose "Staff Text properties," then click on the relevant tab. System text System text is applied to one staff in the score, but is indicative for every staff in the system. Any associated playback properties are applied to the whole system. The text will appear in all instrument parts . System text is never hidden by the hide empty staves feature. System text properties To add or edit Swing : Right-click on the text and chose System Text properties , then click on the Swing Settings tab. 140

141 See also Mid-staff sound change External links How to change instrument sound (e.g. pizz., con sordino) midway through score Chord symbols are an abbreviated way of representing musical chords (see (Wikipedia) for Chord symbols Chord names and symbols further details). For example: Enter a chord symbol 1 . Select a note or a slash; Press Ctrl 2 K (Mac: ⌘ + K ). . + The cursor is now positioned above the score ready for input. Enter the chord symbol just like normal text, as follows: Root note : A, B, C, D, E, F, G. : Sharp (hash symbol). # Flat b (small letter "b"). : : (small letter "x") or # # (two hash symbols). Double sharp x : b Double flat (small letter "b" twice). b Natural : natural (no space before "natural"). For other symbols, see Chord symbol syntax (below). When you exit the chord symbol, the characters you have typed will automatically assume the correct format: by default a root note typed in lower case will turn into upper case (for alternative options, see Automatic Capitalization ); a " # " or " b " will turn into a proper sharp ( ♯ ♭ ) and so on. Do not try to use actual flat and sharp signs as MuseScore will not ) or flat ( understand those properly. After you have finished entering a chord symbol you can either: commands below). Move the cursor forward or backwards to continue entering or editing chord symbols (see Exit chord symbol mode by pressing Esc . : To fill measures with slashes, see Fill with slashes or Note . Toggle rhythmic slash notation Keyboard Commands The following commands are available during chord symbol entry: Space move Cursor to next note, rest, or beat Shift + Space move cursor to previous note, rest, or beat Ctrl + Space (Mac: ⌘ + Space ) add a space to the chord name ; move cursor to next beat : move cursor to previous beat Tab move cursor to next measure Shift + Tab move cursor to previous measure Ctrl plus number ( 1 - 9 ) move Cursor by duration corresponding to number (e.g.; half note for 6) Esc exit. Chord symbol syntax MuseScore understands most of the abbreviations used in chord symbols: Major : M, Ma, Maj, ma, maj, Δ (type t or ˆ for the triangle) Minor : m, mi, min, - 141

142 Diminished : dim, ° (entered with lowercase letter , shows as ° if using the the Jazz style , as o otherwise) o : ø (type 0 Half-diminished , zero). Alternatively, you can, of course, chose abbreviations such as mi7b5 etc. : aug, + Augmented The following abbreviations are also valid: and alterations like b9 or #5, sus, alt, and no3; inversions and extensions commas slash chords parentheses , which can enclose part, or even all, of a chord symbol. , such as C7/E; ; Edit a chord symbol An existing chord symbol can be edited in a similar way to ordinary text: See Text editing . Transpose chord symbols Transpose command to the containing Chord symbols are automatically transposed by default if you apply the menu measures. If this is not required, you can untick the "Transpose chord symbols" option in the same dialog. Chord symbol text all chord symbol text, use any of the following options: To adjust the appearance of Format → Style → From the main menu, chose Text Styles → Chord Symbol . Then edit the text properties as required. Select a chord symbol and make changes in the Inspector , pressing the "Set as style" buttons as you go. Chord symbol style To access formatting options for chord symbols : From the menu, select Format → Style... → Chord Symbols . Adjustable properties are listed under the following headings: Appearance Three options are possible: and Jazz and Custom . You can select between these using the radio buttons. Standard Standard chord symbol text style. In the style, chords are rendered simply, with the font determined by your Jazz style, the MuseJazz font is used for a handwritten look, with distinctive superscript and other formatting In the characteristics. The Jazz style is selected by default if you use any of the Jazz templates. The style option allows you to customise the look of chord symbols (and also ensures compatibility with Custom older scores). Select a customised Chord symbols style file in the field below: this can be created by copying and modifying one of the pre-existing files in the "styles" folder. Documentation can be found in the same folder. Note, however, that this is for advanced users only, and there is no guarantee these files will be supported in the future. Note spelling By default, MuseScore uses letter names for chord symbols. For users in regions where other note naming schemes are used, MuseScore provides the following controls: Standard ♭ , B, C, C ♯ ,... : A, B : A, B ♭ , H, C, C ♯ ,... German Full German : A, B, H, C, Cis,... Solfeggio ♯ , Re ♭ , Re,... : Do, Do French : Do, Do ♯ , Ré ♭ , Ré,... 142

143 Automatic Capitalization By default, MuseScore automatically capitalizes all note names on exit, regardless of whether you entered them in upper However, you can also choose other automatic capitalization options: or lower case. Lower case minor chords : c, cm, cm7,... : C/e,... Lower case bass notes All caps note names : DO, RE, MI,... You can also turn off the automatic capitalization completely, in which case note names are simply rendered the way you type them. Positioning Distance to fretboard diagram : If a fretboard diagram is present, this value is the height at which the chord symbol above the diagram (negative values can be used). is applied : The space to leave between chord symbols. Minimum chord spacing : Changes the size of the gap between the last chord symbol in the measure and the Maximum barline distance following barline. You only need to adjust this value if there is a continuous problem in the score with overlap between the last symbol in one measure and the first symbol in the next. Note : In addition to the settings described here, the default position of applied chord symbols is also determined by settings in the dialog. The effect is cumulative. Text Styles Capo Enter the number of the capo position at which you want to display substitute chords, in brackets, after all chord symbols in the score. Fingering Fingering symbols for various instruments are found in the Fingering palette in the Advanced workspace. music employs the numbers 1–5 to represent fingers of the left or right hand. There is also a fingering Keyboard positioner plugin to help you optimize the layout of piano or keyboard fingerings. Guitar music uses the numbers 0–4 to represent left-hand fingering (T is occasionally used for the thumb). Right- hand fingering is indicated by the letters p, i, m, a, c. Circled numbers represent instrument strings. The last five symbols in the palette are used for lute fingering in historical music. Note Staff Properties... → Advanced style properties , and : To enable display of fingering in tablature, right-click on the TAB, select tick "Show Fingerings". Add fingering to a single note Use any of the following methods: Select a note and double click one of the fingering symbols in a Palette. Drag and drop a fingering symbol from a palette onto a note When fingering is added to a note, the focus immediately shifts to the symbol, so you can adjust it right away. Add fingering to several notes 143

144 1 . the desired notes; Select . Double-click a fingering symbol in a palette. 2 Adjust position of fingering Single fingering To change the position of one symbol, use any of the following methods: Arrow . + Ctrl For fine adjustments (0.1 sp) use the arrow keys; For larger adjustments (1 sp) use Inspector . Change X and Y offsets in the Drag the symbol using your mouse. Multiple fingering To change the position of multiple symbols: Select . the desired fingering symbols; 1 Adjust using the X and Y offsets in the Inspector . 2 . Note : You can also use the fingering positioner plugin mentioned above to optimize the layout of piano fingerings. Ctrl + R . To restore a symbol to its default position, select it and press Edit fingering text Fingering is a form of text symbol and can be and styled like any other. Right-clicking on the symbol gives you a edited range of options. Lyrics Enter a lyrics line First line . Enter the notes of the melody line; 1 . Select the note where you want to start entering lyrics; 2 . To enter lyrics mode , type Ctrl 3 L (Mac: ⌘ + L ); or from the main menu, select Add → Text → Lyrics ; + 4 . Type a syllable; 5 . Use the following options to continue entering lyrics: Go to the next syllable : Press (or Ctrl + → ) at the end of a syllable. Space (to connect syllables): Press at the end of a syllable. Hyphen - : Press Shift + Space (or Ctrl + ← ). Go to the previous syllable : Press ← (left arrow). If the cursor is at the beginning of a syllable, it will jump to the previous one. Move left : Press (right arrow). If the cursor is at the end of a syllable, it will jump to the next one. Move right → : Press ↓ Move to the syllable below (down arrow). Move to the syllable above : Press ↑ (up arrow). Start new lyrics line : Press ↵ (Return) at the end of an existing lyrics syllable ( Note : Don't use the Enter key from the numeric keypad!). 6 To exit lyrics mode , press Esc . . Subsequent lines If you want to add another lyrics line to an existing one (e.g. a 2nd or 3rd verse etc.): 1 . Chose one of the following options: Select the note where you want to start the new lyrics line. Enter lyrics mode as shown in step 3 ( above ). The cursor moves to a new (blank) line. text edit mode on an existing syllable, go to the end of the syllable and press ↵ (Return). The cursor Enter moves to the next line. 2 . Continue entering lyrics from step 4 ( above ). Example : 144

145 Special characters In most cases, lyrics can be just like normal text. However, special keyboard shortcuts are required to enter the edited following characters: ⌥ + Space (Mac: Ctrl + Space ). Character space : (hyphen): Ctrl + - (Mac: ⌥ + - ) or AltGr - - . + Line feed Ctrl + ↵ (Mac: ⌥ + Return : Enter (from the numeric keypad). ) or Verse numbers To number verses, simply type the number (e.g. 1.) and a space before the first syllable. MuseScore will automatically align the numbers and first syllable correctly. Melisma A melisma is a syllable or word that extends over two or more notes. It is indicated by an underline extending from the base of a syllable to the last note of the melisma. The underline is created by positioning the cursor at the end of a syllable and pressing + _ : once for each note in the melisma. See the image below: Shift The above lyric was created in the following manner: . 1 s o u l , . Type the letters, 2 . At the end of the word, press Shift + _ _ _ . 3 Type the letters T o , then press Esc . . For non-last syllables to extend, just use additional dashes - , usually only one of them will show (more when the distance between the syllables is large enough), and the syllable will right-align to the first note, similar to last syllables that got notated with a melisma, see above. Elision (Lyric) slur / Synalepha Two syllables under a note can be joined with an elision slur , also known as a "lyric slur" or "synalepha". For example: 145

146 To create the example lyric text, starting with the syllable text "te": 1 Type t e ; . . Click on the keyboard icon F2 to open the Special Characters palette; 2 , or press . 3 Use one of the following options: Double-click one of the three elision slurs in the "Common Symbols" tab: "Narrow elision", "Elision", or "Wide elision" (these can be found between the "C Clef" and the " p " dynamic—see image below): Double-click the elision slur found after the 7/8 fraction in the "Common Symbols" tab (next to last character in Ctrl + Space (Mac: the image above). Depending on the font, add one or more spaces before/after the slur using + Space ). ⌥ : Not all fonts include the "undertie" character (U+203F "undertie", present in "Special Characters" mainly for Note ‿ compatibility with MuseScore 1.x scores). To find out which fonts on your computer support it, see " fontlist " (look for any font that shows a tie between "te" and "A" instead of a blank rectangle). . 4 A . Type Edit Lyrics 1 . Enter text edit mode on an existing syllable; 2 . Use standard text editing commands to make changes; 3 . above ); or exit lyrics mode by pressing Esc . Continue entering lyrics (see Adjust properties of lyrics To make global adjustments to the of all lyrics in the score: properties . From the menu, select Format → 1 → Lyrics ; Style... 2 . Edit Placement, Line height, Margins, Dash and Melisma properties as required. Adjust position of individual lyrics lines To adjust the position of a particular lyrics line: . Select the lyrics line: i.e. right click on a word in the line, and (from the menu) chose 1 → More... ; then check the Select relevant options, which should include "Same system"; 2 . Adjust the X and Y offsets in the Inspector. Copy lyrics to clipboard To copy all lyrics to the clipboard: From the menu bar, select Tools → Copy Lyrics to Clipboard . 146

147 Paste lyrics from clipboard To copy and paste lyrics from a text file (say) into a score: . Enter the notes in the score to which the lyrics will be attached. 1 Set up your lyrics in a text file, with appropriate spaces, hyphens, line-breaks etc. 2 . . Copy the lyrics from the text-file into the clipboard. 3 Select the start note in MuseScore, and press Ctrl + 4 (Mac: Cmd + L ) (step 3 under Enter lyrics in a score ). . L . Repeatedly applying paste 5 will enter successive words of the lyrics. You may need to enter melismas and make other corrections as you go along. See also Text Chord symbol External links How to insert Lyrics How to move lyrics How to copy lyrics, or lyrics with rhythm How to add a block of text to a score Video tutorial: MuseScore in Minutes: Lesson 6 - Text, Lyrics and Chords Rehearsal marks can be used in a number of ways: Rehearsal marks To identify specific points in a score to facilitate rehearsing. As bookmarks in the score to which you can instantly navigate—using the Find/Search command. To mark the various sections in the score. Typically, rehearsal marks consist of one or more letters and/or numbers, and appear in sequence in the score—e.g. A, B, C..., or 1, 2, 3... etc. Alternatively, they may display measure numbers (usually larger than standard measure numbers, boldface and/or enclosed in boxes). Multi-measure rests are automatically broken before and after rehearsal marks. Rehearsal marks can be added to the score (i) automatically —which ensures that they are named in sequence—or (ii) , allowing you to name them as you wish. manually Add a rehearsal mark Manual Placement To create a rehearsal mark manually: 1 . Click on a note (or rest) at the desired location; . Select one of the following options: 2 Ctrl + M (Mac: Cmd + M ); Press From the menu, chose Add → Text → Rehearsal Mark ; 3 Enter the desired text. . Automatic placement Add an alphanumeric rehearsal mark Use either of the following options: Click on a note (or rest) at the desired location, then double-click the [B1] rehearsal mark icon in the "Text" palette . Drag and drop the rehearsal mark from the "Text" palette onto the score. Notes : (1) By default, marks are added in the sequence, A, B, C etc. (2) To change the format of subsequently-added marks (to lower case letters, or numbers), edit the previous rehearsal mark accordingly. (3) Marks added between existing rehearsal marks append a number or letter to the previous mark: it is a good idea to apply the Resequence command 147

148 afterwards (see below). Add a measure-number rehearsal mark . Add the first rehearsal mark in the series as an alphabetical one; then it to read the same as the number of the 1 edit measure it is attached to; . above 2 . They will automatically adopt the measure-number format. Add subsequent marks as shown Automatically resequence rehearsal marks MuseScore allows the user to automatically re-order a series of rehearsal marks if they have got out of sequence for any reason. Use the following method: 1 . Before making a selection, you can, if desired, establish a new format for the rehearsal marks (lower/upper case, number, or measure number) by manually altering the first mark in the range accordingly. 2 Select the range of measures you wish to apply the Resequence command to (if there is no selection then the . program assumes you wish to resequence all measures). . . Tools → 3 From the menu, select Resequence Rehearsal Marks MuseScore automatically detects the sequence based on the first rehearsal mark in the selection—all rehearsal marks in the selection are then altered accordingly. The following sequences are possible: A, B, C etc. a, b, c etc. Numerical: 1, 2, 3 etc. Numerical: according to measure numbers. This requires the number of the first mark in the series to be equal to the number of the measure it is attached to. Text style Rehearsal marks are a variety of , appearing both on the score and on every part . By default, they are in a system text large bold font, and enclosed in frames with rounded corners. All aspects of their appearance can be changed globally via Text style . the rehearsal mark Search for a rehearsal mark See Find (Viewing and navigation). See also Text properties External links Rehearsal Letter (Wikipedia article) Formatting Layout and formatting Format menu. Layout and formatting options for the score are accessed from the Ways to affect layout This section lists the main commands and dialogs affecting score layout. Other formatting options are covered further down the page (but for text, see Text styles and properties ). Page Settings : Adjust the overall dimensions of your score such as page size, page margins, and scaling. Increase/Decrease Layout Stretch : Adjust the score spacing by stretching or squashing selected measures. Score : Set overall score details, such as music font, display of multi-measure rests, and whether to hide empty staves. 148

149 Page : Adjust staff and system spacing, score and lyric margins etc. : Set the measure spacing, which affects the number of measures per line. Measure Style Sizes : Set the default size of "small" and grace notes, small staves and small clefs. Other commands: : Set the number of measures per system. Add/Remove System Breaks : Apply system, page or section breaks. You can also add extra space between particular Breaks and spacers systems or staves where needed. Style The Style submenu contains dialogs which allow you to adjust the global formatting of many score elements. To open : Style From the menu, select Format → Style... Style... . Right click on a space in the document window and select Shortcuts Use a keyboard shortcut (see ). Style The dialogs are as follows: Score Score dialog, select Format → Style... To open the Score . → This dialog allows you to set global properties, such as the music font, display of multimeasure rests, whether or not to hide empty staves, swing playback etc. Musical symbols font : Choice of display in Emmentaler, Bravura or Gonville fonts. Tick the box to "automatically load style settings based on font." Musical text font : Choice of display in Emmentaler, Bravura, Gonville or MuseJazz fonts. Display in concert pitch : Tick this option to display the score at . If unticked the score is displayed at concert pitch written pitch. Create multimeasure rests multimeasure rests . : Tick to display Minimum number of empty measures ; The default is 2. Minimum width of measure : The default width is 4 sp. : This option saves space by hiding those staves in a system which consist of Hide empty staves within systems condensed scores . only empty measures. Used for Don't hide empty staves in first system : Always display staves in first system even if they consist of empty measures. Display note values across measure boundaries : A feature useful for notating early music. See Unbarred notation . Hide instrument name if there is only one instrument : You don't usually need to display the instrument name in this case. Swing settings allows you to control the degree of swing for the whole score. Swing : Choice of OFF (default) / Eight Note / Sixteenth note. Select swing ratio : The default is 60%. If you prefer to set swing on the score page, see Swing . Page → Page dialog, select Format To open the Style... → Page . 149

150 This dialog allows you to adjust the overall layout of your score by changing the spacing of margins, systems, staves, lyrics lines, and frames. You can also control the display of key signatures, time signatures and clefs. The diagram below is a guide to various parameters under the control of this dialog: Music top margin . : The distance between the top staff line of the first staff on the page and the top page margin bottom page : The distance between the bottom staff line of the last staff on the page and the Music bottom margin . margin Staff distance : The space between staves which are not part of a grand staff (see below). : The space between staves that share the same instrument—such as the piano, organ, or Grand staff distance those of a guitar staff/tab pair. Note one particular staff see Extra distance above staff (Staff properties) . : To alter the space above Min. system distance : The minimum distance allowed between one system and the next. Max. system distance : The maximum distance allowed between one system and the next. Vertical frame top margin : The default margin height above a vertical frame. Vertical frame bottom margin : The default margin height below a vertical frame. Last system fill threshold : If the last system is longer than this percentage of the page width, it gets stretched to fill that width. The following check boxes allow you to control the display of clefs, time signatures, and key signatures—including the courtesy kind. Create clef for all systems / Create key signature for all systems / Create courtesy clefs / Create courtesy time signatures / Create courtesy key signatures. Sizes To open the Sizes dialog, select Format → Style... → Sizes . Sets the proportional size of "small" and grace notes, as well as small staves and clefs. Changing this would be unusual. Header, Footer To open the Header, Footer dialog, select Format → Style... → Header, Footer . 150

151 This allows you to add header and footer text using meta tags (see Score information )—such as page numbers, page headers, copyright information etc. For example, You can create different Headers and Footers for even and odd pages, such as putting page numbers on the right for odd-numbered pages and on the left for even-numbered pages. If you hover with your mouse over the Header or Footer text region, a list of macros will appear, showing their meaning, as well as the existing meta tags and their content. To create a header or footer for an individual part, that part needs to be the active tab. To create a header or footer for a score with linked parts, make sure the main score is in the active tab. Measure Numbers dialog, select Format → To open the → Measure Numbers . Measure Numbers Style... This allows you to specify whether measure numbers will appear in the score, and, if so, at what intervals. You can also set the font properties. System dialog, select Format → System → System . To open the Style... This dialog allows you to adjust certain properties of all systems. Brackets: System bracket thickness width of system brackets. : Set the : Set the of system braces. Brace thickness width System bracket distance : Set the distance between system brackets and the start barlines. : Set the distance between system braces and the start barlines. Brace distance Brackets See also . Dividers: Left Right : Specify whether to show system dividers, what types, and apply global positioning offset values. / Instrument names: Long Instrument Names : Specify the font characteristics and alignment. Short Instrument Names : Specify the font characteristics and alignment. Clefs To open the dialog, select Format → Style... → Clefs . Clefs Standard or Serif Chose the style of the default tablature clef: . Accidentals → Accidentals Format → To open the dialog, select Accidentals . Style... Allows you to specify how the score displays key signature accidentals at key changes. See Naturals on key signature changes . Measure To open the dialog, select Format → Style... → Measure . Measure For details, see Measure . Barlines To open the Barlines dialog, select Format → Style... → Barlines . Show repeat barline tips ("winged repeats) : Barline at start of single staff : Whether to show barlines at the beginning of a staff. 151

152 Barline at start of multiple staff : Whether to show barlines at the beginning of multiple staves. : Affects "small" staves only. Scale barlines to staff size Other properties allow you to set the thickness of "thin," "thick" and double barlines, the distance between double barlines, and the repeat barline to dot distance. Notes Notes Style → General... To open the Notes . The dialog can also be opened direct from the score by right- dialog, select → clicking on any note and selecting "Style..." Here you can adjust the distance and thickness of note-related objects (stems, ledger lines, dots, accidentals). Changing these would be unusual. Beams Beams dialog, select Style → General... → To open the . Beams This allows you to set the overall properties of note beams in the score: Beam thickness Beam distance : The vertical distance between beams. Broken beam minimum length : Affects secondary beams where they do not fully extend from note to note. Ticking the Flatten all beams option means that all note beams will be horizontal only—not sloped. Tuplets To open the dialog, select Format → Style... → Tuplets . Tuplets Vertical Distance from Notes: Maximum slope : Limit the slope of tuplet brackets. Vertical distance from stem : Refers to tuplet numbers and brackets. : Refers to tuplet numbers Vertical distance from notehead and brackets. Horizontal distance from notes: Distance before stem of first note : Sets default position of start of tuplet bracket when above/below note stems. Distance before head of first note : Sets default position of start of tuplet bracket when above/below noteheads. : Sets default position of end of tuplet bracket when above/below note stems. Distance after stem of last note : Sets default position of end of tuplet bracket when above/below noteheads. Distance after head of last note Brackets: Bracket thickness : Bracket hook height ; Sets the default length of the vertical hooks at the ends of tuplet brackets Properties: Direction / Number type / Bracket type Arpeggios To open the dialog, select Format → Arpeggios → Arpeggios . Style... Here you can change the distance to note, line thickness, and hook length of the following arpeggio and strum symbols: Slurs/Ties Style... To open the dialog, select Format → Slurs/Ties → Slurs/Ties . Line thickness at end 152

153 Line thickness middle Dotted line thickness Minimum tie length Autoplace min. distance Hairpins dialog, select → Style... → Hairpins . To open the Hairpins Format (crescendo and decresendo lines): Here you can set the default properties of hairpins Placement : Whether to place above or below the staff. Position above/below : Set a numberical value in sp. units. Height : The width of the mouth of the hairpin. Continue height Autoplace distance to dynamics Line thickness Volta Volta dialog, select Format To open the Style... → Volta . → Here you can set the default properties of : voltas : Set X- and Y-offsets. Default position : The length of descending lines at the ends of voltas. Hook height Line thickness Line style : A solid line is the default option, but there are dotted and dashed alternatives. Ottava Ottava dialog, select To open the → Style... → Ottava . Format Here you can set the default properties of ottavas (octave lines): Numbers only : If unticked, the ottava also displays "va" or "vb" after the number. Position above/below : Set the X- and Y-offsets for the ottava. : The length of the ascending/descending line at the end of the ottava. Hook height above/below Line thickness Line style : A solid line is the default option, but there are dotted and dashed alternatives. Pedal Pedal dialog, select Format → Style... → To open the . Pedal Here you can set the default properties of pedal lines : Placement : Below or above the staff. Position above/below : Set the exact default position using offset values. Line thickness : Line style : solid is the default but there is a range of dashed and dotted options. Trill To open the dialog, select Format → Style... Trill Trill . → Here you can set the default placement of Trill lines : Placement : Below or above the staff. Position above/below : Set the exact default position using offset values. Vibrato To open the Vibrato dialog, select Format → Style... → Vibrato . 153

154 Here you can set the default placement of Vibrato lines : : Below or above the staff. Placement Position above/below : Set the exact default position using offset values. Bend . Format → Style... To open the Bend dialog, select Bend → Bends . This includes the line thickness, arrow width and font properties. Here you can set the display properties of Text Line Text Line dialog, select Format → Style... To open the Text Line . → Here you can set the default placement of : text lines : Below or above the staff. Placement : Set the exact default position using offset values. Position above/below Articulations, Ornaments Articulations, Ornaments dialog, select Format To open the Style... → Articulations, Ornaments . → This dialog allows you set the default placement distances and size (as a percentage) of articulations and ornaments . Fermatas To open the Fermatas Format → Style... → Fermatas . dialog, select fermatas This dialog allows you set the default placement of . Staff Text Staff text dialog, select To open the → Style... → Staff Text . Format This dialog allows you set the default placement and autoplacement properties of staff text . Tempo Text Tempo text dialog, select Format → Style... → Staff Text . To open the This dialog allows you set the default placement and autoplacement properties of tempo text . Lyrics → Lyrics dialog, select Format To open the Style... → Lyrics . 154

155 Placement , : Set default position of the nearest lyric line to the staff. Position above/below : Set the default distance between lyric lines. Line height : Set the length of inter-syllable dashes and the space between them. Lyrics dash Lyrics melisma : Set default properties of melismas . Dynamics Dynamics dialog, select Format → Style... → Dynamics . To open the dynamics This dialog allows you set the default placement and autoplacement properties of . Rehearsal Marks Rehearsal Marks dialog, select Format → To open the → Rehearsal Marks . Style... This dialog allows you set the default placement and autoplacement properties of rehearsal marks . Figured Bass To open the Figured Bass dialog, select Format → Style... → Figured Bass . This allows you to set the default font, style, alignment and position of figured bass . Chord Symbols To open the Chord Symbols dialog, select → Style... → Chord Symbols . Format This section allows you to adjust the format and positioning of chord symbols : Appearance: Chose a default chord symbol style—Standard, Jazz or Custom. Note spelling: Chose the spelling convention for chord symbols and whether to use capital or small letters. Positioning: Distance to fretboard diagram : The distance (in sp. units) from a chord symbol to a fretboard diagram when both are applied to the same location on a staff. This value overrides the above "Default vertical position" setting. The user can chose to place a chord symbol below a fretboard diagram by entering a negative value. Minimum chord spacing : The minimum space to allow between chord symbols. Maximum barline distance : Increases the distance between the final chord symbol in a measure and the following 155

156 barline. You wish to adjust this value if there is a recurring problem in the score with overlap between the final may chord symbol in one measure and the following chord symbol. Capo: Capo fret position : Enter the number of the capo position at which you want to display substitute chords, in brackets, for all chord symbols in the score. Fretboard Diagrams . Format → Style... To open the Fretboard Diagrams Fretboard Diagrams dialog, select → Fretboard diagrams . This section allows you to adjust the format and positioning of Default vertical position : the distance in sp. units from a newly applied fretboard diagram to a staff. A negative value may be used. : Increase or decrease the size of the fretboard diagram in the score. Scale Fret offset number font size : Increase or decrease the size of a fret number displayed next to a diagram. / : Display fret number to the left or right of the fretboard diagram. Position Left Right Barré line thickness : Make barre lines in fretboard diagrams thicker or thinner. Text Styles Text Styles dialog, select Format → To open the → Text Styles . Style... This dialog allows you to set the formatting of all text styles. Individual text styles can also be set from the Inspector . OK / Cancel / Apply buttons Any changes made in the Style dialog are immediately applied to the score, but can be rescinded at any time by pressing Cancel —which also exits the dialog. Press to save your changes to the score and close the window. OK part button to apply all changes to Apply to all Parts If you are making formatting adjustments in an instrument all , use the parts in the score. Page Settings... See Page settings . Add / Remove System breaks This tool adds or removes system breaks over all or part of the score: 1 . a range of measures: if no selection is made, the command is applied to the whole score. Select . 2 Format → Add/Remove System Breaks... . The following dialog appears. Chose 3 . Chose one of the following options: Break systems every X (select number) measures; Add system break at end of each system; Remove current system breaks; 4 . Press OK . 156

157 Stretch Used to increase, decrease or reset the horizontal spacing of notes within selected measures. Increase / Decrease layout stretch 1 a range of measures. Or use Ctrl + A to select the whole score. . Select Chose one of two options: . 2 increase stretch : To (right curly bracket) (Mac: Ctrl + Alt + 9 Use the shortcut } ). Format Stretch → Increase Layout Stretch → Or from the menu bar, select . decrease stretch : To { (left curly bracket) (Mac: Ctrl + Alt + 8 Use the shortcut ). Or from the menu bar, select → Stretch → Decrease Layout Stretch . Format Reset stretch To reset stretch to the default spacing of 1: . Select a range of measures. Or use Ctrl + A to select the whole score. 1 . From the menu, select Format → Stretch → 2 . Reset Layout Stretch See also . This allows you to set the stretch more precisely. Measure Properties: Layout stretch Reset Style To reset text styles to the "factory" default settings: all Format From the menu, select Reset Style . → Reset Beams To restore beams to the mode defined in the local time signatures: 1 . Select the section of the score you want to reset. If nothing is selected, the operation will apply to the whole score; 2 . Format → Reset Beams . Select Beams See also . Reset Shapes and Positions The Reset Shapes and Positions command restores the default positions, note stem directions and shapes (slurs, ties etc.) for selected score elements. To apply: . Select the elements or the region of the score that you wish to reset. Or use Ctrl + A to select the whole score. 1 Reset Shapes and positions 2 Ctrl + R ; or, from the menu, select Format → Press . . Load / Save style It is easy to transfer a complete set of styles (all General Style settings, all text styles , and page settings ) from one score to the other using the Load/Save Style feature. To load a customized style: . Format → Load Style... . 1 Go to . 2 Open (or double click on the file). Navigate to and select the Style file (.mss) and click All existing styles in the score should update automatically. To save a customized style: 1 . Go to Format → Save Style... . *.mss 2 Name and save the style file (the default folder is set in your Preferences ). Styles are stored as . files. Note: You can also define a preferred style for scores and parts in the Score section of MuseScore's Preferences. 157

158 See also To edit spacing between notes Upgrading from MuseScore 1.x, local relayout External links Tutorial – How to create large-print stave notation (MSN) MuseScore in 10 Easy Steps: Part 10A Layout and Formatting (a video tutorial) . MuseScore in 10 Easy Steps: Part 10B Layout and Formatting (a video tutorial) Measure dialog, select Format → To open the → Measure . Measure Style... This allows you to adjust the distance between various items within measures. Introduction measure style property, MuseScore automatically adjusts the score to maintain the correct spacing If you change a elements between notes and rests according to best music engraving practice. It will also correctly reposition any attached to notes or rests, such as fingerings, dynamics, lines etc. All settings related to measure width and note spacing are values. Measures are automatically stretched, if minimum necessary, to maintain existing page margins . staff space All the properties listed below use the Page (abbreviated to "sp") as the basic unit of measurement. See settings: Scaling for more details. Options Minimum measure width : Sets the minimum horizontal length of measures. In measures containing very little content (e.g., a single whole note or whole measure rest), the measure will only shrink as far as this minimum. Spacing (1=tight) : Condenses or expands the space after notes or rests. This setting thus affects not only space between notes but also between the last note and the ending barline. For the space between the beginning of the Note left margin measure and the first note or rest, see (below). Note left margin : Sets the distance from the start barline to the first note. Barline to grace note distance : Sets the distance between a barline and a grace note that occurs before the first actual note in a measure (independently of the "Note left margin" setting). : Sets the distance between a barline and an accidental placed before the first note Barline to accidental distance in a measure (independently of the "Note left margin" setting). Note to barline distance : Sets the distance from the last note to the following barline. Minimum note distance : Specifies the smallest amount of space MuseScore will allow after each note (depending on other factors, space may be allowed). more Clef left margin : Sets the distance between the very beginning of each line and the clef. (This option is rarely needed.) Key signature left margin : Sets the distance between the beginning of the measure and a key signature. Time signature left margin : Sets the distance between the beginning of the measure and a time signature (if there is no time signature in between). Time signature to barline distance : To be added Clef/key right margin : Sets the distance between the material at the beginning of each line (such as the clef and key signature) and the first note or rest of the first measure on the line. (Note that, although not named in the option, if a time signature is present, it is the element from which the spacing begins.) 158

159 Clef to barline distance : Sets the distance between a barline and a clef change preceding it. : Sets the distance from the clef to a key signanture following it. Clef to key distance Clef to time signature distance : Sets the distance from the clef to the time signature following it (if there is no key signature in between). : Sets the distance from a key signature to the following time signature. Key to time signature distance : To be added.. Key to barline distance System header distance : To be added ... System header with time signature distance : To be added .. Sets the distance between a multi-measure rest and the barlines on either side. : Multimeasure rest margin : Staff line thickness Sets the thickness of the lines of the staff, which allows you to make the staff thicker and darker, if you need greater visibility on your printouts. : Changes to an individual measure's (using Format → Stretch Note Stretch Increase/Decrease Layout Stretch ) are → calculated after, and proportional to, the global Spacing setting. Page settings Page settings allows you to adjust the overall dimensions of your score such as page size , page margins , and scaling . It is one of the main layout tools in MuseScore—along with the options available from Format Style ... → Page settings dialog: from the menu, select To open the → Page Settings ... Format Page size Here you can select the paper format, either by standard name (e.g., Letter or A4), or by specifying the height and width in either mm or inches (use the radio buttons to choose which unit of measurement to use). The initial default page size depends on your localization—in the United States, Letter size paper is standard. You can also choose to format your music in Landscape or Portrait orientation using the radio buttons. You can optionally use Two sided layout (i.e., book format, with mirror left and right margins for even and odd pages—see below ). Odd/Even Page Margins 159

160 The Even Page Margins Odd Page Margins settings allow you to define the printable area of your pages. Aside and from changing the margins around the music on the page, other settings, such as the positions of headers and footers, are calculated relative to the margins defined here. If the "Two sided" checkbox under "Page Size" is selected, you can set margins differently for mirroring odd and even pages. Otherwise, only one set of margins can be modified, but will apply to all pages. View Show Page Margins . → To display page margins in your score on screen (though not in print), go to Scaling property allows you to increase or decrease the size of your score. The Scaling In MuseScore, the sizes of score elements, such as note heads, note stems, accidentals, clefs etc., are defined in terms staff space (abbreviated to "sp"). One staff space is equal to the space between the of a unit of measurement called a (or one-quarter the size of the full five-line staff assuming a hypothetical staff line midpoints of two lines of a music staff thickness of 0). As you change the "Staff space" setting (under ), all score elements follow suit and thus correct proportions are Scaling Text absolute value, independent of "Scaling." maintained. The exception is in which you can set an Note : Changing the "Scaling" does not always change the number of systems per page, because system distance can Style → vary between limits set under "Min system distance" and "Max system distance" (see → Page ). General... Unit Here you can chose to display the values in Inches or millimeters. First page number Sets the number of the first page of the particular score. Page numbers below 1 won't get printed—e.g., setting the first page number to -1 would result in the first and second page showing no page number, and page number 1 appearing on the third page. Apply to all Parts Apply to all Parts part , rather than the main score (see Part extraction ). If you The button is available when modifying a change the page settings of one part and want the rest of the parts to have the same settings, this button will apply the change to all parts in one go. Breaks and spacers The palette contains the following non-printing symbols: Breaks & Spacers The first three symbols are called breaks ; the blue vertical lines are known as spacers . Breaks A break can be applied to either a measure or a frame . There are three types: System break : Forces the next part of the score to start in a new system. : Forces the next part of the score to start on a new page. Page break Section break : Forces the next part of the score to start in a new system and starts a new (see below). It section can be combined with a page break if required. Notes : (1) Blue break symbols are visible on the screen, but do not appear on printouts. (2) To add (or remove) system breaks over all or part of the score, see Add/Remove System breaks . (3) To split a measure, see Measure operations: Split and join . 160

161 Add a break to a measure Breaks can be added using either (1) a ; or (2) a break symbol from a palette . keyboard shortcut Using a keyboard shortcut To add a Page break only: System break or a Select any one of the following: . 1 Barline; Measure; Notehead; Text element associated with a staff (e.g. lyric syllable, chord symbol, staff text etc.); Range of measures (if you chose this option, a break will be applied before and after the selection); 2 . Chose one of the following options: : Press ↵ (toggle). System break : Press Page break + ↵ (Mac: Cmd + ↵ ) (toggle). Ctrl Using a palette break symbol break can be added from a workspace palette : Any 1 . Select any one of the following: Barline; Measure; Notehead; Text element associated with a staff (e.g. lyric syllable, chord symbol, staff text etc.); Range of measures (if you chose this option, a break will be applied before and after the selection); . 2 Double click a break symbol in a palette (toggle). Alternatively, drag any break symbol from a palette onto a measure. Add a break to a frame To add a break to a frame , use one of the following options: Drag a break from a palette onto a frame. Select a frame then double-click a palette break symbol. Delete breaks Use one of the following options: Select one or more breaks and press . Del See also: Add / Remove system breaks . Move a break Although breaks are not visible on printed output, you can reposition one, if required, by entering edit mode on it and using Adjust position of text objects ). the keyboard arrow buttons (see Section break Section break , as the name suggests, is used to create separate sections within a score. Like a system break , it forces A the next measure or frame to begin a new system, and can also be used in association with a page break if required. A section break could be used, for example, to divide a piece into separate movements. Each section can have its own measure numbering independent of the rest of the score. By default, the first measure of a section is numbered "1" (see image below), though like the first measure of the score itelf, the number is not displayed unless configured in the measure properties dialog. The same dialog can be used to change the numbering according to your preference. If you change Time signature or Key signature at the beginning of the new section, there will be no courtesy signature at 161

162 the end of the previous section. See example below: When you play back the score, the program adds a short pause between each section. In addition, the first end repeat in a section always sends the playback cursor to the beginning of the section, so a start repeat barline barline is optional. to specify: Section Break Properties... Right click a Section break and select Pause length; If the new section's first system shows long instrument names; If the new section starts numbering measures at 1. Spacers There are three types of spacers : : A blue up-pointing arrow. For adding space above a staff. Staff spacer up : A blue down-pointing arrow. For adding space Staff spacer down a staff. below Staff spacer fixed down : Looks like a blue capital letter "I." For fixing the distance between two staves (useful to override style or autoplace settings in one spot only). Negative values are possible. Note : Spacers cannot be applied to a frame. Add a spacer Use either of the following options: palette spacer symbol. Select a measure, then double-click a Drag a spacer symbol from a palette onto a measure. Blue spacer symbols are visible on the screen, but do not appear on printouts. Note : Spacers are designed for local adjustments only. If you wish to adjust the space between staves across the whole score, use the settings in Format → Style... → Page instead. Adjust a spacer To adjust the height of a , choose one of these options: spacer Double-click the spacer and drag the blue end-handle up and down. + ↓ Double-click the spacer and use the Ctrl ↑ ↑ ↓ to move the end-handle up and down. keys and/or Click (or double-click) on the spacer and adjust the height property in the Inspector . Delete a spacer Del key. Click on the spacer and press the See also Add/Remove System breaks Frames A Frame is a rectangular container for empty space, text or pictures in the score. It can be one of three types: Horizontal : Used to create a break in a particular system. Can contain one or more text objects and/or images. Vertical : Inserted above a system or appended to the last system. Can contain one or more text objects and/or images. 162

163 Text : Inserted above a system or appended to the last system. Can contain one text object only. Horizontal frame A is used to create a break in a system. For example, you can: horizontal frame Create a coda, with an adjustable gap separating it from the rest of the score (as in the example below). Create an offset at the beginning of the score, where there is no staff name to perform the same function. Create an adjustable right margin at the end of a system. Create space for some text or image(s). Create a space between a 'historical incipit' and the beginning of the modern edition. Insert/append horizontal frame Create a Frame (below). See Adjust width of horizontal frame Use one of the following methods: Double-click the frame and drag the handle to the right or left. Select the frame and adjust "Width" in the Inspector . Add text or image to horizontal frame To add text : Right-click on the frame, select Add , and chose one of the text options. To add an image : Right-click on the frame and select Add → Picture . Vertical frame A can be inserted above a system or appended to the last system. It can contain one or more text objects vertical frame and/or images. The height is adjustable and the width equals the system width. It can be used, for example, to: Create an area at the head of a score for Title/Subtitle/Composer/Lyricist text etc. (see below). Add single- or multi-column lyric text (at the end of a score). Create a title page. Create subtitles and other annotations between systems. Insert/append vertical frame See Create a Frame (below). Adjust height of vertical frame Use one of the following methods: Double-click the frame and drag the handle up or down. Select the frame and adjust "Height" in the Inspector . Edit vertical frame properties Selecting the frame allows you to adjust various parameters in the Inspector: 163

164 Top Gap : Adjusts distance between frame and element above. : Adjusts distance between frame and element below. Bottom Gap Height : Adjusts height of the frame. : Moves left-aligned text objects to the right. Left Margin Right Margin : Moves right-aligned text objects to the left. Format → Top margin → Page ). : Moves top-aligned text objects downwards (see also Style... : Moves bottom-aligned text objects upwards (see also Format → Style... Bottom Margin → Page ). Add text or image to vertical frame : Right-click on the frame, select , and chose one of the text options. To add text Add : Right-click on the frame and select Add → Picture To add an image . You can create as many objects as you like within a frame. Their positions can be adjusted independently by dragging or, more accurately, by altering the offset values in the Inspector. To format text objects, see Text editing and Text styles and properties . Insert horizontal frame in vertical frame Right-click on the frame and select Add → Insert Horizontal Frame . The horizontal frame left-aligned and fills the entire vertical frame. To right-align it: is automatically . of the horizontal frame. width 1 Reduce the . Deselect the frame then drag it to the right. To restore left-alignment, drag the frame to the left. 2 "Title" frame A vertical frame is automatically created at the beginning of a score, showing the title, subtitle, composer, lyricist etc., when you fill in the information fields provided on page 1 of the New Score Wizard . If the score does not have a vertical frame at the beginning, you can create one as follows: 1 . From the menu, select Add → Text → Title/Subtitle/Composer/Lyricist ; 2 Type the desired text; . 3 . Press Esc , or click on an empty space, to exit. Text frame A Text frame looks like a vertical frame , but is specialised for text input: one text object is allowed per frame. The height automatically expands to fit the content and there is no height adjustment handle. A text frame can be used, for example, to: Create lyric text at the end of a score. Create subtitles and other annotations between systems. Insert/ append text frame See Create a Frame (below). 164

165 Edit text frame properties Selecting the frame allows you to adjust various parameters in the Inspector: : Adjusts distance between frame and element above. Top Gap Bottom Gap : Adjusts distance between frame and element below. : Not applicable to text frames. Height Left Margin : Moves left-aligned text objects to the right. Right Margin : Moves right-aligned text objects to the left. Top margin : Moves top-aligned text objects downwards. Bottom Margin : Moves bottom-aligned text upwards. Create a frame Insert a frame into the score 1 . Select a measure. . From the menu select 2 → Frames → Insert Horizontal/Vertical/Text Frame . Add Append a frame to the score Add → From the menu select → Append Horizontal/Vertical/Text Frame . Frames Delete a frame Select the frame and press Del . Apply a break Line, page or section can be applied to frames as well as measures. Use one of two methods: breaks Select a frame and double-click a palette break symbol (for example, in the Breaks & Spacers palette). Drag a break symbol from a palette onto a frame. See also Text Properties around text. : to put a visual frame (border) Insert measures : to insert measures before a frame. External links How to add a block of text to a score Page Formatting in MuseScore 1.1 - 1. Frames, Text & Line Breaks [video] Images You can use Images to illustrate scores, or to add symbols that are not included in the standard palettes . MuseScore supports the following formats: PNG (*.png) JPEG (*.jpg and *.jpeg) SVG (*.svg) (MuseScore currently does not support SVG shading, blurring, clipping or masking.) Add image Use one of the following options: Drag-and-drop an image file (from outside MuseScore) either into a frame or onto a note or rest in the score. Right-click on a frame, select Add → Picture , then pick an image from the file selector. Cut/copy and paste image 1 . Click on an image in the score. 165

166 2 . commands . Apply any of the standard copy/cut . 3 Click on a note, rest or frame. 4 . Apply any of the standard paste commands . Modify image To modify the width/height of an image, double-click it and drag any of the handles. If you want to adjust width or height Inspector . separately, untick "Lock aspect ratio" first in the You can adjust the position of an image by simply dragging it. See also Image capture Custom palettes External links How to create an ossia with image capture How to create an ossia with another staff Image capture image capture feature allows you to save a snapshot of any part of the score window. PNG, PDF and SVG MuseScore's formats are supported. Save a snapshot 1 . Click on the Toggle image capture button, . 2 . Shift + drag, to create a new selection rectangle. Press . Fine tune the rectangle position, if required, by dragging it and/or changing the "Position" values in the "Lasso" 3 Inspector . section of the 4 . Fine tune the rectangle area, if required, by dragging the handles, and/or changing the "Size" values in the Inspector. 5 . Right-click on the selection rectangle to open the Image Capture menu. Select the desired option: Save As (Print Mode) . This saves an image of the selection area as it would look if printed, e.g. Save as (Screenshot Mode) . This saves a selection of the actual screen, including any line break symbols, invisible elements etc., e.g. You can save the image in either PNG (default), SVG or PDF format. Image capture menu Right-clicking on the selection rectangle opens the Image Capture menu (Mac: Ctrl + click, or 2-finger-tap): 166

167 Copy image : Chose this to copy an image before pasting it in the same or another MuseScore file. : Set the resolution, and hence the size of the saved or copied image. Try 100 dpi to start with, if you are Resolution unsure. Transparent background : Turn image transparency on or off. Auto re-size to page : Adjusts the selection rectangle to fit the page. Resize to A/B/C/D Chose a customised selection rectangle (as set below). : Set Standard Size : Resize the selection rectangle, then chose "Set size A/B/C/D" to store it. See also Image External links Create an ossia with image capture How to create an ossia with another staff Align elements While dragging an element: Press Ctrl to constrain movement to the horizontal only. Press Shift to constrain movement to the vertical only. Snap to grid Snap to grid is a feature which allows you to drag an element in precise steps—useful for exact positioning. To enable snap to grid, select an element and click one or both of the snap to grid buttons, located to the right of the horizontal and vertical offset fields in the . You can then drag the element in steps equal to the Inspector . grid spacing The default value is 0.5 sp . To change the grid spacing : 1 Right-click on any of the snap to grid buttons in the Inspector, and select Configure Grid . . 2 . Set values for the horizontal and vertical grid spacing as required. Note that this is a fractional setting. Advanced topics Accessibility Introduction 167

168 This document is written for blind and visually impaired users of MuseScore 2.x. It is not intended to provide a full description of all of the features of MuseScore; you should read this in conjunction with the regular MuseScore documentation. for Windows. The features in this MuseScore comes with support for the free and open source NVDA screen reader document have been tested on Windows with NVDA. There is no support at the moment for other screen readers such as for Windows, or for macOS, which may work differently, or not at all. Jaws VoiceOver At this point in time, MuseScore 2.x is mostly accessible as a score reader, not so much as a score editor. This document will focus on the score reading features, with only a brief description of score editing. Initial setup When you run MuseScore for the first time, you may want to permanently disable the Start Center window. To do so, go + E close the Start Center window first, then the Edit menu ( Alt ), choose Preferences, and in there, uncheck Show Start Center. Save and close the preferences window. Finding your way around The user interface in MuseScore works much like other notation programs, or other document-oriented programs in general. It has a single main document window in which you can work with a score. MuseScore supports multiple document tabs within this window. It also supports a split-screen view to let you work with two documents at once, and you can have multiple tabs in each window. In addition to the score window, MuseScore has a menu bar that you can access via the shortcuts for the individual menus: Alt + File: F Edit: + E Alt Alt V View: + Add: Alt + A Alt + N Notes: Layout: Alt L + Alt + Style: S Plugins: Alt + P Help: Alt + H Of these, only the File menu is of much interest when using MuseScore as a score reader. Once opening a menu, it may take several presses of the or Down keys before everything is read properly. Up There are also a number of toolbars, palettes, and subwindows within MuseScore, and you can cycle through the controls in these using (or Shift + Tab to move backwards through this same cycle). When you first start MuseScore, or load a Tab score, focus should be in the main score window. Pressing Tab takes you to a toolbar containing a series of buttons for Tab will skip any buttons that aren't currently active. The names and operations like New, Open, Play, and so forth. shortcuts (where applicable) for these buttons should be read by your screen reader. Once you have cycled through the buttons on the toolbar, the next window Tab will visit is the Palette. This would be used to add various elements to a score, but it is not currently accessible except for two buttons that are visited by Tab: a drop down to select between different workspaces (a saved arrangement of palettes), and a button to create a new workspace. If you have opened one of the optional windows, such as the Inspector, or the Selection Filter, the Tab key will also visit these. You can close windows you do not need by going to the View menu and making sure none of the first set of checkboxes are selected (the windows that appear before the Zoom settings). By default, only the Start Center, Palettes and Inspector should be selected. See Initial Setup for instructions for disabling the Start Center. F9 can be used to toggle the Palettes while F8 will toggle the Inspector. To return focus to the score window after visiting the toolbar, or a subwindow, press Esc. This also clears any selection you may have made in the score window. The score window When you first start MuseScore 2.x, an empty example score entitled “My First Score” is loaded by default. If you wish to experiment with editing features, this would be a good place to begin. Otherwise, you will probably want to start by loading a score. MuseScore uses the standard shortcuts to access system commands like Ctrl + O (Mac: Cmd + O ) to open a file, Ctrl + S W (Mac: + S ) to save, Ctrl + Cmd (Mac: Cmd + W ) to close, etc. 168

169 If you press Ctrl O (Mac: Cmd + O ) to load a score, you are presented with a fairly standard file dialog. MuseScore can open + scores in its own format (MSCZ or MSCX) as well as import scores in the standard MusicXML format, in MIDI format, or from a few other programs such as Guitar Pro, Capella, and Band-in-a-Box. Once you have loaded a score, it is displayed + Tab (does not apply in a new tab within the score window. You can move between the tabs in the score window using Ctrl for Mac). There are a few interesting things you can do with a loaded score besides reading it note by note. You can press Space to have MuseScore play the score for you. You can use File / Export to convert to another format, including PDF, PNG, Ctrl + P (Mac: Cmd + P WAV, MP3, MIDI, MusicXML, etc. And of course, you can print it via File / Print or ). If a score contains multiple instruments, it may already have linked parts generated. Linked parts are presented as part tabs within score tabs, but currently, there is no way to navigate these part tabs using the keyboard. The parts would not normally contain information different from the score; they would just be displayed differently (each part on its own page). If a score does not already have parts generated, you can do so through File / Parts, and that dialog is accessible. If you wish to print the parts, you can work around the inability of accessing part tabs individually by using the File / Export Parts dialog, which automatically exports PDF’s (or other formats) for all parts in one step. Score reading When you first load a score, the score window has the keyboard focus, but there will be nothing selected. The first step to Ctrl + Home reading a score is to select something, and the most natural place to begin is with the first element of the score. Cmd Home (Mac: ) will do this. You will probably also want to use this, should you ever clear your selection by pressing + Esc. As you navigate between elements, your screen reader should give the name of the selected element (most likely the clef at the beginning of the top staff of your score). You will hear it read the name of the element (for example, “Treble clef”) and also give position information (for example, “Measure 1; Beat 1; Staff 1”). The amount of information read is not currently customizable, but we tried to place the most important first so you can quickly move on to the next element before it has finished reading, or just ignore the rest of what is read. Pressing Shift currently interrupts the reading, which might also be useful. Most navigation in MuseScore is centered around notes and rests only – it will skip clefs, key signatures, time signatures, barlines, and other elements. So if you just use the standard Left keys to move through your score, you will only Right and hear about notes and rests (and the elements attached to them). However, there are two special navigation commands that you will find useful to gain a more complete summarization of the score: Cmd Ctrl Alt + Shift + Right (Mac: Next element: + Option + Shift + Right ) + Previous element: Ctrl + Alt + Shift + Left (Mac: Cmd + Option + Shift + Left These commands include clefs and other elements that the other navigation commands skip, and also navigate through all voices within the current staff, whereas other navigation commands such as and Left only navigate through the Right currently selected voice until you explicitly change voices. For instance, if you are on a quarter note on beat 1 of measure 1, and there are two voices in that measure, then pressing Right will move on to the next note of voice 1—which will be on Ctrl + Alt + Shift + Right (Mac: Cmd + Option beat 2—whereas pressing Shift + Right ) will stay on beat 1 but move to the note on voice + 2. Only once you have moved through all notes on the current beat on the current staff will the shortcut move you on to the next beat. The intent is that this shortcut should be useful for navigating through a score if you don’t already know what the contents are. When you navigate to an element, your screen reader should read information about it. For notes and rests, it will also read information about elements attached to them, such as lyrics, articulations, chord symbols, etc. For the time being, there is no way to navigate directly to these elements. One important note: Up and Down by themselves, with Shift , or with Ctrl / Cmd are not useful shortcuts for navigation! Instead, they change the pitch of the currently selected note or notes. Be careful not to inadvertently edit a score you are trying to read. Up and Down should only be used with Alt/Option if your intent is navigation only. See the list of navigation shortcuts below. Moving forwards or backwards in time The following shortcuts are useful for moving “horizontally” through a score: Ctrl + Next element: + Shift + Right Alt Previous element: Ctrl + Alt + Shift + Left Next chord or rest: Right Previous chord or rest: Left 169

170 Next measure: Ctrl Right + Ctrl + Previous measure: Left + Ctrl Go to measure: F First element: Ctrl + Home + End Last element: Ctrl Moving between notes at a given point in time The following shortcuts are useful for moving “vertically” through a score: Next element: Ctrl + Alt + Shift + Right Ctrl Previous element: Alt + Shift + Left + Next higher note in voice, previous voice, or staff above: + Up Alt Alt Down Next lower note in voice, next voice, or staff below: + Ctrl + Alt + Top note in chord: Up Bottom note in chord: Ctrl + Alt + Down The Alt + Up and Alt + Down commands are similar to the Ctrl + Alt + Shift + Right and Ctrl + Alt + Shift + Left commands in that they are designed to help you discover the content of a score. You do not need to know how many notes are in a chord, how many voices are in a staff, or how many staves are in a score in order to move vertically through the score using these commands. Filtering score reading F6 ). Excluding certain elements like lyrics, or chord names while reading the score is possible by using the Selection filter ( Uncheck those elements you don't want to read. Score playback The Space bar serves both to start and stop playback. Playback will start with the currently selected note if one is selected; where playback was last stopped if no note is selected; or at the beginning of the score on first playback. MuseScore supports looped playback so you can repeat a section of a piece for practice purposes. To set the “in” and “out” points for the loop playback via the Play Panel ( F11 ): 1 . First select the note in the score window where the loop should start 2 . Go to the Play Panel and press the Set loop In position toggle button 3 . Back to the score window, navigate to the note where you want the loop to end 4 . Switch again to Play Panel, and press the Set loop Out position toggle button . To enable or disable the loop, press the Loop Playback toggle button 5 You can also control the loop playback and control other playback parameters, such as overriding the basic tempo of a F11 ). score, using the View / Play Panel ( Score editing Score editing is currently not very accessible – too many score elements require intervention of the mouse in order to place objects onto a score. Additionally, visual reference and manual adjustment of the position of various elements is sometimes necessary due to MuseScore's limited support for conflict avoidance of elements. In contrast, MuseScore does often provide ample default, and a platform to experiment with the basics of note input. To enter note input mode, first navigate to the measure in which you would like to enter notes, then press “N”. Almost everything about note input is designed to be keyboard accessible, and the standard documentation should be good to help you through the process. Bear in mind that MuseScore can either be in note input or normal mode, and it won’t always be clear which mode of these you are in. When in doubt, press Esc. If you were in note input mode, this will take you out. If you were in normal mode, you will stay there, although you will also lose your selection. Customization You can customize the keyboard shortcuts using Edit / Preferences / Shortcuts. At some point, we may provide a set of special accessibility-optimized shortcuts and/or a way of saving and loading sets of shortcut definitions. External links 170

171 Creating a New Score in MuseScore with NVDA Inputting notes in MuseScore with NVDA Creating Modified Stave Notation in MuseScore Albums The Album feature is has been disabled for the initial 3.0 release. It will come back in a later patch release The Album Manager allows you to prepare a list of multiple scores and save the list as an album file ("*.album"), print all the scores as one long print job with consistent page numbers, or even join the scores into a single new MSCZ score. This is ideal for preparing an exercise book or combining multiple movements of an orchestration. → Album... To open the Album Manager, go to File Create album . To create a new album, click the New button. Fill in a title in the "Album Name:" box at the top. 1 . 2 Add Score . A file selection dialog will appear and let you choose one or multiple To add scores to the album, click scores from your file system. Click . OK . 3 The scores you add will appear in a list in the Album Manager. You can rearrange their order by selecting a score Up or Down and clicking the button. Load album If you have previously created an album, you can open it through the Album Manager by clicking the Load button. A file selection dialog will appear to let you load the .album file from your file system. Print album To print an album as if it were a single document, click . The scores loaded into the Album Manager are printed Print Album Layout → Page in the order they are listed in with the correct page numbers, ignoring the page number offset values in Settings... First page number for all but the first score. As the album is printed in one print job, double-sided printing (duplex → printing) also works as expected. Join scores To combine multiple scores into a single .mscz file, click Join Scores . The scores are combined in the selected order into one single score. If not already present, and section breaks are added to the last measure or frame of each score in line- the combined file. All style settings are taken from the first score, different style settings from subsequent score are ignored. All the scores should have the same number of parts and staves for this to work correctly, ideally with the same instruments in the same order. If the scores have the same total number of instruments but not the same ones, or not in the same order, then the instrument names from the first score will overwrite ones from subsequent scores. If some of the scores have fewer instruments than the first score, then empty staves will be created for those sections. Any part or staff that is not present in the first score will be lost in the joined score. Save album 171

172 Upon clicking the Close button, you will be prompted to save your album as a .album file. This file is not the same as a ; it simply consists of the list of scores. Album files can be loaded into the Album Manager as described joined score above . Automatic placement Style MuseScore initially places elements in the score according to the default properties specified in . And if elements have automatic placement enabled, MuseScore attempts to avoid collisions by moving one or more of them as needed. Default position The default position for most elements is controlled by their style settings. The specific properties you can set vary by element type but may include: Placement : Whether the element appears above or below the staff. Offset : For elements with no "Placement above/below" properties, this specifies the default position. See Offset X/Y . : Minimum distance from other elements when autoplace is enabled. Autoplace min distance Layout and formatting: Style For details of the settings available for each element type, see . To change the default position: Use one of the following methods: Format → Style ; chose an element type and then adjust the placement/position settings. From the menu, select Inspector Select a relevant element in the score and change the placement/position settings in the ; then press the Set as style " button ( S ) to update the Style settings. Manual adjustments After an element had been automatically placed, it's position can be changed manually using one of the following methods: X and Y offsets Inspector . Select the element and adjust the in the Drag and drop the element using the mouse. Change to edit mode and move the element using the arrow buttons. If the element type can be placed both above or below the staff, you can change the position by: Inspector Changing the "Placement" settings in the Using X to flip between above/below Note : When automatic placement is enabled for an element, you cannot position it in a way that causes a collision with other elements. Disabling automatic placement Select the element and uncheck the "Automatic placement" box in the Inspector . The element reverts to its default position. It can be repositioned as desired and is no longer avoided when placing other elements. Stacking order To change the value for Stacking order : Select the element and change the "Stacking order" value in the Inspector . In cases where elements are allowed to overlap, Stacking order controls the order in which they are placed on top of each other. The element with the lower value will be placed behind. Cross-staff notation In piano scores, it is common to write a musical phrase extending across both staves—bass and treble. This can be entered in MuseScore as follows: 172

173 1 . Enter the notation in one staff to begin with. e.g. / . Ctrl + Shift + ↓ / ↑ (Mac: ⌘ + Shift + 2 Select a note and press ↑ ). This moves all the notes in that voice down/up to the ↓ other staff. e.g. : If you only want to move certain notes in a chord you need to ensure that they are in a separate voice. Note 3 . keyboard arrows or drag the handles to change the To adjust the beam, double-click it to show the handles. Use the beam angle and position: See also Connect barlines : How to extend barlines over multiple staves. External links How to span a chord or stem over two staves (MuseScore "Howto") Early music features MuseScore offers several specialized functions to create engravings of early music (particularly medieval and renaissance) akin to commercial editions from the 20th century onwards. Unbarred (or unmetered) notation In MuseScore, notes lasting longer than the duration of a measure are normally tied across barlines. However MuseScore has a special feature which allows it to display the note values intact, without splitting and tying them in this way. This enables you to notate music which is unbarred (i.e. not divided into measures), such as that of the renaissance : 1 . From the menu bar, select Format → Style... → Score . 2 Tick the box labelled "Display note values across measure boundaries ... ." . 3 . Click "OK" or "Apply." The existing score is immediately updated. Example 1 . The example below shows an excerpt from the original score of "De Profundis Clamavi" for 4 voices by Nicolas Champion: 173

174 2 . The same excerpt displayed in MuseScore: . And after activating "Display note values across measure boundaries ... ." 3 To get rid of the barlines, just untick the “Show barlines” box in the Staff / Part properties dialog. See also 4 . Mensurstrich (below). Note : The feature is still in development and may contain bugs. The longest supported note value is the longa (a dotted longa is still broken up and tied over). Mensurstrich Since a complete lack of barlines could make performing the music more difficult for current musicians, many modern engravers settled on a compromise called , where barlines are drawn between, but not across, staves. Mensurstrich To place barlines between staves: 1 . Mensurstriche , uncheck "Show barlines" in the Staff / Part Properties dialog; In the staff below the proposed 2 . In the staff above where you want the Mensurstriche , right-click on one barline and chose Select → All Similar Elements in Same Staff ; . , tick the "Span to next staff" option; Barline section of the Inspector 3 In the . In the Barline section of the Inspector, adjust the "Span from" value so that the top of the barlines meet the bottom 4 line of the staff; 5 . Repeat for other staves as required. Ambitus Before there was the concept of an absolute pitch, performers were required to transpose vocal music to a singable range for their ensemble "on the fly." To aid them, an ambitus was sometimes included, marking the entire range of a voice at the beginning of the piece. To apply an ambitus, use one of the following methods: Drag the ambitus symbol (from the Lines palette of the Advanced workspace) onto a clef. Select a clef, then double-click the ambitus symbol (in the Lines palette of the Advanced workspace). 174

175 When applied, the ambitus automatically displays the note range of the score: if there is a section break only the note then range of the section is displayed. Beyond the section break a new ambitus may be applied. The note range of the ambitus can be adjusted manually by selecting it and changing the "Top note" and "Bottom note" Inspector . For automatic adjustment click the Update Range button in the inspector. values in the Mensural time signatures In the mensural notation system, time signatures did not define the length of a measure, but the length of breves and semibreves. MuseScore supports mensural time symbols as a display method in the Time signature properties dialog rather than as symbols, but they are just for show, as the proportion of e.g. half notes per whole notes cannot be modified. One way to make use of these symbols is to replicate when composers of the renaissance had multiple voices in different time signatures simultaneously without using tuplets. Edit the time signature on a per-staff basis, as long as the beginning and end of a measure in all staves match up. If they do not, then consider increasing the size of the measures to the lowest common denominator. De Profundis Clamavi for 5 voices by Josquin Des Prez See also Measure Operations: Split and join Figured bass Adding a new figured bass indication 1 . Select the note to which the figured bass applies 2 . Press the Figured Bass shortcut (default Ctrl + G ; can be changed in Preferences) 3 . Enter the text in the editor 'blue box' as required (see below) . Press Space 4 to move to the next note ready for another figured bass indication (or click outside the editor box to exit it) With Space , the editor advances to the next note, or rest of the staff to which figured bass is being added. To move to a point in between, or to extend a figured bass group for a longer duration, see below Group Duration . Tab advances the editing box to the beginning of the next measure. Shift + Space moves the editing box to the previous staff note or rest. Shift + Tab moves the editing box to the beginning of the previous measure. 175

176 Text format Digits Digits are entered directly. Groups of several digits stacked one above the other are also entered directly in a single text, stacking them with : Enter Accidentals Accidentals can be entered using regular keys: To enter: type: double flat bb b flat h natural sharp # double sharp ## These characters will automatically turn into the proper signs when you leave the editor. Accidentals can be entered before, or after a digit (and of course, in place of a digit, for altered thirds), according to the required style; both styles are properly aligned, with the accidental 'hanging' at the left, or the right. Combined shapes Slashed digits or digits with a cross can be entered by adding \ , / or + after the digit (combining suffixes); the proper combined shape will be substituted when leaving the editor: The built-in font can manage combination equivalence, favoring the more common substitution: 1+, 2+, 3+, 4+ result in (or ) and 5\, 6\, 7\, 8\, 9\ result in (or ) Please remember that / can only by combined with 5 ; any other 'slashed' figure is rendered with a question mark. + can also be used before a digit; in this case it is not combined, but it is properly aligned ('+' hanging at the left side). Parentheses 176

177 Open and closed parentheses, both round: '(', ')' and square: '[', ']', can be inserted before and after accidentals, before and after a digit, before and after a continuation line; added parentheses will not disturb the proper alignment of the main character. Notes: The editor does not check that parentheses, open and closed, round or square, are properly balanced. Several parentheses in a row are non-syntactical and prevent proper recognition of the entered text. A parenthesis between a digit and a combining suffix ('+', '\', '/') is accepted, but prevents shape combination. Continuation lines Continuation lines are input by adding an '_' (underscore) at the end of the line. Each digit of a group can have its own continuation line: Continuation lines are drawn for the whole duration of the figured bass group. 'Extended' continuation lines Occasionally, a continuation line has to connect with the continuation line of a following group, when a chord degree has Pièces de viole , op. 31, Paris 1730): to be kept across two groups. Examples (both from J. Boismortier, In the first case, each group has its own continuation line; in the second, the continuation line of the first group is carried 'into' the second. This can be obtained by entering several (two or more) underscores "__" at the end of the text line of the first group. Duration Each figured bass group has a duration, which is indicated by a light gray line above it (of course, this line is for information only and it is not printed or exported to PDF). Initially, a group has the same duration of the note to which it is attached. A different duration may be required to fit several groups under a single note or to extend a group to span several notes. To achieve this, each key combination of the list below can be used: to advance the editing box by the indicated duration AND to set the duration of the previous group up to the new editing box position. Pressing several of them in sequence without entering any figured bass text repeatedly extends the previous group. Type: to get: Ctrl + 1 1/64 Ctrl + 1/32 2 + 3 1/16 Ctrl + 4 1/8 ( quaver ) Ctrl Ctrl + 5 1/4 ( crochet ) Ctrl 6 half note ( minim ) + whole note + 7 Ctrl ( semibreve ) 177

178 Ctrl + 2 whole notes ( breve ) 8 to get: Type: (The digits are the same as are used to set the note durations) Setting the exact figured bass group duration is only mandatory in two cases: 1 . When several groups are fit under a single staff note (there is no other way). 2 . When continuation lines are used, as line length depends on the group duration. However, it is a good practice to always set the duration to the intended value for the purposes of plugins and MusicXML. Editing existing figured basses To edit a figured bass indication already entered: Figured Bass shortcut used to create a new one Select it, or the note it belongs to and press the same or Double-click it The usual text editor box will open with the text converted back to plain characters ('b', '#' and 'h' for accidentals, separate combining suffixes, underscores, etc.) for simpler editing. Once done, press Space to move to a next note, or click outside the editor box to exit it, as for newly created figured basses. Style To configure how figured bass is rendered: from the menu, select Format → Style... → Figured Bass . Font : The dropdown list contains all the fonts which have been configured for figured bass. A standard installation contains only one font, "MuseScore Figured Bass," which is also the default font. Format Note : This value is also modified by any change made to Scaling Size : Select a font-size in points. → Page ( Settings ...), or Scale ("Staff properties"). Vertical Position : The distance (in spatia ) from the top of the staff to the top margin of the figured bass text. Negative values go up (figured bass above the staff) and positive values go down (figured bass below the staff: a value greater than 4 is needed to step over the staff itself). Line Height : The distance between the base line of each figured bass line, as a percentage of font size. The following picture visualizes each numeric parameter: 178

179 Alignment : Select the vertical alignment: with , the top line of each group is aligned with the main vertical Top position and the group 'hangs' from it (this is normally used with figured bass notation and is the default); with Bottom , the bottom line is aligned with the main vertical position and the group 'sits' on it (this is sometimes used in some kinds of harmonic analysis notations): : Chose between "Modern" or "Historic." The difference between the two styles is shown below: Style Proper syntax For the relevant substitutions and shape combinations to take effect and for proper alignment, the figured bass mechanism expects input texts to follow some rules (which are in any case, the rules for a syntactical figured bass indication): There can be only one accidental (before or after), or only one combining suffix per figure; and a combining suffix; There cannot be both an accidental There can be an accidental without a digit (altered third), but not a combining suffix without a digit. Any other character not listed above is not expected. If a text entered does not follow these rules, it will not be processed: it will be stored and displayed as it is, without any layout. Summary of keys Type: to get: Ctrl + G Adds a new figured bass group to the selected note. Advances the editing box to the next note. Space + Shift Moves the editing box to the previous note. Space Advances the editing box to the next measure. Tab + Tab Moves the editing box to the previous measure. Shift + 1 Advances the editing box by 1/64, setting the duration of the previous group. Ctrl + 2 Advances the editing box by 1/32, setting the duration of the previous group. Ctrl Ctrl + 3 Advances the editing box by 1/16, setting the duration of the previous group. Ctrl + 4 Advances the editing box by 1/8 ( quaver ), setting the duration of the previous group. Ctrl + Advances the editing box by 1/4 ( crochet ), setting the duration of the previous group. 5 + minim Advances the editing box by a half note ( Ctrl ), setting the duration of the previous group. 6 Advances the editing box by a whole note ( semibreve ), setting the duration of the previous Ctrl 7 + group. Ctrl + 8 Advances the editing box by two whole notes ( breve ), setting the duration of the previous group. Ctrl + Enters an actual space; useful when figure appears "on the second line" (e.g., 5 4 -> 3). Space B B Enters a double flat. B Enters a flat. H Enters a natural. # Enters a sharp. # # Enters a double sharp. _ Enters a continuation line. _ _ Enters an extended continuation line. 179

180 Type: to get: File formats MuseScore can import and export a wide variety of file formats, allowing you to share and publish scores in the format that best meets your needs. MuseScore native format saves files in the following native formats: MuseScore *.mscz : The default MuseScore file format. Being compressed it takes up relatively little disk space. *.mscx : An uncompressed MuseScore file format, mainly used for debugging or storing in a versioning system .*.mscx, .*.mscz, / : These are backup files. Notice the point (full stop) added before the file name, and the comma added to the file extension. A note about fonts : MuseScore does not embed text fonts in saved or exported native format files. If you want your MuseScore file to be viewed by other MuseScore users, make sure you are using the built-in FreeSerif or FreeSans font families for your text, or a font that the other parties have installed too. If a system does not have the fonts specified in your original file, MuseScore will use a fallback option, which may cause your score to appear differently. *.mscz ) MuseScore format ( MSCZ is the standard MuseScore file format and recommended for most uses. A score saved in this format takes up very little disk space, but preserves all the necessary information. The format is a ZIP-compressed version of files and .mscx includes any images the score may contain and a thumbnail. Uncompressed MuseScore format ( ) *.mscx MSCX is the uncompressed version of the MuseScore file format. A score saved in this format will retain all information, except images. It can be opened with a text editor, allowing the user access to the file's source code. .*.mscz, ) or ( .*.mscx, MuseScore backup file ( ) Backup files are created automatically and saved in the same folder as your normal MuseScore file. The backup copy contains the previously saved version of the MuseScore file and can be important if your normal copy becomes corrupted, or for looking at an older version of the score. The backup file adds a period to the beginning of the file name ( . ) and a comma ( , ) to the end (e.g. if your normal file is called " untitled.mscz ", the backup copy will be " .untitled.mscz, "), and the period and comma need to be removed from the name in order to open the backup file in MuseScore. As it is stored in the same folder as your normal MuseScore file, you may also need to give it a unique name (e.g. changing " " to " untitled-backup1.mscz "). .untitled.mscz, In order to see the MuseScore backup files, you may need to change your system settings to "Show hidden files". Note: How to recover a backup copy of a score (MuseScore 2.x) . See also Graphic files (export only) export a score as a graphic file in either PDF MuseScore can PNG or SVG format. , PDF ( *.pdf ) PDF (Portable Document Format) files are ideal for sharing your sheet music with others who do not need to edit the content. This is a very widely-used format and most users will have a PDF viewer of some kind on their computers. To set the resolution of exported PDFs: 1 . From the menu bar, chose Edit → Preferences... (Mac: MuseScore → Preferences... ), and select the "Export" tab; 2 Set the resolution in the "PDF" section. . PNG ( *.png ) PNG (Portable Network Graphics) files are based on a bitmap image format, widely supported by software on Windows, Mac OS, and Linux, and very popular on the web. MuseScore creates PNG images as they would appear if printed, one image per page. 180

181 To set the resolution of exported PNG images: 1 From the menu bar, chose Edit → Preferences... (Mac: MuseScore → Preferences... ), and select the "Export" tab; . . Set the resolution and transparency in the PNG/SVG section. 2 Note: If you want to create images that show only parts of the score (with or without screen-only items such as frame boxes, invisible notes, and out-of-range note colors), use instead. Image capture SVG ( *.svg ) SVG (Scalable Vector Graphics) files can be opened by most web browsers (except Internet Explorer before version 9) and most vector graphics software. However, most SVG software does not support embedded fonts, so the appropriate saved on MuseScore fonts must be installed to view these files correctly. SVG is the current format for all scores MuseScore.com. To set resolution and transparency of exported SVG files, see the instructions under PNG (above) . Note that MuseScore images in a score). does not (yet) support gradients on export (although it does for Audio files (export only) MuseScore can create , stereo audio of the score in any of the following formats: WAV , MP3 , OGG VORBIS , normalised . To export an audio file: FLAC . From the menu, select File → Export... 1 ; 2 . Chose the desired format from the dropdown menu, then press Save . You can adjust the sample rate of all audio formats as follows: 1 . From the menu bar, select Edit → Preferences... (Mac: MuseScore → Preferences... ), and click on the Export tab; 2 . Set "Sample rate" in the "Audio" section. *.wav ) WAV audio ( sound format. This was developed by Microsoft and IBM, and is WAV (Waveform Audio Format) is an uncompressed widely supported by software for Windows, OS X, and Linux. It is an ideal format for use when creating CDs, as full sound quality is preserved. For sharing via email or the internet, use a compressed alternative such as . MP3 MP3 ( *.mp3 ) is a very widely-used compressed audio format. MP3 files are ideal for sharing and downloading over the internet MP3 due to their relatively small size. To set the MP3 bitrate : (Mac: . Edit → 1 From the menu bar, chose MuseScore → Preferences... ), and select the "Export" tab; Preferences... 2 . Set the MP3 bitrate in the "Audio" section. FLAC audio ( *.flac ) (FLAC) is compressed audio format. FLAC files are approximately half the size of Free Lossless Audio Codec uncompressed audio and just as good quality. Windows and OS X do not have built-in support for FLAC, but software VLC media player can play FLAC files on any operating system. such as the free and open source Ogg Vorbis ( ) *.ogg Ogg Vorbis is intended as a patent-free replacement for the popular MP3 audio format (which MuseScore also supports —see above). Like MP3, Ogg Vorbis files are relatively small (often a tenth of uncompressed audio), but some sound quality is lost. Windows and OS X do not have built-in support for Ogg Vorbis. However, software such as VLC media player Firefox can play Ogg files on any operating system. and Share with other music software MuseScore can import and export MusicXML and MIDI files; it is also able to import a variety of native format files from other music notation programs. 181

182 MusicXML ( *.xml *.musicxml ) , is the universal standard for sheet music. It is the recommended format for sharing sheet music between MusicXML and different scorewriters, including MuseScore, Sibelius, Finale, and more than 100 others. MuseScore imports *.xml *.musicxml (because the program you want to import it needs that), you need to *.xml , but exports only *.musicxml . If you need rename it yourself after the export. Compressed MusicXML ( ) *.mxl Compressed MusicXML creates smaller files than regular MusicXML. This is a newer standard and isn't as widely supported by older scorewriters, but MuseScore has full import and export support. *.mid , *.midi , *.kar ) MIDI ( (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a format widely supported by sequencers and music notation software. For MIDI MIDI Association details of the protocol see the website. MIDI files are very useful for playback purposes but contain little in the way of score layout information (formatting, pitch spelling, voicing, ornaments, articulations, repeats, key signatures etc.). To share files between different music notation software, MusicXML is recommended instead. For details about how to import MIDI files see . MIDI import MuseData ( *.md ) (import only) MuseData is a format developed by Walter B. Hewlett beginning in 1983 as an early means of sharing music notation between software. It has since been eclipsed by MusicXML, but several thousand scores in this format are still available online. Capella ( *.cap , *.capx ) (import only) CAP and CAPX files are created by the score writer, Capella . MuseScore imports version 2000 (3.0) or later fairly accurately. Bagpipe Music Writer ( ) (import only) *.bww BWW files are created by the niche score writer, Bagpipe Music Writer . *.mgu , *.sgu ) (import only) BB ( Band-in-a-Box . MuseScore's support is currently experimental. BB files are created by the music arranging software, Overture ( *.ove ) (import only) OVE files are created by the score writer Overture . This format is mainly popular in Chinese-language environments, such as Mainland China, Hong Kong, and Taiwan. MuseScore's support is currently experimental. Guitar Pro ( *.gtp , *.gp3 , *.gp4 , *.gp5 , *.gpx ) (import only) GP files are created by . Guitar Pro See also Open/Save/Export/Print Recovered files External links How to recover a backup copy of a score Fretboard diagrams A range of fretboard (or chord ) diagrams for the guitar are provided in the Fretboard Diagrams palette in the Advanced 182

183 Workspace. You can create a chord diagram for fretted, stringed instrument by editing an existing one. It can be saved to a custom any for future use if required. palette Add a fretboard diagram To add a fretboard diagram to the score, use one of the following methods: palette Select a note in voice 1 and double-click a fretboard diagram from a . Drag and drop a fretboard diagram from a palette to the desired position in the score. Edit fretboard diagram . When a fretboard diagram is selected, it can be edited in the Inspector Adjust the number of instrument strings , using " Strings ". 1 . . Adjust the fret position number using " 2 ". Offset 3 Adjust how many frets to display (height-wise) using " Frets ". . . . Click on a fret to establish a dot; click again to remove the dot. 4 Place the finger dots . To create a barre or partial barre : 5 i. Make sure the desired fret position is clear of black dots (click on a dot to remove it); Shift and click on the fret where you want the barre to begin. Note : Only one barré can be applied per ii. Hold diagram; a partial barré must end on the first string. iii. To delete a barre, click on the black dot where the barre begins. 6 . Indicate open and mute strings (if applicable). Click just above the diagram to toggle a string between: Open ( o ) x ) Mute/unplayed ( No indication. . Adjust the size Scale " property. 7 : Use the " Adjust position, color, stacking order The of the fretboard diagram can be adjusted in the usual way in Edit mode , or you can edit the X- and Y-offsets position in the Inspector. Color and Stacking order can be adjusted in the "Element" section at the top of the Inspector. Fretboard diagram style Certain default properties of fretboard diagrams (barre thickness, vertical position, scale, fret-number font-size and position) can be adjusted from the Style submenu: select Format → Style... → Fretboard Diagrams . Any changes made here affect all existing diagrams, as well as those applied subsequently. MIDI import MuseScore can import MIDI files (.mid/.midi/.kar) and convert them into music notation. To import a MIDI file , use the standard Open command. This converts the MIDI file into a MuseScore file using default settings. The MIDI Import Panel appears at the bottom of the screen: you can expand this by dragging the interface with the document window upwards. The panel shows all the tracks in the file (only those with note events are shown) and allows you to adjust parameters affecting the conversion process. If there are multiple tracks , then one more track is added at the top of the list to select all tracks at once. 183

184 To accept the default conversion : Simply press the "X" symbol on the top-left of the Import Panel to close it. The panel can be re-opened at any time during the session by pressing "Show MIDI import panel" at the bottom of the document window. below ) and press Apply . If you have : Adjust the desired parameters in the Import Panel (see To reimport the file . To close the Import Panel, press the "X" Cancel made changes to the Import Panel but wish to UNDO them, press symbol at the top-left of the panel. (MIDI Import Panel): Vertical scrolling is the default. For horizontal scrolling, press Shift Mouse wheel scrolling Ctrl or while using the wheel. Available operations MuseScore instrument Assign a MuseScore instrument (listed in instruments.xml or in specified custom xml file in Preferences) that defines staff name, clef, transposition, articulations, etc. Quantization Quantize MIDI notes by some regular grid. The grid MAX resolution can be set via the drop-down menu: Value from preferences (default) - quantization value is taken from the main Preferences dialog of MuseScore (in the “Import” tab) Quarter, Eighth, 16th, 32nd, 64th, 128th - user-defined values However, the actual quantization grid size is adaptive and reduces when the note length is small, so for each note the quantization value is different. But there is an upper limit for the quantization value, and that value can be set by the user as "max. quantization". For example, if some note is long - say, half note, and the max. quantization is set to 8th, then the note will be quantized with the 8th-note grid, not the half- or quarter-note grid as it supposed to be by the algorithm. Such quantization scheme allows to quantize all notes in the score (with different lengths!) adequately. Max. voices Sets maximum count of allowed musical voices. Search tuplets When enabled, this option attempts to detect tuplets and applies the corresponding quantization grid to the tuplet chords. Is human performance If enabled, this option reduces the accuracy of MIDI-to-score conversion in favor of readability. It is useful for unaligned MIDI files, when no regular quantization grid is provided. For such files the automatic beat tracking algorithm is used which tries to detect the bar positions throughout the piece. 2x less measure count The option is active for unaligned MIDI files (when "Is human performance" is checked by default). It halves measure count obtained in the internal beat tracking operation. It may be convenient when the beat tracking gives 2x more frequent bar subdivision than necessary. Time signature The option is active for unaligned MIDI files. The user can choose an appropriate time signature for the whole piece if the default detected value is wrong. The option is useful because it handles imported tuplets correctly unlike the direct time signature setting from the palette. Split staff This option is suited mainly for piano tracks - to assign notes to the left or right hand of the performer. It uses constant pitch separation (the user may choose the pitch via sub-options) or floating pitch separation (depending on the hand width - sort of a guess from the program point of view). For drum tracks (“Percussion” sound in the track list) it splits the staff into multiple staves, each of which gets only one drum pitch (i.e. drum sound). There is also a sub-option to allow/disallow the application of the square bracket for the newly created set of drum tracks. Clef changes Small clefs can be inserted within a staff to keep chords closer to the 5 staff lines. Clef changes depend on the 184

185 average pitch of the chord. Tied groups of notes are not broken by the clef insertion (if it occurs, one can report a bug for algorithm in ). This option is available for non-drum tracks only. importmidi_clef.cpp Simplify durations Reduces number of rests to form more "simple" note durations. For drum tracks this option can remove rests and lengthen notes as well. Show staccato Option to show/hide staccato markings in the score. Dotted notes Controls whether MuseScore will use dotted notes or ties. Show tempo text Shows/hides tempo text markings in the score. Show chord names Shows/hides chord names in the score, if any, for XF MIDI file format. Recognize pickup measure When enabled, this option doesn't change the time signature of the first bar that is shorter than the second bar. It is also called anacrusis. This option is only available for all tracks at once. Detect swing MuseScore tries to detect swing, and automatically replace a pattern of 4th + 8th notes in triplets (for the most common swing feel, 2:1), or a dotted 8th + 16th pattern (for shuffle, 3:1), with two straight 8ths and a “Swing” or “Shuffle” text at the beginning. Master palette Master Palette is a repository of symbols used to populate the The (Basic, Advanced, and Custom ). It is also workspaces used to create new Time Signatures and Key Signatures . To open, use either of the following options: Press + F9 (Mac: fn Shift Shift + F9 ). + From the menu, select View → Master Palette . The Master palette is divided into sections based on symbol type. Hovering the mouse over an item shows a (a tool tip short definition in black on yellow background). To transfer a Master palette item to a custom palette : Drag the symbol from the Master Palette window into a custom palette. Note : Except for the Symbols section (below), it is not usual to add items directly to the score from the Master palette: use the workspace palettes instead. However, if desired, items can be added directly using either (i) drag-and-drop or (ii) by selecting one or more notes/rests and double-clicking the item. 185

186 Symbols The section of the Master Palette is a large repository of hundreds of musical symbols in addition to those found Symbols workspaces Z . in the preset . You can open it from the Master Palette, or directly from the score by using the shortcut Find a symbol Symbols subcategories can be displayed by clicking on "Symbols". Use the font menu on the bottom right of the box The to specify Emmentaler-, Gonville- or Bravura-specific symbols. You can search for a particular symbol by entering a keyword in the . search box Apply a symbol To add an item to the score from the Symbols section, use any of the following options: Drag and drop a symbol onto a staff. Select a note or rest and double-click a symbol. The position of the symbol can be adjusted by dragging or by changing the horizontal / vertical offsets in the Inspector . Color and visibility can also be adjusted in the Inspector. Note : Elements from the Symbols section do not follow any positioning rules (in many cases unlike identical elements from other sections of the Master Palette), nor do they affect score playback. Connect symbols Elements from the Symbols section can be connected to each other on the score page, so that they can be moved as one unit: 1 Apply first symbol to the score. Adjust position as required. . 2 . Double click, or drag-and-drop, a second element onto the first symbol. Adjust position as required. Drag the first element and the attached element will follow. See also Palettes and workspaces Symbols and special characters (add musical symbols to text objects) Note input modes MuseScore allows you to chose from any of several note input modes. Step-time (see below) is the default, but others can be accessed by clicking the small dropdown arrow next to the note entry button on the note input toolbar . 186

187 Step-time This is the default method of note input and involves entering notes one at a time: first by selecting a note duration using the mouse or keyboard, then choosing a pitch using the mouse, keyboard, MIDI keyboard or virtual piano. For details see Basic note entry . Re-pitch Re-pitch mode allows you to correct the pitches of a sequence of notes while leaving their durations unchanged (not to be confused with ). Accidental: Respell pitches 1 . Select a note as your starting point; Select the Re-Pitch 2 Note input drop-down menu; or use the keyboard shortcut, Ctrl + Shift + I (Mac: . option from the + Shift Cmd I ). + 3 Now enter pitches using the keyboard, MIDI keyboard or virtual piano keyboard . . Re-pitch to create a new passage from an existing one of the same sequence of durations You can also use the function —by copying and pasting the latter, then applying Re-pitch. Rhythm Rhythm mode allows you to enter durations with a single keypress. Combining Rhythm and Re-pitch modes makes for a very efficient method of note entry. . Select your starting point in the score and enter Rhythm mode. 1 . Select a duration from the note input toolbar, or press a duration shortcut (numbers 1-9) on your computer keyboard. 2 Basic note entry , pressing the . key will A note will be added to the score with the selected duration. In contrast to toggle dotting or not dotting all subsequent durations. All following rhythms will be dotted until the . key is pressed again. Unlike Basic note entry , the dot is to be pressed prior to entering the rhythm. . Entering rests is similar to adding dotted notes. Press the key to toggle entering rests. All rhythms entered will be 3 0 0 rests until the key is pressed again. This can be used concurrently with dotted notes. 4 . Continue pressing duration keys to enter notes with the chosen durations. . 5 Re-pitch mode to set the pitches of the notes you just added. Now use Real-time (automatic) The Real-time modes basically allow you to perform the piece on a MIDI keyboard (or MuseScore's virtual piano keyboard ) and have the notation added for you. However, you should be aware of the following limitations which currently apply: It is not possible to use a computer keyboard for Real-time input You cannot enter tuplets or notes shorter than the selected duration You cannot enter notes into more than one voice at a time However, these restrictions mean that MuseScore has very little guessing to do when working out how your input should be notated, which helps to keep the Real-time modes accurate. In the automatic version of Real-time input, you play at a fixed tempo indicated by a metronome click. You can adjust the tempo by changing the delay between clicks from the menu: Edit → Preferences... → Note Input (Mac: MuseScore → Preferences... → Note Input ). 1 . Select your starting position in the score and enter Real-time (automatic) mode. 187

188 2 . Select a duration from the note input toolbar. . Press and hold a MIDI key or virtual piano key (a note will be added to the score). 3 Listen for the metronome clicks. With each click the note grows by the selected duration. . 4 . Release the key when the note has reached the desired length. 5 The score stops advancing as soon as you release the key. If you want the score to continue advancing (e.g. to allow you to enter rests) then you can use the Real-time Advance shortcut to start the metronome. Real-time (manual) In the manual version of Real-time input, you have to indicate your input tempo by tapping on a key or pedal, but you can play at any speed you like and it doesn't have to be constant. The default key for setting the tempo (called "Real-time on the numeric keypad (Mac: fn + Return ), but it is highly recommended that you change this to a MIDI key Enter Advance") is or MIDI pedal (see below ). 1 Select your starting position in the score and enter Real-time (manual) mode. . 2 Select a duration from the note input toolbar. . . 3 Press and hold a MIDI key or virtual piano key (a note will be added to the score). 4 . Press the Real-time Advance key. With each press the note grows by the selected duration. 5 . Release the note when it has reached the desired length. Real-time Advance shortcut The Real-time Advance shortcut is used to tap beats in manual Real-time mode, or to start the metronome clicks in automatic Real-time mode. It is called "Real-time Advance" because it causes the input position to more forward, or "advance", through the score. The default key for Real-time Advance is Enter on the numeric keypad (Mac: + Return ), but it is highly recommended that fn you assign this to a MIDI key or MIDI pedal via MuseScore's MIDI remote control. The MIDI remote control is available from the menu: Edit → Preferences... → Note Input (Mac: MuseScore → Preferences... → Note Input ). Alternatively, if you have a USB footswitch or computer pedal which can simulate keyboard keys, you could set it to simulate Enter on the numeric keypad. When the notes are entered they will be placed just before the selected starting element, which will be highlighted with a square blue marker. The start element and any subsequent notes or rests within the same measure will be shifted → or ← , and the new insertion point forward. You can move the insertion point forward and backward using the arrow keys wil then be highlighted. Insert Input mode (called Timewise Insert in versions prior to 3.0.2) allows you to insert and delete notes and rests within measures, automatically shifting subsequent music forwards or backwards. is automatically updated as Measure duration you go. 1 Make sure you are in Note input mode , and that you have the element selected where you want to start inserting . notes/rests; 2 . Click on the arrow next to the Note input icon, and select Timewise (or if Timewise is the current default, just press N ); . Enter a note or rest as you would in Step-Time 3 mode. Each note is inserted before the current cursor position; 4 . Move the cursor forward and backward if required (using the arrow keys), to change the insertion point. Alternatively, if you have only one or two notes to insert, you may prefer to use a shortcut: Press Ctrl + Shift (Mac: Cmd + Shift ) while adding the note by Mouse-click or keyboard shortcut (A-G). If, at any time, the total duration of the notes and rests within the measure does not match the time signature , a small + or - sign will be shown above the measure. See also: Timewise delete (Tools). 188

189 Normal mode To leave Note Input mode, click on the Note Input tool button, press , or press Esc . This puts you in Normal mode , in N which you can change durations and delete notes or rests as follows: If you select a note and press the note will be replaced by a rest of the same duration. Del Ctrl + Del the note/rest will be deleted, and subsequent notes moved backward If you select a note or rest and press Timewise delete ). (see the remaining duration will be filled with rests. If you reduce the duration of a note or rest If you increase the duration of a note or rest it will subtract duration from the subsequent notes/rests to make up the duration. If this is done on the last note/rest in the measure, a note or rest with the required duration will be inserted in the start of the following measure, and the two will be tied together. See also Note input Copy and paste External links Video: Semi-Realtime MIDI Demo Part 1: New note entry modes Introduction to the new Repitch Mode (YouTube) Notehead scheme You can chose choose any one of nine for a standard staff. To set a notehead scheme: notehead schemes Staff / Part properties Right-click on a staff and select Advanced style properties and chose from the ...; click on "Notehead scheme" dropdown list. The schemes are as follows: Normal : This is the default scheme and the one the vast majority of people will use: it is also the only scheme in MuseScore 1 and 2. It uses normal noteheads which can be changed via the Noteheads palette or the Inspector. : Noteheads automatically and dynamically change to include the English pitch name in the notehead. Pitch name German pitch name : Just like the previous one but B will be replaced by H, and Bb by B. Solfège Movable Do (also called Tonic Solfa) : Noteheads include the solfege syllable, depending on the degree in the scale. It uses Ti and not Si. Solfège Fixed Do : Noteheads include the solfege syllable for the note name. As used in France, Italy, Spain, etc... It uses Si and not Ti. 189

190 4 Shape (Walker) : Noteheads follow the four-shape system used in books such as William Walker’s Southern (1835). Harmony : Noteheads follow the seven-shape system used in books such as Jesse B. Aikin’s The Christian 7 Shape (Aikin) (1846), and books by the Ruebush & Kieffer Publishing Company. It's the most used 7-shape system. Minstrel 7 Shape (Funk) Harmonia Sacra : Noteheads follow the seven-shape system used in books such as Joseph Funk’s (1851). 7 Shape Walker : Noteheads follow the seven-shape system used in books such as William Walker’s Christian Harmony (1867). (For more info about the different variant of SMuFL specification ) shape notes, see the The setting applies to a given staff and the notehead will be used when entering and editing notes. Here is an example. Noteheads A range of alternative noteheads "can be accessed via the Note Heads palette of the Advanced workspace , or the Inspector (see Change notehead group , below). Note : The design of the notehead may vary depending on the music font selected (Emmentaler, Gonville or Bravura). 190

191 Those in the palette are displayed as half notes in Bravura font. Notehead groups MuseScore supports a range of notehead styles: Normal : A standard notehead. Crosshead (Ghost note): Used in percussion notation to represent cymbals. It also indicates muted and/or percussive effects in stringed instruments such as the guitar. : Used to indicate harmonic notes in instruments such as the guitar, violin etc. Diamond Slash : Used to notate rhythms (e.g. guitar strums). Triangle up/down : Used in percussion notation. Shape notes : Do, Re, Mi, Fa, Sol, La, Ti. : Used in percussion notation. Circle cross Circled noteheads Slashed notehead : A notehead with an oblique line through it. Plus noteheads Alt. Brevis : Used in early music notation. (Parentheses): applied around an existing note (or accidental). Brackets Change notehead group To change the of one or more noteheads in the score, use one of the following: shape Select one or more notes and double click a notehead in a palette Drag a notehead from a palette onto a note in the score. Inspector , using the drop-down list under Note → Head Select one or more notes and change the notehead in the (not supported for drum staves). group Change notehead type Occasionally you may need to change the apparent duration of a notehead—i.e. notehead type —without altering its actual , underlying duration: 1 . Select one or more notes. 2 . Inspector under Note → Head type : Chose one of the following options from the : Automatic, i.e, apparent duration = actual duration. Auto : Whole notehead, regardless of actual duration. Whole : Half notehead, regardless of actual duration. Half : Quarter notehead, regardless of actual duration. Quarter Breve : Breve notehead, regardless of actual duration. Shared noteheads When two notes in different voices , but of the same written pitch, fall on the same beat, one of two things may happen: The notes may share the same notehead. offset : i.e. arranged side by side. The notes may be MuseScore follows standard music notation practice as follows: Notes with stems in the same direction do not share noteheads. Dotted notes do not share noteheads with undotted notes. Black notes do not share noteheads with white notes. Whole notes never share noteheads. Note : If two unison notes occur in the same voice they are always offset. Change offset noteheads to shared Offset noteheads can be turned into shared noteheads in one of two ways: Make the smaller-value notehead invisible by selecting it and using the keyboard shortcut V (or unchecking the "Visible" option in the Inspector ). 191

192 Alter the notehead type of the shorter-duration note to match the longer one by switching "Head type" in the "Note" section of the Inspector. Examples of notehead sharing 1 . In the first example below, the notes of voices 1 and 2 share noteheads by default, because they are all black, undotted notes: . 2 By contrast, in the next example, white notes cannot share noteheads with black notes, so are offset to the right: To create a shared notehead, make the black eighth note invisible or change its head type to match that of the white note (as explained above): Remove duplicate fret marks In certain cases, a shared notehead, when pasted to a staff, may result in two separate fret marks on adjacent tablature strings. To correct this, make any extraneous tablature notes invisible by selecting them and using the keyboard shortcut V (or by unchecking the "visible" option in the Inspector). External links Shape notes at Wikipedia. Ghost notes at Wikipedia. Parts MuseScore not only allows you to create and print the full score but also give you the ability to generate parts from the different instruments in your score. You can also associate a part with a specific staff within the instrument or even a specific voice within a specific staff. This allows you to combine multiple parts (e.g., Flute 1 & 2) onto a single staff in the score while still generating separate parts. Create all parts The most straightforward method is to create all parts at once. Parts are generated on a one-to-one basis from the corresponding Instruments in the score: 1 . From the menu, select File → Parts... . 2 . Click the New All button (parts are named with the instrument name, and a number added to differentiate parts that 192

193 have the same label in the main score). 3 Click OK . . The parts can now be accessed by clicking on tabs above the document window. Create specific parts specific parts for only selected instruments (rather than all-at-once): This method allows you to generate . In the Parts window click New to create a "part definition;" 1 2 . In the centre pane, type the words you want to use for the "Part title" (this also serves for the corresponding part of the filename when exporting); . Pick the instrument that you want to appear in your part from the "Instruments in score" pane, and press + to add it 3 to the "Instruments in part" pane. if you wish to create more parts, repeat steps 1 through 3 (above) for each part. 4 . Click OK to save the parts. You have now finished setting up the parts. You do not need to do this again, unless you add or remove an instrument from your full score. Customize parts Once you have generated a part (or all parts), you can select any part at the top and use the controls at the bottom to control not only what instrument is in the part, but also which staves and voices within the instrument are included. 193

194 Add instruments to a part To add instruments to an existing part: . Select the part in the "Parts" pane. 1 Select the instrument from the "Instruments in score" pane. 2 . Press + to add it to the "Instruments in part" pane. 3 . Remove instruments from a part To remove instruments from an existing part: 1 . Select the part in the "Parts" pane. 2 Select the instrument from the "Instruments in part" pane. . 3 Press - to remove the instrument. . Select staves for an instrument To select the staves of an instrument to include in the part: . Select the part in the "Parts" pane. 1 2 . Click the arrow next to the instrument in "Instruments in Part" to expand the listing to show all staves and voices of the instrument. 3 . Select the staff to be removed. 4 . - to remove it from the instrument. Press Select voices for an instrument 1 Select the part in the "Parts" pane. . 2 . Click the arrow next to the instrument in "Instruments in Part" to expand the listing to show all staves and voices of the instrument. 3 . Uncheck the voices to be removed. Note: If you select only voice 1 for a given staff, then only the content in voice 1 for that staff will be included in the part. Thus, in order to share flute 1 & 2 on the same staff, you will need to enter all notes onto both voices, even in passages where they share content. You also cannot enter the two parts as chords in the passages where they share rhythms. Delete a Part 1 . Open the Parts dialog ( File → Parts... ); 194

195 2 . Select the relevant Part in the "Parts" pane; . Press . 3 Delete Export the parts . File → 1 Export Parts... ; From the menu, select Navigate to the place you want them to be exported to and select the file format (PDF is the default); . 2 3 . For filename just enter whatever prefix is useful for all parts, or leave the default (the filename of your score); . Click OK 4 . This will generate files with the names "" + "-" + "<part name>.<extension>". In addition, when exporting as PDF, this will also generate "<title>" + "-Score_And_Parts.pdf". Save the parts Parts and score are "linked", which means that any change to the content in one will affect the other, but changes to the layout will not. When you have the parts created, they are saved along with the score (if you open the score you have tabs for the score and every part you created). However, if you wish to save a part individually: 1 . Make sure the part is "active." Select its tab if not; . From the menu, select 2 → Save As... . File Print a part 1 . Make sure the part is "active." Select its tab if not; 2 . From the menu, select File → Print to open the print dialog. Plugins What are Plugins? Plugins are small pieces of software that add a particular feature to MuseScore. By enabling a plugin, a new menu option is appended to the Plugins menu : subsequently, when this option is selected, the plugin performs a particular task in the score. Plugins installed by default Some plugins come pre-installed with MuseScore—see (below). You can find many more plugins in the plugin repository : some work with MuseScore 3, others only with older versions of MuseScore, and some work with either. To tell one from the other: MuseScore 3.x and 2.x plugin code files have an extension of ; for older .qml versions, it is .js . Installation Note : Some plugins may require the installation of other components (fonts, e.g.) to work. Check the plugin's documentation for more information. Most plugins are provided as ZIP archives: download the plugin's .zip file and uncompress (unzip) it to one of the directories mentioned below (depending on your OS). If the plugin is provided directly as an uncompressed .qml file, simply download it and place into one of the same directories. Once a plugin is installed, it needs to be enabled in the in order to use it—see Enable/disable Plugins . Plugin Manager Windows %ProgramFiles%\MuseScore 3\Plugins (or %ProgramFiles(x86)%\MuseScore 3\Plugins for MuseScore looks for pre-installed plugins in the 32-bit versions) and in %LOCALAPPDATA%\MuseScore\MuseScore 3\plugins on Windows 7 and later. New plugins should not be installed in the above folders, and neither should the folders be modified. Instead add new plugins to %HOMEPATH%\Documents\MuseScore3\Plugins ; alternatively, specify a different folder to look for plugins in MuseScore's Preferences . macOS 195</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">196</span> On macOS, MuseScore looks for pre-installed plugins in the MuseScore bundle in /Applications/MuseScore (to reveal files in the app bundle, right click on MuseScore 3.app and choose "Show package 3.app/Contents/Resources/plugins ~/Library/Application Support/MuseScore/MuseScore 3/plugins . contents"), and in New plugins should not be installed in the above folders, and neither should the folders be modified. Instead add new ~/Documents/MuseScore3/Plugins ; alternatively, specify a different folder to look for plugins in MuseScore's plugins to . Preferences Linux In Linux, MuseScore looks for plugins in /usr/share/mscore-3.0/plugins and in ~/.local/share/data/MuseScore/MuseScore 2/plugins . New plugins should not be installed in the above folders, and neither should the folders be modified. Instead add new plugins to ; alternatively, specify a different folder to look for plugins in MuseScore's ~/Documents/MuseScore3/Plugins Preferences . Enable/disable plugins To be able to access the installed plugins from the Plugins menu, they need to be enabled in the Plugin Manager : You do this simply by checking the appropriate tick box. This adds the name of the plugin to the list in the Plugins menu . Create/edit/run plugins It is possible to create new or edit existing plugins and run them via the Plugin Creator : Documentation of all available elements can also be found here. 196</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">197</span> Plugins installed by default Some plugins come pre-installed with MuseScore, but they are not enabled by default. See Enable/disable plugins (above) to enable plugins. ABC Import ABC text from a file or the clipboard and converts it to MusicXML . Internet connection is required, This plugin imports because it uses an external web-service for the conversion. → Color Notes Notes This demo plugin colors notes in the selected range (or the entire score), depending on their pitch. It colors the note head of all notes in all staves and voices according to the Boomwhackers convention. Each pitch has a different color. C and C ♯ ♯ and D ♭ have a different color. C have the same color. To color all the notes in black, just run that plugin again (on the same selection). You could also use the 'Remove Notes Color' plugin for this. Create Score This demo plugin creates a new score. It creates a new piano score with 4 quarter notes: C, D, E, F. It's a good start to learn how to make a new score and add notes from a plugin. helloQml This demo plugin demonstrates some basic tasks. Notes Note Names → staff text ) This plugin names notes in a selected range or for the entire score. It displays the names of the notes (as language settings : voices 1 and 3 notes above the staff; voices 2 and 4 notes below the staff; according to MuseScore's and chord notes in a comma separated list, starting with the top note. Panel This demo plugin creates a GUI panel. random/random2 Creates a random score. run This demo plugin runs an external command. Probably this will only work on Linux. scorelist This test plugin iterates through the score list. ScoreView Demo plugin to demonstrate the use of a ScoreView Walk This test plugin walks through all elements in a score See also Tools External links 197</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">198</span> Plugins for 3.x Preferences Edit → (Mac: MuseScore → Preferences... ). Preferences... You can customize many of MuseScore's default behaviors via the menu: The Preferences dialog has multiple tabs: will reset all preferences to the ones MuseScore had when you installed it. Ok will save the Reset All Preferences to Default Cancel will close the dialog without applying changes. settings and close the dialog. will make changes take effect Apply without closing the dialog. General Here you can define: : Tick the boxes as appropriate to specify which score and what panels Program Start Play Panel , Navigator , Start ( Center ) you want to see when MuseScore opens. Also select if Tours will be active. Folders : Specify the default folders for score files, , custom score templates , plugins , additional style files and images . SoundFonts Language : Chose the language used by the program. Translations may be updated from here too. Note that language translation updates can also be done via the menu: Help → Resource Manager . Theme : Specify a dark or light theme and the size of icons. Icon width / Icon height Font / Font size Auto Save : How frequently the program autosaves. OSC Remote Control Canvas 198</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">199</span> Use Canvas to set your preferred color and wallpaper for the score background and paper. The default "Background" is grey (RGB 221, 221, 221; Alpha 221) and the default "Paper," white. Background : Use this to set the color or background around the score pages. Select "Color" then click on the bar to the right and make a choice from the color picker; or select "Wallpaper," click on the file icon and set a background image. Paper : Sets the color or background of the score pages. Controls identical to "Background" (above). Scroll Pages : This defines the way that the pages are layed out in the score. Chose "Horizontally" for a row layout, or "Vertically" for a column layout. : "Draw antialiased" (the default option) makes diagonal lines and edges of shapes look smoother. Miscellaneous "Proximity for selecting elements" controls the distance the mouse may be from an object and still act on it. Smaller numbers require more precision, making it harder to click on small objects. Larger numbers are less precise, making it harder not to click on nearby objects unintentionally. Choose a comfortable working value. Note input 199</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">200</span> On this tab there are note input and MIDI remote control preferences. Here the following can be set: Note Input : Leave checked to allow MIDI input of notes. Enable MIDI Input Coloring of notes outside an instrument's range and Color notes outside of usable pitch range : For details, see Usable pitch range (Staff properties: all staves). Delay between notes in automatic real-time mode : See Real-time (automatic) . : When ticked, MuseScore Play notes when editing the note when it is entered or selected. Tick "Play sounds whole chord when adding note," if you want to hear the notes of a chord when it is added to. You can also edit the all "Default duration". MIDI Remote Control Midi Remote Control and to select note allows you to use certain keys on your MIDI keyboard to enter notes and rests durations, without involving the computer mouse or (computer) keyboard. The default setting is off. To assign a command to a MIDI key : 1 . Ensure that "MIDI Remote Control" is checked (your MIDI keyboard should be connected befor opening the program). 2 Click the red button next to the option you wish to assign a MIDI key to: the red button now lights up. . . Press a MIDI keyboard key. The red button becomes unlit and the green button lights up instead. The MIDI key has 3 now been assigned to the desired option. 4 . Repeat "2" and "3" to assign other keys. Once you have defined your key settings you can use the MIDI keyboard to control note input operations. You can verify your key settings by observing the MuseScore Note Input toolbar while pressing the MIDI keys. To temporarily deactivate Midi Remote Control: uncheck "Midi Remote Control": all MIDI input key action buttons are now Note : Your key assignments are always saved between MuseScore sessions and are not affected by greyed out. deactivation. Notes : (1) The "Clear" option turns off all the green buttons for the current MuseScore session but all the user-recorded MIDI key settings are retained and will be reloaded on the next session. (2) A MIDI key setting that is activated cannot afterwards be turned off, and the green button will always remain lit: however it can be overwritten with a different MIDI key by using the red button again. (3) If the same MIDI key is accidentally assigned to more than one option, then all the associated green buttons remain lit although only one will work. To fix, see "(2)". 200</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">201</span> Score Score preferences include Default instrument list files (two may be selected) Default style for score and parts Default zoom I/O API / Device 201</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">202</span> This enables you to set the audio interface (API) and specify the device to be used for audio playback: e.g. built-in speakers/headphones, USB headset, wireless, etc. MIDI Input/Output/Output Latency When an external MIDI input device is connected, its identifier appears in . When the device is connected for MIDI Input the first time MIDI Output option in order to enable note input and correct audio , you also need to select the correct playback (e.g. in Windows, this might be "MMS<device name>"): then close and reopen the program to confirm the changes. Jack Audio Server JACK Audio Connection Kit. Check these options as required if using the Import These settings determine how files from other sources are imported: Using either the built in MuseScore style or a style you choose Guitar Pro and Overture character sets MusicXML layout options Shortest note in MIDI files Export 202</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">203</span> These settings determine how various files are exported from MuseScore: : PNG/SVG image resolution (in DPI) and whether to use transparent background. PNG MIDI : Whether to expand repeats in exported MIDI files. Audio : Set audio sample rate, MP3 bitrate, and whether to normalise exported audio. MusicXML : Whether to export the layout and how to export system and page breaks to MusicXML. Shortcuts Every action possible with MuseScore is listed, with the associated shortcut if it exists. To define a new shortcut, select an existing entry in the list and click Define... (or just double click the entry), then enter the new shortcut using up to four keys. You can also reset any shortcut in the list to its default value, or clear a shortcut you select. Shortcuts listed in preferences 203</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">204</span> appear next to their associated commands in the menus. Some shortcuts, including default ones, may not work with some keyboards. Note: You may Save the list of shortcuts to a file of your own choice, and Load it later, making it easy to work with different shortcut settings for different purposes. The list of shortcuts can be printed out or exported to other media (pdf etc.) using the Print button in the bottom right of the window. Update This sets whether MuseScore will check for updates and extensions at startup. Updates may be checked manually in Help → Check for updates . Advanced 204</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">205</span> Allows you to control specific settings for "application, "export", "i/o" and "user interface", as well as color settings for the Piano Roll Editor. See also Keyboard shortcuts Language settings and translation updates Update checking Recovered files If MuseScore or your computer should crash, or if power is lost, a pop-up message upon restarting MuseScore will ask if you wish to restore the previous session: Click Yes , to initiate attempted recovery of files from the interrupted session. Or click No to ignore message. Saving after session recovery When MuseScore recovers files after a crash, it renames them with the full path name added in front of the original file name. This very long name will appear in the tab(s) above the active score window. To ensure that the file is saved in its original location . you should immediately save the restored file using the "Save As..." option: this will open a window to allow you to navigate to the correct folder and directory. If you use the "Save" command instead, the file will be saved in its current location which is unlikely to be the original one. Finding recovered files In the event that "Save" is used instead of "Save As..." with a recovered file, you will have to find the files in your computer. The actual location of those files will vary, depending on your operating system, and in which directory MuseScore is 205</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">206</span> installed. For Windows 7, with a default installation of MuseScore to the x86 program files directory, recovered files are auto-saved C:\Program Files (x86)\MuseScore 2\bin (actually ). to %ProgramFiles(x86)%\MuseScore 2\bin C:\Users\[User Name]\AppData\Local\VirtualStore\Program Files (x86)\MuseScore 2\bin For Windows 10, look in (actually %LOCALAPPDATA%\VirtualStore\%ProgramFiles(x86):~3%\MuseScore 2\bin ). You may need to run a system-wide search in order to find files saved directly after a session recovery. Use keywords from the original file name as well as wildcards, and specify the date modified. See also Save/Export/Print External links How to recover a backup copy of a score Score Comparison Score Comparison Tool The allows you to compare two versions of a score to find the differences between them. Introduction To open the Score Comparison Tool: From the menu, select → Score Comparison Tool . View The dialog opens below the document window and consists of three sections (left to right): Chose scores to compare : Select the scores you want to compare. Diff mode : Select how to view the comparison. : A line by line comparison of the scores is displayed. Comparison Select score The first step is to select the score. Use the combo box next to "Score 1" to choose between the currently open scores, or click on the button to open the File Explorer and select a score from disk. Secondly, use the next combo box on the Browse right to choose whether the first score should be the current version, or the last saved version. Score 2 is set to the same score you selected for Score 1, but you may choose another of the open scores. When you have selected the scores and versions press Compare to do the comparison. Choose view Diff mode : this displays the differences between the scores in a human- "Intelligent comparison" is the default option in readable format (e.g. "Measure 1: Note: property pitch changed from B4 to C5"). Change the Diff Mode selection to "Raw" if you prefer to see the results displayed in XML code. View comparison When you press Compare a list of differences will be displayed to the right, and the score view will automatically change to 206</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">207</span> Documents Stacked. In the Comparison section, double-click on a difference from the list and both score views will automatically pan to show you the changed element, which will also be highlighted. Leave comparison and "Documents Stacked" in the View To exit the Score Comparison tool, turn off the two options "Score Comparison Tool" menu. Example Below you will see two small scores with a few differences between them. Last saved: Current: The result of the comparison will look like this: Score properties The Score Properties dialog contains document meta tags such as "workTitle," "Composer," "Copyright" etc. To view the dialog: 1 . Make sure that the applicable score or instrument part is the active tab; 2 . From the menu, select File → Score Properties . Several meta tags are generated automatically when you create a score using the , and others may be New Score Wizard added later. Meta tags can also be incorporated into a header or footer if required—see below . Edit meta tags 1 . Make sure that the applicable score or instrument part is the active tab; 2 . From the menu, select File → Score Properties ; 207</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">208</span> 3 . Edit the text of the various meta tags as required; . To add another meta tag, click on the button. Fill in the "New tag name" field and press OK ; 4 New Pre-existing meta tags Every score displays the following fields in : Score Properties File Path : The score file's location on your Computer. MuseScore Version : The version of MuseScore the score was last saved with. : The revision of MuseScore the score was last saved with. Revision API-Level : The file format version. : (empty) arranger : This is initially set to the same text as "Composer" on the first page of the New Score Wizard . composer : This is initially set to the same text as "Copyright" on the first page of the copyright . New Score Wizard creationDate : Date of the score creation. This could be empty, if the score was saved in test mode (see Command line options ). lyricist : This is initially set to the same text as "Lyricist" on the first page of the New Score Wizard . movementNumber : (empty) : (empty) movementTitle : This tag exists only if the score is imported (see file formats ). originalFormat platform : The computing platform the score was created on. This might be empty if the score was saved in test mode. : (empty) poet source : May contain a URL if the score was downloaded from or saved to MuseScore.com . translator : (empty) workNumber : (empty) workTitle New Score Wizard . : This is initially set to the same text as "Title" on the first page of the Entering Work / Movement / Part metadata workNumber is the number of the larger work (e.g. 8—for "The Four Seasons," Op. 8, by Vivaldi). workTitle is the title of the larger work (e.g "The Four Seasons,"). movementNumber is the number of the movement in the larger work (e.g. 3 for Autumn). movementTitle is the title of the movement in the larger work (e.g.“Autumn”). It is customary, when using the New Score Wizard, to create a work with the movementTitle as title (even though it ends 208</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">209</span> up in workTitle then) and, directly after creating the score, amending this information in the Score Properties dialogue. part Every additionally has the following meta tag, generated and filled on part creation: partName : The name of the part as given on part creation (which is also used to fill the corresponding part name be aware that later changes to one are not reflected in the other text in the top vertical frame— ). Header/Footer To show the content of one or more meta tags in a header or footer for your score/part: 1 . Make sure that the correct score or instrument part is the active tab; 2 . From the menu, select Format → Style... → Header, Footer : If you hover with your mouse over the Header or Footer text region, a list of macros will appear, showing their meaning, as well as the existing meta tags and their content. 3 . Add tags (e.g. $:workTitle: ) and macros (e.g. $M ) to the appropriate boxes, as required; 4 . Click Apply to see how the header or footer looks in the score. Make corrections to the dialog if required; 5 If an instrument part is in the active tab, click Apply to all parts , if you want to apply these settings to all the score parts; . 6 . Click OK to assign the header or footer and exit the dialog. See also 209</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">210</span> Layout and formatting: Header and footer Command line options: Test mode Staff / Part properties The dialog allows you to make changes to the display of a staff , adjust its tuning and Staff / Part Properties transposition, change instrument etc. To open: Staff/Part Properties... . Right-click on a staff and select Properties dialog, as of version 3.0 . Staff / Part Staff Types For practical purposes, there are four different types of staff: 1a. Standard staff I . A pitched staff used for most instruments except fretted, plucked-string ones. 1b. Standard staff II . A pitched staff containing a fretted, plucked-string instrument , with options to set the number of instrument strings and tuning. Tablature staff . A staff containing a fretted, plucked-string instrument , which displays music as a series of fret-marks on 2. strings. Also contains options to set the number of instrument strings and tuning. 3. Percussion staff . A pitched staff for percussion instruments. It is possible to change one type of staff into another using the Instruments dialog, as long as the original staff is loaded with the right instrument. For example, in order to change a standard staff to tablature, it must contain a plucked-string instrument. Similarly, to change a standard staff to a percussion staff you need to ensure that it has an appropriate percussion instrument loaded and so on. Most options in the Staff / Part properties dialog are common to all staves, but each type also has one or two specific options of its own. Staff / Part Properties: all staves The following Staff Properties options are common to all staves: Lines The number of lines making up the staff. 210</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">211</span> Line Distance The distance between two staff lines, measured in (abbr.: sp ). Note : It is not recommended to change this value spaces Page Settings dialog instead. from the default shown. If you need to make the staff larger or smaller, use the Extra distance above staff in all systems Note : This setting does . Increases or decreases the distance between the selected staff and the one above not apply to the top staff of a system, which is controlled by the minimum/maximum system distance (see Layout and formatting: Format → Page ). → Style ... Extra distance above staff " directly from the score page: Alternatively, you can alter the " Shift key. 1. Press and hold the 2. Click on an empty space in a staff and drag it up or down with the mouse. Notes one staff line in a particular system, see Breaks and Spacers . : To alter the spacing above just Scale Changes the size of the staff and all associated elements, as a percentage (to adjust the overall score size, use selected from the Format → Page Settings... menu). Scaling Hide when empty Together with the "Hide empty staves" setting in Format → Style ... → Score , this determines if the staff will be hidden when it is empty. Possible values: Auto (default): The staff will be hidden if it is empty and "Hide empty staves" is set. Always : The staff will be hidden when empty, even if "Hide empty staves" is not set. : The staff will never be hidden when empty. Never Instrument : For instruments containing multiple staves, the staff is hidden only if all staves for that instrument are empty. Show clef Whether the staff clef will be shown. Show time signature Whether the staff time signature(s) will be shown or not. Show barlines Whether the staff barlines will be shown. Hide system barline Show/hide barline at left-hand edge of the staff. Do not hide if system is empty Format → Style Never hide this staff, even if the entire system is empty. This overrules any "Hide empty staves" setting in → Score . ... Small staff Create a reduced-size staff. You can set the default from the menu in Format → Style ... → Sizes . Invisible staff lines Make staff lines invisible. Staff line color Use a color picker to change the color of the staff lines. Cutaway Used to create a cutaway staff in which only measures containing notes are visible (e.g. ossias (Wikipedia); or cutaway scores). This can be used independently of "Hide when empty" or "Hide empty staves". Instrument The instrument loaded in the Instruments ( I ) or Select Instrument dialog. The sound associated with this instrument can be changed, if desired, in the . Mixer Part name The name of the part. This is also displayed in the Mixer and the Instruments dialog ( I ). 211</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">212</span> Long instrument name Name displayed to the left of the staff in the first system of the score. The long instrument name may also be edited as a text object Text editing ). directly (see Short instrument name Name displayed to the left of the staff in subsequent systems of the score. The short instrument name may also be edited directly (see Text editing ). Editing affects all occurrences in the score. as a text object Usable pitch range : Notes outside this range will be colored olive green/dark yellow in the score. Amateur Professional : Notes outside this range will be colored red in the score. : From the menu, select To disable out-of-range coloration of notes → Preferences... (Mac: MuseScore → Preferences... ), Edit click on the "Note Input" tab, and uncheck "Color notes outside of usable pitch range." Coloring of notes outside an instrument's range See also, . Transpose written pitches to sound This option ensures that the staves of transposing instruments display music at the correct written pitch. Set the transpose in term of a musical interval (plus octave if required) up or down. Navigation arrows ↑ and ↓ buttons, at the bottom left of the Staff Properties window, to navigate to the previous or next staff. Use the Staff / Part Properties: plucked strings only Staves of fretted, plucked-string instruments have a few extra options in addition to those listed above , Number of strings Displays the number of instrument strings. Edit String Data... This button opens a dialog box which allows you to set the number and tuning of strings. See . Change string tuning Advanced Style Properties Clicking the Advanced Style Properties... button opens a window giving access to advanced display options for the staff. These staff type will vary depending on the chosen: see the relevant sections below for details. Template At the bottom of the Advanced Style Properties dialog there are a number of buttons which allow you to easily change the following: The number of lines displayed by a percussion staff . The staff type of a plucked-string instrument . For example, you can change from standard staff to tablature and vice versa, or select from a number of tablature options. 1 . Make a selection from the drop-down list labelled "Template"; 2 Press < Reset to Template ; . 3 . Press OK to accept the changes and exit the dialog (or Cancel to cancel the operation). Standard and Percussion staff options Show clef / time signature / barlines / key signature / ledger lines Option to turn the display of these elements ON or OFF. Stemless If checked, staff notes will have no stem, hook or beam. Notehead scheme See Notehead scheme . Tablature staff options 212</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">213</span> Upside down If not checked, the top tablature line will refer to the highest string, and the bottom tablature line to the lowest string (this is the most most common option). If checked, the top tablature line refers to the lowest string, and the bottom tablature line to the highest line (e.g. Italian-style lute tablatures). For example: . 'Upside down' tablature Tablature staff options: Fret Marks Fret marks are the numbers or letters used to indicate the location of notes on the fingerboard. The following group of properties define the appearance of fret marks: Font The font used to draw fret marks. 8 fonts are provided supporting all the necessary symbols in 8 different styles (modern Serif, modern Sans, Renaissance, Phalèse, Bonneuil-de Visée, Bonneuil-Gaultier, Dowland, Lute Didactic). Size Font size of fret marks in typographic points. Built-in fonts usually look good at a size of 9-10pt. Vertical offset MuseScore tries to place symbols in a sensible way and you do not usually need to alter this value (set to 0) for built-in fonts. If the font has symbols not aligned on the base line (or in some other way MuseScore does not expect), this property allows you to move fret-marks up (negative offsets) or down (positive offsets) for better vertical positioning. Values are in sp . Marks are Choice of Numbers (‘1’, ‘2’...) or Letters (‘a’, ‘b’...) as fret marks. When letters are used, ‘j’ is skipped and ‘k’ is used for the 9th fret. Marks are drawn Choice of placing fretmarks On lines or Above lines . For example: Fretmark letters placed above line . Lines are Choice of Continuous (lines pass through fret marks) or Broken (a small space appears in the line where the fretmark is displayed). For example: . Tablature with lines broken Show back-tied fret marks If unticked, only the first note in a series of tied notes is displayed. If ticked, all notes in the tied series are displayed. Show fingering in tablature Tick to allow the display of fingering symbols applied from a palette . Tablature staff options: Note Values 213</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">214</span> This group of properties defines the appearance of the symbols indicating note values. Font The font used to draw the value symbols. Currently 5 fonts are provided supporting all the necessary symbols in 5 different styles (modern, Italian tablature, French tablature, French baroque (headless), French baroque). Used only with option. the Note symbols Size Note symbols option. Font size, in typographic points. Built-in fonts usually look good at a size of 15pt. Used only with the Vertical offset Applies only when Note symbols is selected (see below). Use negative offset values to raise the note value symbols, positive values to lower them. Shown as: None : No note value will be drawn (as in the examples above) Note symbols : Symbols in the shape of notes will be drawn above the staff. When this option is selected, symbols only are drawn when the note value changes, without being repeated (by default) for a sequence of notes all of the same value. E.g. : Note stems and beams (or hooks) will be drawn. Values are indicated for each note, using the Stems and beams same typographic devices as for a regular staff; all commands of the standard Beam Palette can be applied to these beams too. E.g. Repeat: If several notes in sequence have the same duration, you can specify if and where to repeat the same note symbol. i.e. Never At new system At new measure Always Note Shown as: Note symbols " is selected (see above). : This option is only available if " Stem style: Beside staff : Stems are drawn as fixed height lines above/below the staff. : Stems run through the staff to reach the fret marks. Through staff Note : This option is only available when " Shown as: Stems and Beams " is selected (see above). Stem position: Above : Stems and beams are drawn above the staff. Below : Stems and beams are drawn below the staff. Note : This option is only available when " Shown as: Stems and Beams " and " Stem style: Beside staff " is selected (see above). Half notes: None As short stems As slashed stems 214</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">215</span> Note : This option is only available when " and " Stem style: Beside staff " is selected (see Shown as: Stems and Beams above). Show rests Whether note symbols should be used to indicate also the rests; when used for rests, note symbols are drawn at a slightly option. lower position. Used only with the Note symbols Preview Displays a short score in tablature format with all the current parameters applied. Change instrument You can change any instrument in a score to a different instrument at any time. The following method updates instrument sound, staff name, and staff transposition all at once. . Right-click on an empty part of any measure OR on the instrument name and choose Staff Properties... ; 1 . Click on Change Instrument... (under "Part Properties"); 2 . OK to return to the Staff Properties dialog; 3 Choose your new instrument and click . Click 4 again to return to the score. OK Not to be confused with Mid-staff instrument change . External links How to turn a staff into an ossia . Staff Type Change You can change the appearance of a staff mid-score, by adding a Staff Type Change element to a measure, and adjust Staff properties Inspector . various of the using the Add a Staff Type Change View → Palettes Open the palette panel from Open the Text palette Add a Staff Type Change symbol to a measure Select the symbol, and adjust any of the properties in the Inspector Staff Type Change properties When you change a property of the Staff Type Change the new value will take precedence over the global Staff properties . Changes to global properties that can be modified by a Staff Type Change, will only be valid from the start of the score until the first Staff Type change, while gobal properties, that can not be change in Staff Change Properties will be valid throughout the score. The properties that cn be changed in a Staff Type Change are: Offset Y How far the changed staff shall be moved up or down measured in spaces (abbr.: sp) . Small Whether or not the staff shall be a reduced-size staff. Scale Changes the size of the staff and all associated elements, as a percentage. Lines The number of lines making up the staff. Line distance The distance between two staff lines, measured in spaces (abbr.: sp) . Step offset 215</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">216</span> How much the notes in the staff is offset vertically relative to the staff lines. Show barlines Whether the staff barlines will be shown. Show ledger lines Whether ledger lines will be shown for notes above/below the staff lines. Slash style Whether the notes shall be shown in standard or slash style. Notehead scheme Allows selection of how noteheads are displayed. Generate clefs Whether the staff clef will be shown. Generate time signatures Whether the staff time signature(s) will be shown or not. Generate key signatures Whether the staff key signatures will be shown or not. Example To illustrate the use of Staff Type Change the staff shown be low wa created by doing these steps: Add a Staff Type Change to measure no. 2. Set size to "Small". Set "Lines" to 4. Add a secong Staff Type Change to measure no. 3. Change "Lines" to 7, Afwards the global Staff Properties are changed using Staff properties ; Set "Lines" to 2. Change "Staff Line Color". As can be seen the change in "Lines" only take effect until the first Staff Type Change, whereas the change to "Staff Line Color" takes effect throughout the score. Timeline Introduction The timeline was developed as part of the Google Summer of Code 2017, and is included for the first time in MuseScore 3.0. Overview The timeline is a navigation tool that displays an abstraction of the score to the order of measure numbers and instrument 216</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">217</span> names. There are four parts to the timeline: Meta labels This is found in the top left corner of the timeline. These are the names of the meta rows. Instrument labels This is found in the bottom left corner of the timeline. These are the names of the rows in the main grid. Meta rows This is found in the top right corner of the timeline. These hold the meta values of the score. Main grid This is found in the bottom right corner of the timeline. This holds multiple 'cells' (a specific measure and staff in the score represented as a square) Meta Meta are elements found on the score that are not notes, but are still important to the score (key signature, time signature, tempo, rehearsal marks, bar lines, and jumps and markers). Basic interaction Select a measure To select a measure in the timeline, press the mouse button on the cell. A blue box will appear around the selected cell and the respective measure in the score will be selected. The score view will place the selected measure in view. Select multiple measures Drag selection Holding Shift and holding the left mouse button and dragging the mouse over the main grid will create a selection box. Upon releasing the mouse button, all the cells underneath the selection box will be selected, as well as all the measures in the score. [Shift] selection If a cell is already selected, holding Shift and selecting another cell in the timeline will stretch the selection to that new cell, similar to how the score does [Ctrl] selection If no cells are currently selected, holding Ctrl and selecting a cell will select the entire measure Clearing selection To clear selection, holding Ctrl and clicking anywhere on the grid or the meta rows will clear any current selection. Meta values selection Selecting the meta values on the timeline will attempt to select the respective meta values in the score. Scrolling 217</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">218</span> Standard scrolling Scrolling the mouse wheel up or down will move the grid and instrument labels down or up respectively. The meta labels and rows do not move. [Shift] scrolling Shift and scrolling the mouse wheel up or down will move the grid and meta rows left or right respectively. The Holding meta labels and instrument labels do not move. [Alt] scrolling Alt and scrolling the mouse wheel up or down will move the grid and meta rows left or right respectively, faster Holding Shift scrolling. The meta labels and instrument labels do not move. than Dragging To drag the contents of the timeline, hold the left mouse button and move it around. Labels interaction Rearranging meta labels All meta labels besides the measures meta may be rearranged in any way. By moving the mouse cursor onto one of the meta labels, small up and down arrows will appear. Click the left mouse button on the up arrow to swap the meta label with the one above it. Click the left mouse button on the down arrow to swap the meta label with the one below it. Collapsing the meta labels In order to hide all the meta labels while keeping all the meta information on the timeline, there is an arrow that appears on the measures meta when the mouse is over it. Click the left mouse button on the large up arrow to collapse all the currently visible meta rows into one row, where the meta values are staggered in that row. Click the left mouse button on the large down arrow to expand the meta rows again. Hiding instruments All instruments--hidden or not--will be displayed on the timeline. To start this interaction, the mouse cursor is moved over an instrument label. A small eye will appear on the right side of the label that is open if the instrument is visible on the score, and closed if the instrument is hidden. Click the left mouse button on the eye to toggle between the two options. Zooming To zoom in or out of the score, hold Ctrl and scroll the mouse wheel up or down respectively. Context menus To bring up a context menu, right click on the timeline. There are three context menus found in these locations: meta labels, instrument labels, and meta rows. Meta labels context menu 218</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">219</span> Upon clicking the right mouse button on the meta labels, a context menu appears that displays all possible meta labels as well as two options: "Hide all" and "Show all." Next to each meta label in the menu, there is a check box that shows if the meta label is currently being shown on the timeline. To show or hide one of the meta labels, select the box of the meta label in the context menu. Selecting "Hide all" will hide all meta labels except for the measures meta. Selecting "Show all" will display all meta labels. Meta rows context menu Clicking the right mouse button on the meta rows will display the same context menu as the meta labels. Instrument context menu Clicking the right mouse button on the instrument labels will display a context menu with the option to "Edit Instruments." Selecting this will bring you to the same dialog as Edit > Instruments... or pressing I for the shortcut. Tools menu. A number of useful commands can be found in the Tools Transpose Transpose dialog with various options for transposing passages of music. This opens the See Automatic transposition . Explode explode The in a single staff and split (explode) the chords into their command allows you to select a passage of music constituent notes or voices as follows: If the passage is all in voice 1, the top note of the chord is retained on the originating staff, while the lower notes are moved to subsequent staves. voices , voice 1 notes are retained on the originating staff, while other voices are If the passage contains multiple moved to subsequent staves. All exploded voices are now in voice 1. To explode a section of the score : . 1 Ensure that there are enough staves underneath the source staff to receive the exploded notes. Create extra staves if necessary using the Instruments dialog. 2 . Chose one of two options: Select a range of measures in the source staff: this allows all notes to be exploded if there are enough staves available. Select a range of measures that includes both the source staff and also extends downwards to include one or more destination staves: This limits the number of exploded notes/voices to the number of selected staves. 3 Chose Tools → Explode . . Notes : (1) If the selection is all in voice 1, MuseScore will discard the lowest note(s) of any chord that contains more notes than the number of staves in the selection. (2) If the selection is all in voice 1, and If a given chord has fewer notes than the number of destination staves, then notes will be duplicated as needed so that every staff receives a note. (3) Any existing music in the destination staves is overwritten. (4) If you select a partial measure, the explode command will automatically expand it to a full measure. Implode The Implode command works in the opposite way to "explode": With one staff selected, all notes in voices 1–4 are combined into voice 1. With multiple staves selected, the notes in the second staff are copied to the first available voice in the top staff , the notes in the are copied to the next available voice in the top staff and so on. third staff Apply implode to a single staff 1 . Select a range of measures in the desired staff. 2 . Chose Tools → Implode . 219</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">220</span> All selected notes in the staff are now displayed in voice 1. Apply implode to multiple staves . Ensure that there is only one voice in each staff. 1 Select destination staff and extend this selection downwards to include the other staves 2 . a range of measures in the to be imploded. Chose Tools → Implode . 3 . Voices Exchange voices This allows you to swap the voices of a selected measure-range of notes. See . Measure Measure operations: Split and join . Join or split measures. See Timewise delete This command is used to completely remove an element, or range of elements from the score. : To remove measures (including partial measures) . 1 range of notes/rests , or a range of measures ; Select a . 2 Use one of the following methods: Press Ctrl + Delete . Tools → Timewise Delete Select . Note : If the selected range includes only part of a measure, the result will include a measure of smaller duration than the indicated Time Signature . This is indicated by a small - (minus) sign just above the system. To join measures : 1 . Select (i.e. click on) a barline; 2 . Use one of the following methods: Ctrl Delete . Press + Select Tools → Timewise Delete . Delete and Timewise Delete The following table is a comparative summary of the single commands when applied to elements: Selected Apply Delete Apply Timewise Delete Element Note Removes score section Replaces with rest Rest (voice 1) No effect Removes score section Rest (voices 2-4) Deletes rest Removes score section Deletes barline and joins Barline No effect measures Replaces contents with Measure Removes measure rest Note insert notes, see Timewise . : To Fill with slashes This command fills the selection with slashes, one per beat: . Select one or more measures; 1 2 . From the menu, select Tools → Fill With Slashes . If a measure is empty the slashes are added to voice 1, full-sized and centered on the middle line of the staff: 220</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">221</span> Notes : (1) If there are already notes in a measure in the selection, the command will put the slashes into the first . (2) Voice 2 slashes are full-sized and centered on the middle line of the staff; voices 3 slashes available empty voice below and the staff; voice 4 slashes are small appear above the staff. (3) If a measure contains notes in all 4 small and voices, voice 1 will be overwritten. (4) All slashes are set to not transpose or playback. Toggle rhythmic slash notation This command toggles selected notes between normal notes and rhythmic slash notation: 1 . a range of notes or measures ( Note : use the selection filter if you need to exclude certain voices); Select . From the menu, select Tools → Toggle Rhythmic Slash Notation . 2 The selected noteheads are changed to slash noteheads which do not transpose or playback. Slash-notehead notes in voices one or two voices three or four are small are fixed to the middle staff line; those in ("accent" notation) and fixed above or below the staff: In percussion staves , notes in voices 3 and 4 are not converted to small slashes but to small notes above or below the staff. Respell pitches Corrects accidentals to fit in with the current key signature. See Accidentals: Respell pitches . Regroup Rhythms This option corrects note ties , durations and beaming so that they are grouped according to standard music notation practice. For example: Before: After: Any notes that are tied and are the same length as a dotted note will be changed to the dotted note with two limitations. (i) Only the last note of a group of tied notes will have a single dot. Notes with more than one dot are not produced using this option. (ii) Dotted notes will not span from one group of beamed notes to another unless their duration is the same as all of the beam groups it covers. Any notes with more than one dot will be regrouped according to the above rules. To apply: 1 . Select the section of the score you want to reset. If nothing is selected, the operation will apply to the whole score; 221</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">222</span> 2 . Tools → Regroup Rhythms . Select : This is an experimental feature and there are known bugs. Articulations and ornaments are deleted and some Note pitches respelt. Ties across barlines may be lost on UNDO. Resequence rehearsal marks Resequence Rehearsal Marks command allows you to re-order the numbering/lettering of rehearsal marks The if, for any reason, they have got out of sequence. For details see Automatically resequence rehearsal marks . Copy lyrics to clipboard all This command copies the lyrics of the score to the clipboard: Tools → Copy Lyrics to Clipboard . From the menu, select Image capture Image Take a snapshot of a selected part of the document window. PNG, PDF and SVG formats are supported. See capture . Remove empty trailing measures This automatically removes any blank measures at the end of the score. Script recorder To be added ... See also Breaks and spacers Rehearsal marks Support This chapter describes how to find help using MuseScore: the best places to look, the best way to ask a question on the forums, and tips for reporting a bug. Helping to improve translations You can help translate the MuseScore software and documentation into your own language, as mentioned in . Development / Translating Software translation 1 . Ask in the forum to improve translation 2 . Connect to Transifex/MuseScore http://translate.musescore.org , which will redirect you to https://www.transifex.com/projects/p/musescore . Select the language and then the section you want to help with (musescore or instruments) 3 4 . Click on the "translate" button (the button text will depend on your language...) 5 . Search for "strings" (informational meaning) you want to translate (you could filter "already translated items") Here is a technical explanation: Continuous translation for MuseScore 2.0 Website and handbook translation See Translation instructions See also Language Settings and Update Translation, Update Translation 222</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">223</span> Bug reports and Feature requests Before filing bug reports or feature requests in the it is recommended first to post it in the relevant Issue Tracker so others may help establish a bug as genuine, or provide ideas and second opinions for new features. Forum Include a link to such discussion when creating the Issue. Bug reports issue tracker : Before posting in the . You may also view the Try to reproduce the issue with to check whether it has the latest nightly version history been fixed/implemented already. Please include as much of the following information as you know and limit each issue to one report: 871c8ce Version/revision of MuseScore you are using (e.g. version 3.0, revision Help → About... ). Check (Mac: MuseScore → About MuseScore... ). Operating system being used (e.g. Windows 7, macOS 10.12 or Ubuntu 14.04) Describe the precise steps that lead to the problem (where do you click, what keys do you press, what do you see, etc.). If you are not able to reproduce the problem with the steps, it is probably not worth reporting it as the developers will not be able to reproduce (and solve) it either. Remember that the goal of a bug report is not only to show the problem, but to allow others to reproduce it easily. Please remember: Attach the score that shows the problem —use the "File attachments" option at the bottom of the page, just Save and Preview buttons when you're typing your post. above the Feature requests When posting in the Issue Tracker : Be brief, but describe the goal as precisley as you can Describe the context in which the new feature is intended to work Suggest a specific workflow, if you can External links How to write a good bug report: step-by-step instructions Revert to factory settings MuseScore has the option to revert back to the standard built-in presets or "factory-settings". This can be necessary if your settings are corrupted. Warning: Reverting to factory settings removes any changes you have made to the preferences, palettes, or window settings. This is not a commonly needed procedure; consult the forums first, as there may be a way to solve your problem without resetting everything. Via menu If MuseScore still starts, it is possible to revert from within MuseScore. Go to Help → Revert to Factory Settings . A warning dialog will appear: 223</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">224</span> Clicking Yes resets all MuseScore's settings as if the program was installed for the first time, and MuseScore will No will safely cancel the revert. immediately restart. Via command line command line . If MuseScore does not start, you must run this process via the Instructions for Windows If you have MuseScore open, you need to close it first ( File Quit ) . 1 → Type ⊞ 2 + R to open the Run dialog. Alternatively select "Start" using your mouse and type "run," then click the . Win "Run" program. 3 . Click Browse... 4 . Look for MuseScore3.exe on your computer. The location may vary depending on your installation, but it is probably something similar to My Computer Local Disk → Program Files → MuseScore 3 → bin → MuseScore3.exe → 5 Click Open to leave the Browse dialog and return to the Run dialog. The following text (or something similar) should . display in the Run dialog C:\Program Files\MuseScore 3\bin\MuseScore3.exe %ProgramFiles%\MuseScore 3\bin\MuseScore3.exe ) (actually For the 32-bit version of MuseScore in a 64-bit version of Windows, the location is (actually C:\Program Files (x86)\MuseScore 3\bin\MuseScore.exe ) %ProgramFiles(x86)%\MuseScore 3\bin\MuseScore.exe For the Windows Store version (Windows 10), it is pretty well hidden, search for it via Windows Explorer 6 . Click after the quote and add a space followed by a hyphen and a capital F: -F 7 . Press OK After a few seconds, MuseScore should start and all the settings reverted to "factory settings". For advanced users, the main preference file is located at: C:\Users\[USERNAME]\AppData\Roaming\MuseScore\MuseScore3.ini (actually %APPDATA%\MuseScore\MuseScore3.ini ) The other preferences (palettes, session, shortcuts, workspaces...) are in: (actually C:\Users\[USERNAME]\AppData\Local\MuseScore\MuseScore3\ ) %LOCALAPPDATA%\MuseScore\MuseScore3\ For the Windows Store version (Windows 10), these are pretty well hidden, search for them via Windows Explorer Instructions for MacOS . If you have MuseScore open, you need to quit the application first ( 1 → Quit ) MuseScore 2 Open Terminal (in Applications/Utilities, or via Spotlight search) and a session window should appear . . 3 Type (or copy/paste) the following command into your terminal line (include the '/' at the front): /Applications/MuseScore\ 3.app/Contents/MacOS/mscore -F This resets all MuseScore preferences to factory settings and immediately launches the MuseScore application. Note that you cannot quit the Terminal without quitting MuseScore. You can safely quit MuseScore, quit the Terminal, and then reopen MuseScore in the normal fashion, ready to continue using. For advanced users, the main MuseScore preference file is located at ~/Library/Preferences/org.musescore.MuseScore3.plist . The other preferences (palettes, session, shortcuts, workspaces...) are in ~/Library/Application\ Support/MuseScore/MuseScore3/ . Instructions for Linux The following is true for Ubuntu, and most likely all other Linux distributions and UNIX-style operating systems. 1 . File → Quit ) If you have MuseScore open, you need to quit the application first ( 2 . From the Ubuntu main menu, choose Applications → Accessories → Terminal . A Terminal session window should appear 3 . Type, (or copy/paste) the following command into your terminal line ( Ctrl + Shift + V to paste in Terminal): 224</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">225</span> 3 . Ctrl + Shift + V to paste in Terminal): Type, (or copy/paste) the following command into your terminal line ( mscore -F Or, if you are using the AppImage version, you must first use the cd command to change directory to wherever you saved the AppImage. For example, if you saved it to your Desktop: cd ~/Desktop ./MuseScore*.AppImage -F This resets all MuseScore preferences to factory settings and immediately launches the MuseScore application. You can now quit Terminal, and continue using MuseScore. For advanced users, the main MuseScore preference file is located at ${XDG_CONFIG_HOME:- ~/.config}/MuseScore/MuseScore3.ini . The other preferences (palettes, session, shortcuts, workspaces, ...) are in ${XDG_DATA_HOME:- . ~/.local/share}/MuseScore/MuseScore3/ See also Command line options Appendix Command line options — General Commands Manual Page MSCORE(1) NAME , MuseScore3 mscore — MuseScore 3 sheet music editor SYNOPSIS You can launch MuseScore from the command line by typing options ] [ filename ...] mscore [ (Mac and Linux/BSD/Unix) musescore [ ] [ filename ...] (Linux/BSD/Unix) options options filename ...] (Windows) MuseScore3.exe [ ] [ options ] and [ filename ] are optional. For this to work the MuseScore executable must be in %PATH% (Windows) resp. $PATH [ Revert to factory settings (Mac and Linux). If it is not, see for detailed instructions on how and where to find and execute the MuseScore executable from the command line on the various supported platforms. A more detailed synopsis follows: [ -deFfhIiLmnOPRstvw ] mscore [ | --use-audio driver ] -a [ -b | --bitrate bitrate ] [ -c --config-folder pathname ] | -D | DPI ] [ --monitor-resolution -E --install-extension extension file ] [ | -j | --job [ file.json ] [ | --midi-operations file ] -M -o | --export-to file ] [ [ -p | --plugin name ] [ -r --image-resolution DPI ] | [ | --style style ] -S [ -T | --trim-image margin ] [ | --gui-scaling factor ] -x [ --debug ] [ --diff ] [ --dump-midi-in ] [ --dump-midi-out ] 225</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">226</span> [ --experimental ] --export-score-parts ] [ ] --factory-settings [ --force ] [ [ --help ] --layout-debug ] [ ] [ --load-icons ] [ --long-version ] [ --new-score [ --no-fallback-font ] [ --no-midi ] --no-synthesizer [ ] [ ] --no-webview --raw-diff ] [ ] [ --revert-settings [ --run-test-script ] [ --score-media ] --score-mp3 [ ] [ ] --score-parts-pdf --template-mode ] [ --test-mode ] [ [ --version ] [ file ... ] DESCRIPTION MuseScore is a Free and Open Source WYSIWYG cross-platform multi-lingual music composition and notation software, released under the GNU General Public Licence (GPLv2). Running mscore without any extra options launches the full graphical MuseScore program and opens any files specified on the command line. The options are as follows: -a --use-audio driver | jack , alsa , Use audio driver: one of , pulse portaudio -b --bitrate bitrate | Set MP3 output bitrate in kbit/s | --config-folder pathname -c Override configuration and settings directory -D | DPI --monitor-resolution Specify monitor resolution (override autodetection) -d | --debug Start MuseScore in debug mode -E | --install-extension extension file Install an extension file; soundfonts are loaded by default unless -e is also specified -e --experimental | Enable experimental features, such as layers -F | --factory-settings Use only the standard built-in presets (“factory settings”) and delete user preferences; compare with the -R option (see also Revert to factory settings ) 226</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">227</span> -f | --force Ignore score corruption and version mismatch warnings in “converter mode” -h | --help Display an overview of invocation instructions (doesn’t work on Windows) | -I --dump-midi-in Display all MIDI input on the console -i | --load-icons Load icons from the filesystem; useful if you want to edit the MuseScore icons and preview the changes --job file.json -j | Process a conversion job (see EXAMPLES below) | -L --layout-debug Start MuseScore in layout debug mode | file -M --midi-operations Specify MIDI import operations file (see EXAMPLES below) | --no-midi -m Disable MIDI input -n | --new-score Start with the New Score wizard regardless whether it’s enabled or disabled in the user preferences -O | --dump-midi-out Display all MIDI output on the console -o | --export-to file Export the given (or currently opened) file to the specified output file . The file type depends on the extension of the filename given. This option switches to “converter mode” and avoids the graphical user interface. -P --export-score-parts | When converting to PDF with the -o option, append each part’s pages to the created PDF file. If the score has no parts, all default parts will temporarily be generated automatically. | -p name --plugin Execute the named plugin -R | --revert-settings Use only the standard built-in presets (“factory settings”) but do not delete user preferences; compare with the -F option -r --image-resolution DPI | Set image resolution for conversion to PNG files. Default: 300 DPI (actually, the value of “Resolution” of the PNG option group in the Export tab of the preferences ) -S | --style style Load a style file first; useful for use with the -o option -s | --no-synthesizer 227</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">228</span> Disable the integrated software synthesiser -T --trim-image margin | margin Trim exported PNG and SVG images to remove whitespace surrounding the score. The specified , in pixels, will be retained (use 0 for a tightly cropped image). When exporting to SVG, this option only works with single-page scores. -t | --test-mode Set test mode flag for all files | --version -v Display the name and version of the application without starting the graphical user interface (doesn’t work on Windows) | --no-webview -w Disable the web view component in the Start Centre | --gui-scaling factor -x Scale the score display and other GUI elements by the specified factor ; intended for use with high-resolution displays --diff Print a conditioned diff between the given scores --long-version Display the full name, version and git revision of the application without starting the graphical user interface (doesn’t work on Windows) --no-fallback-font Don’t use Bravura as fallback musical font --raw-diff Print a raw diff between the given scores --run-test-script Run script tests listed in the command line arguments --score-media Export all media (except MP3) for a given score as a single JSON document to stdout --score-mp3 Generates an MP3 for the given score and exports it as a single JSON document to stdout --score-parts-pdf Generates parts data for the given score and exports it as a single JSON document to stdout --template-mode Save files in template mode (e.g. without page sizes) MuseScore also supports the automatic Qt command line options . Batch conversion job JSON format The argument to the -j option must be the pathname of a file comprised of a valid JSON document honouring the following specification: 228</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">229</span> The top-level element must be a JSONArray, which may be empty. Each array element must be a JSONObject with the following keys: : Value is the name of the input file (score to convert), as JSONString. in .qml extension), which will be read from either the global or per- plugin : Value is the filename of a plugin (with the user plugin path and executed before the conversion output happens, as JSONString. Optional, but at least plugin one of out must be given. and : Value is the conversion output target, as defined below. Optional, but at least one of plugin and out out be must given. The conversion output target may be a filename (with extension, which decided the format to convert to), as JSONString. The conversion output target may be a JSONArray of filenames as JSONString, as above, which will cause the score to be written to multiple output files (in multiple output formats) sequentially, without being closed, re-opened and re-processed in between. If the conversion output target is a JSONArray, one or more of its elements may also be, each, a JSONArray of two JSONStrings (called first and second half in the following description). This will cause part extraction: for each such two-tuple, all extant parts of the score will be saved , with filenames being composed by concatenating individually the first half, the name (title) of the part, and the second half. The resulting string must be a valid filename (with extension, determining the output format). If a score has no parts (excerpts) defined, this will be silently ignored without error. Valid file extensions for output are: flac Free Lossless Audio Codec (compressed audio) metajson various score metadata (JSON) mid standard MIDI file mlog internal file sanity check log (JSON) mp3 MPEG Layer III (lossy compressed audio) mpos measure positions (XML) mscx uncompressed MuseScore file mscz compressed MuseScore file musicxml uncompressed MusicXML file mxl compressed MusicXML file ogg OGG Vorbis (lossy compressed audio) pdf portable document file (print) png portable network graphics (image) — Individual files, one per score page, with a hyphen-minus followed by the page number placed before the file extension, will be generated. spos segment positions (XML) svg scalable vector graphics (image) wav RIFF Waveform (uncompressed audio) xml uncompressed MusicXML file See below for an example. 229</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">230</span> ENVIRONMENT SKIP_LIBJACK Set this (the value does not matter) to skip initialisation of the JACK Audio Connection Kit library, in case it causes trouble. XDG_CONFIG_HOME if unset. User configuration location; defaults to ~/.config XDG_DATA_HOME User data location; defaults to if unset. ~/.local/share Note that MuseScore also supports the normal Qt environment variables such as QT_QPA_GENERIC_PLUGINS , , QT_QPA_PLATFORMTHEME , QT_QPA_PLATFORM_PLUGIN_PATH , QT_STYLE_OVERRIDE , DISPLAY QT_QPA_PLATFORM , etc. FILES contains the application support data (demos, instruments, localisation, system-wide plugins, /usr/share/mscore-3.0/ soundfonts, styles, chords, templates and wallpapers). In the Debian packages, system-wide soundfonts are installed into /usr/share/sounds/sf2/ , /usr/share/sounds/sf3/ or /usr/share/sounds/sfz/ , respectively, instead. The per-user data (extensions, plugins, soundfonts, styles, templates) and files (images, scores) are normally installed ~/MuseScore3/ but may be changed in the configuration. Note that snapshot, alpha and beta into subdirectories under versions use MuseScore3Development instead of MuseScore3 in all of these paths. $XDG_CONFIG_HOME/MuseScore/MuseScore3.ini contains the user preferences, list of recently used files and their locations, window sizes and positions, etc. See above for development version paths. $XDG_DATA_HOME/data/MuseScore/MuseScore3/ contains updated localisation files downloaded from within the program, plugin musescore.com information, cached scores, credentials for the community site, session information, synthesiser settings, custom key and time signatures and shortcuts. See above for development version paths. EXAMPLES Convert a score to PDF from the command line mscore -o 'My Score.pdf' 'My Score.mscz' Run a batch job converting multiple documents mscore -j job.json This requires the file in the current working directory to have content similar to the following: job.json [ { "in": "Reunion.mscz", "out": "Reunion-coloured.pdf", "plugin": "colornotes.qml" }, { "in": "Reunion.mscz", "out": [ "Reunion.pdf", [ "Reunion (part for ", ").pdf" ], "Reunion.musicxml", "Reunion.mid" ] }, { "in": "Piece with excerpts.mscz", "out": [ "Piece with excerpts (Partitura).pdf", [ "Piece with excerpts (part for ", ").pdf" ], "Piece with excerpts.mid" ] } ] The last part of the job would, for example, cause files like “ Piece with excerpts (part for Violin).pdf ” to be generated alongside the conductor’s partitura and a MIDI file with the full orchestra sound, whereas the equivalent part of the Reunion conversion 230</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">231</span> will be silently ignored (because the Reunion piece (a MuseScore demo) has no excerpts defined). MIDI import operations midi_import_options.xml is a sample MIDI import operations file for the option. The attached -M DIAGNOSTICS mscore utility exits 0 on success, and >0 if an error occurs. The SEE ALSO fluidsynth(1), midicsv(1), timidity(1), qtoptions(7) https://musescore.org/handbook Online Handbook, full user manual https://musescore.org/forum Support Forum https://musescore.org/en/node/278582 Reverting to factory settings (troubleshooting) https://musescore.org/project/issues Project Issue Tracker — Please check first to if the bug you’re encountering has already been reported. If you just support forum instead. need help with something, then please use the http://doc.qt.io/qt-5/qguiapplication.html#supported-command-line-optio... Documentation of automatic Qt command line options STANDARDS MuseScore attempts to implement the following standards: MusicXML 3.1 (score interchange format) SF2 (SoundFont 2.01) SF3 (SoundFont with OGG Vorbis-compressed samples) SFZ (Sforzato soundfont) SMuFL (Standard Music Font Layout 1.20) HISTORY MuseScore was split off the MusE sequencer in 2002 and has since become the foremost Open Source notation software. AUTHORS MuseScore is developed by Werner Schweer and others. This manual page was written by mirabilos < tg@debian.org >. CAVEATS The automatic Qt command line options are removed from the argument vector before the application has a chance at option processing; this means that an invocation like mscore -S -reverse has no chance at working because the -reverse is removed by Qt first. BUGS MuseScore does not honour /etc/papersize . 231</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">232</span> Probably some more; check the project’s bug tracker (cf. SEE ALSO ). — December 18, 2018 MuseScore Keyboard shortcuts Edit → Shortcuts (Mac: → Most keyboard shortcuts can be customized via the menu: select Preferences... → ). Below is a list of some of the initial shortcut settings. Preferences... MuseScore → Shortcuts Navigation (Mac: + ← ) Home Beginning of score: Fn Last page of score: Fn + → ) End (Mac: (measure number, , or pXX when XX is a page number): Ctrl + F (Mac: Cmd rehearsal mark F ) Find + Ctrl + Tab Next score: Shift + Ctrl + Tab Previous score: Ctrl Zoom in: + (doesn't work on some systems) (Mac: Cmd + + ); or Ctrl (Mac: Cmd ) + scroll up + ); or Ctrl (Mac: Cmd + - - Ctrl (Mac: Cmd ) + scroll down Zoom out: + Pg Dn ; or Shift + scroll down (Mac: Fn + ↓ Next page: ) Previous page: ; or Shift + scroll up (Mac: Fn + ↑ ) Pg Up Ctrl + → (Mac: Cmd + → ) Next measure: Previous measure: Ctrl + ← (Mac: Cmd + ← ) Next note: → ← Previous note: + ↓ Note below (within a chord or on lower staff): Alt + Alt Note above (within a chord or on higher staff): ↑ + Alt + ↑ (Ubuntu uses this shortcut for Workspaces instead) Top note in chord: Ctrl + Alt + ↓ (Ubuntu uses this shortcut for Workspaces instead) Bottom note in chord: Ctrl Note input Begin note input mode: N N or Leave note input mode: Esc Duration ... 9 See also Note input . selects a duration. 1 Q Half duration of previous note: Double duration of previous note: W Shift + Decrease duration by one dot: (as of version 2.1) (e.g. a dotted quarter note becomes a quarter note; a quarter note Q becomes a dotted eighth note ) Increase duration by one dot : (as of version 2.1) Shift + W (e.g. an eighth note becomes a dotted eighth note; a dotted eighth note becomes a quarter note) Voices To select a voice in note input mode. + Ctrl + 1 (Mac: Cmd Alt Option + 1 ) Voice 1: + Voice 2: + Alt + 2 (Mac: Cmd + Option + 2 ) Ctrl Voice 3: Ctrl + Alt + 3 (Mac: Cmd + Option + 3 ) Option Voice 4: + Alt + 4 (Mac: Cmd + Ctrl + 4 ) Pitch Pitches can be entered by their letter name (A-G), or via MIDI keyboard. See Note input for full details. 232</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">233</span> Repeat previous note or chord: R duration beforehand) (the repeat can be of a different note value by selecting R (The will be repeated from the first note position after the end of the selection) Repeat selection: selection + ↑ Cmd + ↑ ) Raise pitch by octave: Ctrl (Mac: + (Mac: Cmd + ↓ ) Ctrl Lower pitch by octave: ↓ Raise pitch by semi-tone (prefer sharp): ↑ ↓ Lower pitch by semi-tone (prefer flat): + Shift + ↑ Raise pitch diatonically: Alt + + Alt ↓ Lower pitch diatonically: Shift both and concert pitch views: J Change enharmonic spelling in written current view only: Ctrl + J (Mac: Cmd + J Change enharmonic spelling in ) Rest: (zero) 0 Interval Add interval above current note: Alt +[Number] Layout X Flip direction (stem, slur, tie, tuplet bracket, etc.): Shift + X Mirror note head: of measure(s): Increase stretch } { Decrease stretch of measure(s): Line break on selected barline: Return Ctrl + Return (Mac: Page break on selected barline: + Return ) Cmd Adjust space above a staff (except the top staff) for the whole score: Press , click on the staff and drag Shift Articulations Staccato: + S Shift Shift + N Tenuto: Shift + V Sforzato (accent): Marcato: Shift + O Grace note (acciaccatura): / Crescendo: < > Decrescendo: Text entry + T Ctrl Cmd + T ) Staff text: (Mac: Ctrl + Shift + T (Mac: Cmd + Shift + T ) System text: text: Tempo + T Alt Ctrl ) M (Mac: Cmd + M Rehearsal Mark: + entry Lyrics Ctrl + L Enter lyrics on a note: Cmd + L ) (Mac: Previous lyric syllable: Shift + Space Next lyric syllable: if the current and the next syllables are separated by a '-': - Space , else ← Move lyric syllable left by 0.1sp: → Move lyric syllable right by 0.1sp: Ctrl + ← (Mac: Cmd + ← Move lyric syllable left by 1sp: ) Move lyric syllable right by 1sp: Ctrl + → (Mac: Cmd + → ) Move lyric syllable left by 0.01sp: Alt + ← Move lyric syllable right by 0.01sp: Alt → + Ctrl + Up to previous stanza: (Mac: Cmd + ↑ ) ↑ Down to next stanza: Ctrl + ↓ (Mac: Cmd + ↓ ) For more lyric shortcuts, see Lyrics . 233</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">234</span> Display Navigator: (Mac: fn + F12 ) F12 F11 (Mac: + F11 ) Play Panel: fn F10 fn + F10 ) Mixer: (Mac: F9 (Mac: fn + F9 ) Palette: Inspector: F8 fn + F8 ) (Mac: P Piano Keyboard: F6 Selection filter: Ctrl + U Display full screen: Miscellaneous Toggle visibility on selected element(s): V Show Instruments dialog: I Toggle multi-measure rests on or off: M Reset element to default location: Ctrl + R (Mac: Cmd + R ) See also Preferences: Shortcuts Known limitations of MuseScore 3.x While all members of the development team did their best to make the software easy to use and bug-free, there are some known issues and limitations in MuseScore 3.x. Local time signatures The local time signature feature, which allows you to have different time signatures in different staves at the same time, is very limited. You can only add a local time signature to measures that are empty, and only if there are no linked parts. When adding notes to measures with local time signatures, you can enter notes normally via note input mode, but copy The join and split commands are disabled and paste does not work correctly and may lead to corruption or even crashes. for measures with local time signatures. Regroup Rhythms The Regroup Rhythms command found under the Layout menu may have unintended side effects, including changing the spelling of pitches and deleting some elements like articulations, glissandos, tremolos, grace notes and, esp. on undo, ties. Use this tool with caution on limited selections, so that you can tell if any unwanted changes are made. Tablature staff linked with standard staff When entering multiple-note chords on a standard staff in a linked staff/tablature system, the notes should be entered in order to ensure correct fret assignment. from the top (first) string to the bottom string This limitation does not apply if entering notes directly onto a tablature staff, or when using an unlinked staff/tablature system. Mixer Changing settings in the mixer other than the sound doesn't mark the score 'dirty'. That means if you close a score you may not get the warning "Save changes to the score before closing?". Changing mixer values are also not undoable. Header & footer There is no way to edit Header and Footer in a WYSIWYG manner. The fields in Format → Style → Header, Footer, Numbers are plain text. They can contain "HTML like" syntax, but the text style, layout, etc. can't be edited with a WYSIWYG editor. Upgrade from MuseScore 1.x or 2.x 234</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">235</span> How to upgrade MuseScore Download and install the latest version from the page as described at Installation . If you want to remove 1.x download installation page of the 1.x handbook. nor 2.x, check the Installing MuseScore 3 won't uninstall 1.x nor 2.x —all three versions can coexist peacefully and can even be used in parallel. So this isn't really an upgrade but an installation of a new and different program. Opening 1.x or 2.x scores in MuseScore 3 MuseScore 3 significantly improved the typesetting quality to make scores attractive and easier to read. Improvements cover many items such as beam slope, stem height, layout of accidentals in chords and general note spacing. However, this means that sheet music made with MuseScore 1.x or 2.x looks slightly different from sheet music made with 3.x. It also means that scores saved with 3.x won't open with 1.x nor 2.x. To prevent you from accidentally overwriting your 1.x or 2.x scores, 3.x treats them as an import, which means: The score gets marked as being modified, even if you haven't change anything On exiting MuseScore you're asked to save the score (as a result from the above) MuseScore uses the "Save As" dialog to save it, not the "Save" dialog MuseScore uses the score's title to create a default filename rather than taking the old filename Relayout If you did not manually adjust the layout of a 1.x or 2.x score, then MuseScore uses the 3.x typesetting engine to layout did touch the layout of the 1.x or 2.x score, the individual adjustments you may have made should remain the score. If you after opening it in MuseScore 3.x, but due to slight changes in the surrounding layout they may still not appear correct in context. If you wish to reset even manual adjustments to use the 3.x typesetting engine throughout, select the complete + Ctrl A (Mac: Cmd + A ) and reset the layout with score with the shortcut + R (Mac: Cmd + R ). Ctrl Getting the sound from MuseScore 1.x While the sound in 2.x/3.x has been much improved, you may still prefer the sound from MuseScore 1.x. In that case, you can get the 1.x sound in 3.x by downloading the 1.3 SoundFont and add it in 3.x. You can do this in two steps: 1 . Download the 1.3 SoundFont named TimGM6mb . 2 Install and use the TimGM6mb SoundFont in 2.0 Known incompatibilities Hardware incompatibilities The following software is known to crash MuseScore on startup: Samson USB Microphone, driver name "Samson ASIO Driver", samsonasiodriver.dll. More info More info Digidesign MME Refresh Service. Windows XP SP3 + Realtek Azalia Audio Driver. More info Wacom tablet. More info and QTBUG-6127 Software incompatibilities Maple virtual cable is known to prevent MuseScore from closing properly. KDE (Linux) window settings can cause the whole window to move when dragging a note. Changing the window settings of the operating system avoids the problem. Nitro PDF Creator may prevent MuseScore 2 from starting on Windows 10, if being used as the default printer. Same for Amyumi/Quickbooks PDF Printer, see here and also some cloud printing services, see here . Creative Sound Blaster Z Series ASIO driver may prevent MuseScore 2 from starting on Windows 10. Untrusted Font Blocking policy prevents MuseScore 2 from starting (except in debug mode, i.e. using the -d option) on Windows 10. (Solution in the links provided here ) AVG Internet Security hangs MuseScore 235</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">236</span> MuseScore requires access to your internet connection with AVG. MuseScore doesn't need an internet connection to function, but if AVG blocks it, MuseScore hangs. Allow MuseScore and check "Save my answer as a permanent rule and do not ask me next time." If AVG prompts you, If it doesn't prompt you anymore, . Open the AVG user interface (right-click on the AVG icon, close to your clock -> Open AVG User Interface 1 2 . Click on Firewall Click 3 . Advanced Settings . Click Applications 4 5 . Find MSCORE.EXE in the list and double click it . Change Application Action 6 Allow for All to Font problem on macOS MuseScore is known to display notes as square when some fonts are damaged on macOS. To troubleshoot this issue: . Go to Applications -> Font Book 1 . Select a font and press ⌘ + A 2 to select them all 3 . Go to File -> Validate Fonts 4 . If any font is reported as damaged or with minor problems, select it and delete it 5 . Restart MuseScore if necessary In this forum article , a user believes to have found the font "Adobe Jenson Pro (ajenson)" to be the culprit, regardless of not being reported as broken, or problematic as per the above validation, and solved the problem by deleting that font, so this is worth checking too. Font problem on Linux If the default desktop environment application font is set to bold, MuseScore will not display the notes properly. To troubleshoot this issue (gnome 2.*/MATE users): 1 . Right-click on your desktop and select Change Desktop background 2 . Click on Fonts tab . Set Regular style for Application font 3 . Restart MuseScore if necessary 4 For GNOME 3/SHELL users 1 . Open the shell and open "Advanced Settings" 2 . Click on the Fonts option in the list 3 . Set the default font to something non-bold 4 Restart MuseScore if necessary . Save As dialog empty on Linux Some users reported that the Save As dialog is empty on Debian 6.0 and Lubuntu 10.10. To troubleshoot this issue: 1 . Type the following in a terminal which mscore 2 . The command will answer with the path of mscore. Edit it with your preferred text editor and add the following line at the beginning export QT_NO_GLIB=1 Launch MuseScore and the problem should be solved. New features in MuseScore 3 MuseScore 3 includes a number of new and improved features. For a brief summary, see the Release notes for MuseScore 3 . More details can be found in the summaries below and by referring to the relevant pages of the 236</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">237</span> handbook. Automatic Placement style defaults and (b) any MuseScore initially places elements in the score according to (a) the properties specified in manual adjustments made. For elements that have automatic placement enabled, however, MuseScore will attempt to avoid collisions by moving one or more of them as needed. See . Automatic placement Default position → The default position for most elements is controlled by settings in . You can either change the default Format Style Inspector , apply a manual adjustment (see below) and then use the "Set as style" control (to the right of there, or, in the the value you wish to set). The specific properties you can set vary by element type but include: placement (whether the element appears above or below the staff by default) position above/below (specific positions when placed above or below) offset (same as position above/below, for which placement is the default) autoplace min distance (minimum distance from other elements when autoplace is enabled) See Automatic placement . Manual adjustments Many elements can be placed either above or below the staff. To flip an element from above to below or vice versa, use the "Placement" setting in the Inspector , or press the shortcut "X". Manual adjustments to position can be performed by dragging or by changing the offsets in the Inspector. Neither method will allow you to position an element in a way that causes a collision, however. To take full control of the position of an element, you can disable automatic placement for it. See . Automatic placement Disabling automatic placement To disable automatic placement for an element, untick the "Automatic placement" box in the Inspector. The element will revert to its default position, and it will no longer be considered when automatically placing other elements. See Automatic placement . Stacking order The "Stacking order" setting in the Inspector controls which elements overlap which in the cases where they actually do overlap and are not moved due to autoplacement. See Automatic placement . Text Formatting Formatting of text is controlled by three factors: The text style associated with the element sets the defaults for properties such as the font, alignment, and frame. Changes to these text properties can be applied to selected elements via the Inspector. Custom formatting can be applied to specific characters within the text using the text toolbar. See Text basics , Text styles and properties . Text Styles Each text element has a text style associated with it. The default style for an element is determined by the type of the element itself - staff text defaults to the Staff text style, dynamics to the Dynamics text style, etc. This text style determines the default font face, size, style (bold/italic/underline), alignment, and frame properties. 237</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">238</span> You can change the defaults for any of these text styles using Format Style → Text Styles . For instance, you can make → This will affect all existing elements using that style as well as rehearsal marks bigger, or change lyrics to be italicized. elements you add later. Some elements also contain a limited set of text style controls in their own sections of the Format The settings are linked: you can change the font Style dialog (although this might not be the case in the final release). → Style → Measure Numbers, or in Format size for measure numbers in either Format Style → Text Styles: Measure → → You can also change the defaults Number. The effect is the same: all measure numbers in the score will take on this size. Text Properties for a text style using the Inspector; see below. For most text elements that you create directly (like staff text, rehearsal marks, and lyrics), you can apply a different text This will cause them to display using that style instead of the "native" style for style using the Style control in the Inspector. For example, you can select one or more staff text elements and give them the Tempo style to force them to the element. display as if they were tempo markings. Text basics , Text styles and properties . See Text Properties The text style controls the default properties for elements using that style, but you can override any of these properties for selected elements using the Inspector. For example, you can select a handful of staff text elements using Ctrl+click, then use the Inspector to make them larger. The Reset to Default button next to each property control returns it to the default. You can also click the Set as Style button to change the style to match. So another way to change the size of all measures numbers is to select one, change its size in the Inspector, then click Set as Style. See Text basics , Text styles and properties . Custom Formatting Custom formatting is applied to text using the . Text editing Staff Type Change You can change various staff properties mid-score, including staff size, notehead scheme (e.g., for pitch name The staff type change element is found on the Text palette noteheads), generation of time signatures, and others. (currently, but see #278205: Move Staff Type Change to another palette (it is not text) - it may move). Add it to the measure where you want the change to occur, then use the Inspector to change properties of the staff type change element. See Staff Type Change Temporary and Cutaway Staves To create a temporary staff that appears on certain systems only: first add the staff normally (Edit / Instruments), then add notes, then right-click the staff, click Staff Properties , and set "Hide when empty" to "Always". This will cause the staff to show only where needed even without needing to turn on "Hide empty staves" for the whole score (in Format / Style). The default for "Hide when empty" is "Auto", meaning the staff will be hidden when empty if "Hide empty staves" is enabled. Additional values include "Never" (the staff will not be hidden when empty even if "Hide empty staves" is enabled) and "Instrument" (for instruments containing multiple staves, the staff is hidden only if all staves for that instrument are empty). To create a cutaway staff in which only the measures containing notes are visible (for ossia or cutaway scores, for example), right-click the staff, click Staff Properties, and enable the "Cutaway" option. This can be used independently of "Hide when empty" or "Hide empty staves". System Dividers System dividers are a set of short diagonal lines that are used to visually separate systems on a page. Musecore can add these to your score automatically. In Format → Style rarr; System , you can enable dividers on the left, right, or both, and you can set their default position. You can also adjust the position of individual dividers in your score manually or mark them invisible (this currently does not survive saving). Staff Spacing As part of the automatic placement in MuseScore, staves are now spaced automatically, so you can set a comfortable minimum distance and depend on MuseScore to open up more space where needed. You can use staff spacers as in 238</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">239</span> MuseScore 2 to increase decrease it—the "fixed" distance between staves, but MuseScore 3 now also provides a way to Just add the spacer and adjust its height. This will also prevent staff spacer, found on the Breaks & Spacers palette. MuseScore from automatically adding more space to avoid collisions, allowing you to manage this yourself. Spacers . See Don't Break Currently disabled In addition to the system, page, and section breaks familiar from MuseScore 2, the "Breaks & Spacers" palette now This allows you to force two measures to be kept together, for example, if there is contains a new "Don't Break" element. some complex passage that spans the measures and you want to make sure they are adjacent. If both measures don't fit on a system, MuseScore moves them both to the next system. (currently, this leaves a "hole" at the end of the first staff - is this a bug or is there some purpose behind it?) Parts from Voices parts from the different instruments in your score, you can now also associate a part In addition to the ability to generate This allows you to combine with a specific staff within the instrument or even a specific voice within a specific staff. multiple parts (e.g., Flute 1 & 2) onto a single staff in the score while still generating separate parts. Once you have The Parts dialog now contains two sections at the bottom, Instruments in Score and Instruments in Part. generated a part (or all parts) using the New and New All buttons, you can select any part at the top and use the controls at the bottom to control not only what instrument is in the part, but also which staves and voices within the instrument are included. To add an instrument to a part, select it from "Instruments in Score" and press "+". To remove an instrument from a part, select it from "Instruments in Part" and press "-". To customize the part at the staff or voice level, click the arrow next to the instrument in "Instruments in Part" to expand the listing to show all staves and voices of the instrument. You can remove a staff by selecting it and pressing "-", or remove a voice by unchecking it. Limitations : If you select only voice 1 for a given staff, then only the content in voice 1 for that staff will be included in the Thus, in order to share flute 1 & 2 on the same staff, you will need to enter all notes onto both voices, even in part. You also cannot enter the two parts as chords in the passages where they share passages where they share content. rhythms. Explode and Implode Explode Explode has been updated to allow separation of voices as well as notes. See . The implode tool (Tools / Implode) works in one of two modes. With a single staff selected, the implode command merges notes in different voices into chords where possible (when notes are on the same beat and have the same duration). This is the same as recent versions of MuseScore, although some bugs have been fixed. With multiple staves selected, the implode command combines the content of the first four non-empty voices (on any staves) into multiple voices on the top selected staff. This is different from MuseScore 2, where notes would be combined into chords rather than using multiple voices, and thus required the rhythms to match. The MuseScore 3 approach preserves the original rhythms even where they differ, and is intended to produce the expected results when combining two different parts onto one staff for use with the parts from voices feature, or when reducing an open (four-stave) SATB score into a closed (two-stave) version. To further merge the voices into chords where possible, simply run the command again. See Tools . Timewise Note Input You can insert and delete notes and have the measure automatically expand or contract to accommodate the change. This can be useful in creating unmetered music or in ordinary editing. To insert a note before the currently-selected note, press Ctrl+Shift while adding the note normally. For example, in note input mode, Ctrl+Shift+click will insert a note of the currently-selected duration at that location. Ctrl+Shift+B will insert a B 239</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">240</span> of the currently-selected duration before the note at the current cursor position. You can also switch to Timewise note In this mode, all notes you add act as if input mode using the dropdown menu next to the note input button on the toolbar. you were pressing Ctrl+Shift - they are inserted rather than replacing the existing notes or rests at that location. To delete notes, you must be in normal (not note input) mode. Select either a single note or a range and press Ctrl+Delete. , Timewise Delete (Tools) See Note input modes Split/Join Measures For To split a measure before a given note, simply insert a barline from the palette at that point while holding Ctrl. example, you can select the note, and Ctrl+double-click the barline in the palette, or Ctrl+drag the barline to the note. You → Measure can also use Tools Split Measure Before Selected Note/Rest. → To join two measures, Ctrl+Delete the barline between them. → Measure → You can also use the menu command Tools Join Measures. See . Measure operations Timeline The Timeline presents a graphical overview of your score. → Timeline (F12). The top portion of the To access it, use View Timeline shows the location of tempo, key, and time signature changes as well as rehearsal marks, repeats, and double barlines. The bottom portion shows the staves of your score, with non-empty measures highlighted. You can click anywhere within this view to jump to the corresponding spot in the score. See Timeline Score Comparison Tool The Score Comparison Tool (View / Score Comparison Tool) allows you to compare two versions of a score to find the Select the two scores you want to compare and whether you want to compare the current differences between them. version or the last saved version (note you can compare the current version of a score against the last saved version of the same score to see what you have changed since the last save), then click the Compare button. A list of differences of The score view will automatically change to Documents Side by Side, with the differences will be displayed to the right. Double-click on a difference from the list and both score views will two scores you have selected displayed within. automatically pan to show you the changed element, which will also be highlighted. Normally you would want the default Intelligent comparison, which displays the differences in human-readable format (eg, "Measure 1: Note: property pitch changed from B4 to C5"). There is also a Raw mode to show the results according to the actual XML code. See Score comparison . Mixer Mixer . See Piano Roll Editor See Piano roll editor (preliminary page). Capo changes Capo changes are now a property of staff text, and can be used to automatically change the pitch of all notes that follow them, up until another capo change. See Capo playback . Fretboard Diagrams New UI. See Fretboard diagrams . 240</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">241</span> External links Release notes for MuseScore 3.x Transitioning from version 2 to version 3 Glossary . The glossary is a work in progress—please help if you can. You can discuss this page in the documentation forum The list below is a glossary of frequently used terms in MuseScore as well as their meaning. The differences between American English and British English are marked with "(AE)" and "(BE)", respectively. Acciaccatura → grace note which appears as a small note with a stroke through the stem. It is quickly executed and A short technically takes no value from its associated note. Accidental → sharps , → flats A sign appearing in front of a note that raises or lowers its pitch. The most common accidentals are → naturals , but double sharps and double flats are also used. Also → koron , and or sori and other quarter tone → accidentals. Accidentals affect all notes on the same staff position only for the remainder of the measure in which → In notes tied across a barline , the accidental they occur, but they can be canceled by another accidental. → → barline to the tied note, but not to later untied notes on the same → continues across the position in that staff measure. Ambitus Note (or vocal) range used in a → staff . Used particularly in Early Music Anacrusis See → . Pickup measure Anchor The point of attachment to the score of objects such as Text and Lines: When the object is dragged, the anchor appears as small brown circle connected to the object by a dotted line. Depending on the object selected, its anchor may be attached to either (a) a note (e.g. fingering), (b) a staff line (e.g. staff text), or (c) a barline (e.g. repeats). Appoggiatura A long → grace note which takes value from its associated note. Its functions include: passing tone, anticipation, struck suspension, and escape tone. Arpeggio An tells the performer to break up the chord into the constituent notes, playing them separately and one arpeggio after the other. An arrow on the arpeggio indicates the direction in which the player should play the notes of the chord. Bar (BE) → measure . See Barline Vertical line through a → staff , staves, or a full → system that separates → measures . Beam → eighth or shorter either carry a → flag or a beam. Beams are used for grouping Notes with a duration of an notes. BPM Beats Per Minute is the unit for measuring tempo. See → metronome mark Breve Brevis 241</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">242</span> A double whole note breve is a note that has the duration of two whole notes. or Caesura A caesura (//) is a brief, silent pause. Time is not counted for this period, and music resumes when the director signals. Cent An interval equal to one hundredth of a semitone. Chord and click on a note. In A group of two or more notes sounding together. To select a chord in MuseScore, press Shift the , however, the word "Chord" only covers notes in the same voice as the selected note(s). Inspector Clef staff , used to tell which are the musical notes on the lines and Sign at the beginning of a the lines. → between → . Clefs are very useful for transposition Concert pitch Concert pitch Enables you to switch between concert pitch and transposing pitch (see Transposition ). and Crotchet (BE) → Quarter note See . Double Flat double flat (�) A is a sign that indicates that the pitch of a note has to be lowered two semitones. Double Sharp double sharp A (�) is a sign that indicates that the pitch of a note has to be raised two semitones. Demisemiquaver (BE) A thirty-second note. Duplet tuplet . See → Edit mode The program mode from which you can edit various score elements. Eighth note A note whose duration is an eighth of a whole note (semibreve). quaver (BE). Same as a Endings See volta . → Enharmonic notes ♯ and A ♭ are enharmonic notes. Notes that sound the same pitch but are written differently. Example: G Flag See → . beam Flat Sign ( ♭ ) that indicates that the pitch of a note has to be lowered one semitone. Grace note . and Grace notes appear as small notes in front of a normal-sized main note. See appoggiatura acciaccatura → → (AE) Grand Staff Great Stave (BE) A system of two or more staves, featuring treble and bass clefs, used to notate music for keyboard instruments and the harp. Half Note Same as a (BE). A note whose duration is half of a whole note (semibreve). minim Hemidemisemiquaver (BE) A sixty-fourth note. Interval The difference in pitch between two notes, expressed in terms of the scale degree (e.g. major second, minor third, Degree (Music) (Wikipedia). perfect fifth etc.). See Jump In MuseScore, "jumps" are notations such as "D.S. al Coda", found in the "Repeats & Jumps" palette. Key Signature Set of → sharps or → flats at the beginning of the → staves . It gives an idea about the tonality and avoids repeating those signs all along the → . staff D minor tonality. A key signature with B flat means F major or Koron An Iranian accidental which lowers the pitch of a note by a quarter tone (in comparison to the → flat which lowers a → note by a semitone). It is possible to use this accidental in a → key signature . See also sori . → Longa A longa is a quadruple whole note . Ledger Line 242</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">243</span> Line(s) that are added above or below the staff. Measure (AE) A segment of time defined by a given number of beats. Dividing music into measures provides regular reference points to pinpoint locations within a piece of music. Same as bar (BE). → Metronome mark → . In MuseScore, Metronome marks are usually given by a note length equaling a certain playback speed in BPM metronome marks are used in Tempo texts . Minim (BE) → . See Half note Natural A natural ( ♮ ) is a sign that cancels a previous alteration on notes of the same pitch. Normal mode outside note input mode or edit mode : press Esc The operating mode of MuseScore Normal mode you to enter it. In can navigate through the score, and move elements, adjust Inspector properties, and alter the pitches of select existing notes. Note input mode The program mode used for entering music notation. Operating System OS Underlying set of programs which set up a computer, enabling additional programs (such as MuseScore). Popular OSes are Microsoft Windows, macOS, and GNU/Linux. → system . Not to be confused with a sheet music Part Music to be played or sung by one or a group of musicians using the same instrument. In a string quartet, 1st part = Violin 1, 2nd part = Violin 2, 3rd part = Viola, 4th part = Cello, in a choir there might be parts for soprano, alto, tenor → staves (e.g. Piano has 2 staves, Organ can have 2 or 3 staves). and bass. A part has one or more Pickup Measure (also known as an Anacrusis or Upbeat) of a piece or a section of a piece of music. See Measure duration and Create new score: Incomplete first measure Pickup measure . Also Exclude from measure count . Quadruplet See tuplet . → Quarter note A note whose duration is a quarter of a whole note (semibreve). (BE). Same as a crotchet Quaver (BE) See eighth note . → Quintuplet → tuplet . See Respell Pitches Tries to guess the right accidentals for the whole score Accidentals ). (see Rest Interval of silence of a specified duration. Re-pitch mode Allows you to rewrite an existing passage of music by changing the note pitches without altering the rhythm. Semibreve (BE) A whole note (AE). It lasts a whole measure in 4/4 time. Semiquaver (BE) A sixteenth note. Semihemidemisemiquaver (Quasihemidemisemiquaver) (BE) An hundred and twenty eighth note. Sextuplet → tuplet . See SFZ → SoundFonts ). An SFZ library consists of one or A virtual instrument format supported by MuseScore (along with more SFZ text files, each defining a particular instrument setup, and many audio sound samples. Sharp Sign ( ♯ ) that indicates that the pitch of a note has to be raised one semitone. Slur A curved line over or under two or more notes, meaning that the notes will be played smooth and connected ( legato ). See also → tie . Sori An Iranian → accidental which raises the pitch of a note by a quarter tone (in comparison to the sharp which raises it 243</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">244</span> by a semitone). It is possible to use this accidental in a → . key signature → koron See also . SoundFont → ). A SoundFont is a special type of file A virtual instrument format supported by MuseScore (along with SFZ (extension .sf2, or .sf3 if compressed) containing sound samples of one or more musical instruments. In effect, a virtual synthesizer which acts as a sound source for MIDI files. MuseScore 2.2 comes with the SoundFont "MuseScore_General.sf3" pre-installed. Spatium (plural: Spatia) Space Staff Space sp (abbr./unit) The distance between two lines of a normal 5-line staff. In MuseScore this unit influences most size settings. See also Page settings . Staff (AE) Stave (BE) Group of one to five horizontal lines used to lay on musical signs. In ancient music notation (before 11th century) the staff/stave may have any number of lines (the plural of 'staff' is 'staves', in BE and AE). Step-time input note input mode , allowing you to enter music notation one note (or rest) at a time. MuseScore's default System Set of staves to be read simultaneously in a score. See also → . Operating System (OS) Tie A curved line between two or more notes on the same pitch to indicate a single note of combined duration: Quarter note + Tie + Quarter note = Half note Quarter note + Tie + Eighth note = Dotted Quarter note Quarter note + Tie + Eighth note + Tie + 16th note = Double Dotted Quarter note → slur . See also Transposition The act of moving the pitches of one or more notes up or down by a constant interval . There may be several reasons for transposing a piece, for example: 1 . The tune is too low or too high for a singer. In this case the whole orchestra will have to be transposed as well —easily done using MuseScore. 2 The part is written for a particular instrument but needs to be played by a different one. . . 3 The score is written for an orchestra and you want to hear what the individual instruments sound like. This requires changing the transposing instrument parts to concert pitch. . A darker or a more brilliant sound is desired. 4 Triplet → tuplet . See Tuplet A tuplet divides its next higher note value by a number of notes other than given by the time signature. For example a → triplet divides the next higher note value into three parts, rather than two. Tuplets may be: → triplets , → duplets , → quintuplets , and other. Upbeat See → . pickup measure Velocity The velocity property of a note controls how loudly the note is played. This usage of the term comes from MIDI synthesizers. On a keyboard instrument, it is the speed with which a key is pressed that controls its volume. The usual scale for velocity is 0 (silent) to 127 (maximum). Voice Polyphonic instruments like Keyboards, Violins, or Drums need to write notes or chords of different duration at the same time on the same → staff . To write such things each horizontal succession of notes or chords has to be written on the staff independently. In MuseScore you can have up to 4 voices per staff. Not to be confused with vocalists, singing voices like soprano, alto, tenor and bass, which are better viewed as instruments. Volta In a repeated section of music, it is common for the last few measures of the section to differ. Markings called voltas 244</p> <p><span class="badge badge-info text-white mr-2">245</span> are used to indicate how the section is to be ended each time. These markings are often referred to simply as → endings . External links http://www.robertcarney.net/musical-terms-definitions.htm https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_musical_symbols 245</p> </div> </div> <div class="col-md-2"> <div> <script async src="//pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/js/adsbygoogle.js"></script> <!-- doc amp below related --> <ins class="adsbygoogle" style="display:block" data-ad-client="ca-pub-2017906576985591" data-ad-slot="9235765260" data-ad-format="auto" data-full-width-responsive="true"></ins> <script> (adsbygoogle = window.adsbygoogle || []).push({}); </script> </div> <div> <h3>Related documents</h3> <div class="mb-4"> <div class="media"> <img class="mr-3 mt-2" src="/thumbs/1/4171fe1533d181b397831fced9dccfb7.jpg" alt="doj final opinion"> <div class="media-body"> <h3> <a href="/XXrXlSLZO/doj-final-opinion.html">doj final opinion</a> </h3> <p>UNITED STAT ES DIS TRICT COURT IC F OR THE D ISTR T OF CO LU M BIA UNITED STAT F AMERICA, : ES O : : la in t if f, P 99 No. on cti l A vi Ci : 96 (GK) -24 : and : TOBACCO-F UND, : REE KIDS ACTION F : ...</p> <a class="btn btn-primary" href="/XXrXlSLZO/doj-final-opinion.html">More info »</a> </div> </div> </div> <div class="mb-4"> <div class="media"> <img class="mr-3 mt-2" src="/thumbs/1/bbe166a10e1e8b40eedbc79f404a9098.jpg" alt="ayout 1"> <div class="media-body"> <h3> <a href="/7hqDy96Yg/ayout-1.html">ayout 1</a> </h3> <p>0465039146-FM:FM 12/5/06 12:25 AM Page i C O D E</p> <a class="btn btn-primary" href="/7hqDy96Yg/ayout-1.html">More info »</a> </div> </div> </div> <div class="mb-4"> <div class="media"> <img class="mr-3 mt-2" src="/thumbs/1/f94476cae7aebcd7e5977fdae5bfdc06.jpg" alt="FactoryTalk View Site Edition User's Guide"> <div class="media-body"> <h3> <a href="/mI0tSxP8u/factorytalk-view-site-edition-users-guide.html">FactoryTalk View Site Edition User's Guide</a> </h3> <p>User Manual FactoryTalk View Site Edition User's Guide</p> <a class="btn btn-primary" href="/mI0tSxP8u/factorytalk-view-site-edition-users-guide.html">More info »</a> </div> </div> </div> <div class="mb-4"> <div class="media"> <img class="mr-3 mt-2" src="/thumbs/1/19dbd3f66bc78ed06ab658c18bfacb96.jpg" alt="Alimentación escolar y las posibilidades de compra directa de la agricultura familiar. Estudio de ocho países."> <div class="media-body"> <h3> <a href="/QuVol6JqG/alimentacin-escolar-y-las-posibilidades-de-compra-directa-de-la-agricultura-familiar-estudio-de-ocho-pases.html">Alimentación escolar y las posibilidades de compra directa de la agricultura familiar. Estudio de ocho países.</a> </h3> <p></p> <a class="btn btn-primary" href="/QuVol6JqG/alimentacin-escolar-y-las-posibilidades-de-compra-directa-de-la-agricultura-familiar-estudio-de-ocho-pases.html">More info »</a> </div> </div> </div> <div class="mb-4"> <div class="media"> <img class="mr-3 mt-2" src="/thumbs/1/97fc2dea0d8cf9411f96998c9e2aa62a.jpg" alt="Constitución y Cánones"> <div class="media-body"> <h3> <a href="/-xi_U241o/constitucin-y-cnones.html">Constitución y Cánones</a> </h3> <p>Constitución y Cánones</p> <a class="btn btn-primary" href="/-xi_U241o/constitucin-y-cnones.html">More info »</a> </div> </div> </div> <div class="mb-4"> <div class="media"> <img class="mr-3 mt-2" src="/thumbs/1/1b306dbf5d118b6ab85ed138ad2dfe6b.jpg" alt="Herramientas para el análisis de los delitos contra la vida silvestre y los bosques"> <div class="media-body"> <h3> <a href="/qEaWMGCvO/herramientas-para-el-anlisis-de-los-delitos-contra-la-vida-silvestre-y-los-bosques.html">Herramientas para el análisis de los delitos contra la vida silvestre y los bosques</a> </h3> <p>Herramientas para el análisis de los delitos contra la vida silvestre y los bosques Herramientas para el análisis de los delitos contra la vida silvestre y los bosques El Banco Mundial CONSORCIO INTER...</p> <a class="btn btn-primary" href="/qEaWMGCvO/herramientas-para-el-anlisis-de-los-delitos-contra-la-vida-silvestre-y-los-bosques.html">More info »</a> </div> </div> </div> <div class="mb-4"> <div class="media"> <img class="mr-3 mt-2" src="/thumbs/1/cd68a1fef4206fdff304979bd02f396d.jpg" alt="eicdgb bosques territorios de vida web"> <div class="media-body"> <h3> <a href="/iHV6XUYqj/eicdgb-bosques-territorios-de-vida-web.html">eicdgb bosques territorios de vida web</a> </h3> <p>Estrategia Integral de Control a la Deforestación y Gestión de los Bosques</p> <a class="btn btn-primary" href="/iHV6XUYqj/eicdgb-bosques-territorios-de-vida-web.html">More info »</a> </div> </div> </div> <div class="mb-4"> <div class="media"> <img class="mr-3 mt-2" src="/thumbs/1/1c12e9232baf39f847dfbe93c077e56f.jpg" alt="ZEN 2 (blue edition) Software Guide"> <div class="media-body"> <h3> <a href="/x4ffNObrX/zen-2-blue-edition-software-guide.html">ZEN 2 (blue edition) Software Guide</a> </h3> <p>Software Guide ZEN 2 (blue edition)</p> <a class="btn btn-primary" href="/x4ffNObrX/zen-2-blue-edition-software-guide.html">More info »</a> </div> </div> </div> <div class="mb-4"> <div class="media"> <img class="mr-3 mt-2" src="/thumbs/1/3138361bfdf5d39ad94b5116bbbb6130.jpg" alt="520 UM001I EN E PowerFlex 520 Series Adjustable Frequency AC Drive User Manual"> <div class="media-body"> <h3> <a href="/xpWxlrkHg/520-um001i-en-e-powerflex-520-series-adjustable-frequency-ac-drive-user-manual.html">520 UM001I EN E PowerFlex 520 Series Adjustable Frequency AC Drive User Manual</a> </h3> <p>User Manual PowerFlex 520-Series Adjustable Frequency AC Drive PowerFlex 523 Catalog Number 25A, Series B PowerFlex 525 Catalog Number 25B Original Instructions</p> <a class="btn btn-primary" href="/xpWxlrkHg/520-um001i-en-e-powerflex-520-series-adjustable-frequency-ac-drive-user-manual.html">More info »</a> </div> </div> </div> <div class="mb-4"> <div class="media"> <img class="mr-3 mt-2" src="/thumbs/1/831786c1935e960c2ef02da02988776c.jpg" alt="Microsoft Word Libro blanco de los e Pacientes 1"> <div class="media-body"> <h3> <a href="/24EqbAOf3/microsoft-word-libro-blanco-de-los-e-pacientes-1.html">Microsoft Word Libro blanco de los e Pacientes 1</a> </h3> <p>“Sentí que miraba por encima del hombro de Thomas Paine” - Elliot M. Stone cómo nos pueden ayudar a mejorar la salud Dr. Tom Ferguson y el Grupo de Trabajo Académico de los e-Pacientes</p> <a class="btn btn-primary" href="/24EqbAOf3/microsoft-word-libro-blanco-de-los-e-pacientes-1.html">More info »</a> </div> </div> </div> <div class="mb-4"> <div class="media"> <img class="mr-3 mt-2" src="/thumbs/1/70ca28e786153c056ae87221346cf117.jpg" alt="WEF GGGR 2017"> <div class="media-body"> <h3> <a href="/YvPzNjsfT/wef-gggr-2017.html">WEF GGGR 2017</a> </h3> <p>Insight Report The Global Gender Gap Report 2 017</p> <a class="btn btn-primary" href="/YvPzNjsfT/wef-gggr-2017.html">More info »</a> </div> </div> </div> <div class="mb-4"> <div class="media"> <img class="mr-3 mt-2" src="/thumbs/1/ea35cc26f942985a5e197762f99d8db3.jpg" alt="Microsoft Word Table of Contents Full Report with ES.doc"> <div class="media-body"> <h3> <a href="/AihSUxBxW/microsoft-word-table-of-contents-full-report-with-esdoc.html">Microsoft Word Table of Contents Full Report with ES.doc</a> </h3> <p>Stern Review: The Economics of Climate Change PAGE TABLE OF CONTENTS i-xxvii Executive Summary i Preface & Acknowledgements iv Introduction to Review vi Summary of Conclusions Part I Climate change: o...</p> <a class="btn btn-primary" href="/AihSUxBxW/microsoft-word-table-of-contents-full-report-with-esdoc.html">More info »</a> </div> </div> </div> <div class="mb-4"> <div class="media"> <img class="mr-3 mt-2" src="/thumbs/1/a03cf98a39519839baa41da54ba31da0.jpg" alt="me bpd eng"> <div class="media-body"> <h3> <a href="/Ccaa64-DP/me-bpd-eng.html">me bpd eng</a> </h3> <p>2017–18 Estimates Parts I and II The Government Expenditure Plan and Main Estimates ESTIMATES ESTIMATES</p> <a class="btn btn-primary" href="/Ccaa64-DP/me-bpd-eng.html">More info »</a> </div> </div> </div> <div class="mb-4"> <div class="media"> <img class="mr-3 mt-2" src="/thumbs/1/3fa45c61ac82963806ed1ad002545c70.jpg" alt="fpc manual sp"> <div class="media-body"> <h3> <a href="/nH5Nm-GQ1/fpc-manual-sp.html">fpc manual sp</a> </h3> <p>CURSO SOBRE PROTECCION DE ALIMENTOS LECCIÓN 1: NORMAS E INSPECCIONES DEL DEPARTAMENTO DE SALUD Y SALUD MENTAL DE LA CI UDAD DE NUEVA YORK ------------ ------------------------------------ ------------...</p> <a class="btn btn-primary" href="/nH5Nm-GQ1/fpc-manual-sp.html">More info »</a> </div> </div> </div> <div class="mb-4"> <div class="media"> <img class="mr-3 mt-2" src="/thumbs/1/911e4faf4edb94d7c08e9e1564cd2ed4.jpg" alt="six books"> <div class="media-body"> <h3> <a href="/UPAGnYyMI/six-books.html">six books</a> </h3> <p>SIX BOOKS OF THE COMMONWEALTH by ODIN JEAN B M. J. TOOLEY Abridged and translated by L BL ACKWEL L OXF ORD BASI PRINT ED IN GREAT BR ITAI N IN THE CI TY OF OX FORD AT T HE AL DEN PRESS BOUND BY ALL BI...</p> <a class="btn btn-primary" href="/UPAGnYyMI/six-books.html">More info »</a> </div> </div> </div> <div class="mb-4"> <div class="media"> <img class="mr-3 mt-2" src="/thumbs/1/589768651871e7304508ea0a413d267e.jpg" alt="P020161207645765233498"> <div class="media-body"> <h3> <a href="/wZU4w6lqN/p020161207645765233498.html">P020161207645765233498</a> </h3> <p>T HE 3 T H F I V E - Y E A R P L A N 1 I O E C O N O F I C A N D S O C R A L D E V E L O P M E N T O F M T HE P E O P L E ’ S R E P U B L I C O F C HI N A ( – 2020) 2016 C e n t r al C o m p i l at i ...</p> <a class="btn btn-primary" href="/wZU4w6lqN/p020161207645765233498.html">More info »</a> </div> </div> </div> <div class="mb-4"> <div class="media"> <img class="mr-3 mt-2" src="/thumbs/1/f6b1b4ac5fc686ffa36557a02cc38bf1.jpg" alt="Medicare Y Usted 2019"> <div class="media-body"> <h3> <a href="/1xCFvRqvx/medicare-y-usted-2019.html">Medicare Y Usted 2019</a> </h3> <p>LA PUBLICACIÓN OFICIAL DEL GOBIERNO DE LOS ESTADOS UNIDOS MEDICARE Y USTED 2019</p> <a class="btn btn-primary" href="/1xCFvRqvx/medicare-y-usted-2019.html">More info »</a> </div> </div> </div> <div class="mb-4"> <div class="media"> <img class="mr-3 mt-2" src="/thumbs/1/81dc23f85c4fcbfd375ccd499eea2372.jpg" alt="RESERVAS INTERNACIONALES Y LIQUIDEZ EN MONEDA EXTRANJERA DIRECTRICES PARA UNA PLANILLA DE DATOS"> <div class="media-body"> <h3> <a href="/UtMz-zTK2/reservas-internacionales-y-liquidez-en-moneda-extranjera-directrices-para-una-planilla-de-datos.html">RESERVAS INTERNACIONALES Y LIQUIDEZ EN MONEDA EXTRANJERA DIRECTRICES PARA UNA PLANILLA DE DATOS</a> </h3> <p>2013 DIREC TRICES ERNACIONALES Y LIQUIDEZ EN MONEDA EXTRANJERA VAS INT RESER RESERVAS INTERNACIONALES Y LIQUIDEZ EN MONEDA EXTRANJERA DIRECTRICES PARA UNA PLANILLA DE DATOS INTERNATIONAL RESERVES AND ...</p> <a class="btn btn-primary" href="/UtMz-zTK2/reservas-internacionales-y-liquidez-en-moneda-extranjera-directrices-para-una-planilla-de-datos.html">More info »</a> </div> </div> </div> <div class="mb-4"> <div class="media"> <img class="mr-3 mt-2" src="/thumbs/1/cb86daa3c2e210b998bb1f3b3aebee57.jpg" alt="G:\COMP\PHSA\PHSA.bel"> <div class="media-body"> <h3> <a href="/49t6R6n8B/gcompphsaphsabel.html">G:\COMP\PHSA\PHSA.bel</a> </h3> <p>G:\COMP\PHSA\PHSA-MERGED.XML PUBLIC HEALTH SERVICE ACT [As Amended Through P.L. 115–408, Enacted December 31, 2018] References in brackets ¿ ø¿ ø are to title 42, United States Code TITLE I—SHORT TITL...</p> <a class="btn btn-primary" href="/49t6R6n8B/gcompphsaphsabel.html">More info »</a> </div> </div> </div> <div class="mb-4"> <div class="media"> <img class="mr-3 mt-2" src="/thumbs/1/137d8ed46710bdc988704d5007e3cb43.jpg" alt="AndersBehringBreivikManifesto"> <div class="media-body"> <h3> <a href="/Nc3OdcR2e/andersbehringbreivikmanifesto.html">AndersBehringBreivikManifesto</a> </h3> <p>2011 , London – By Andrew Berwick</p> <a class="btn btn-primary" href="/Nc3OdcR2e/andersbehringbreivikmanifesto.html">More info »</a> </div> </div> </div> </div> </div> </div> </div> <script type="text/javascript" src="//s7.addthis.com/js/300/addthis_widget.js#pubid=ra-5cc342bdc5d5f486"></script> <footer class="text-muted"> <div class="container"> <p class="float-right"> <a href="#">Back to top</a> </p> <p>2019 © DocMimic - <a href="/privacy">Privacy Policy</a> - <a href="/tos">Terms of Service</a></p> </div> </footer> <script src="https://code.jquery.com/jquery-3.3.1.slim.min.js" integrity="sha384-q8i/X+965DzO0rT7abK41JStQIAqVgRVzpbzo5smXKp4YfRvH+8abtTE1Pi6jizo" crossorigin="anonymous"></script> <script src="https://cdnjs.cloudflare.com/ajax/libs/popper.js/1.14.7/umd/popper.min.js" integrity="sha384-UO2eT0CpHqdSJQ6hJty5KVphtPhzWj9WO1clHTMGa3JDZwrnQq4sF86dIHNDz0W1" crossorigin="anonymous"></script> <script src="https://stackpath.bootstrapcdn.com/bootstrap/4.3.1/js/bootstrap.min.js" integrity="sha384-JjSmVgyd0p3pXB1rRibZUAYoIIy6OrQ6VrjIEaFf/nJGzIxFDsf4x0xIM+B07jRM" crossorigin="anonymous"></script> <script src="//cdnjs.cloudflare.com/ajax/libs/cookieconsent2/3.1.0/cookieconsent.min.js"></script> <script> window.addEventListener("load", function(){ window.cookieconsent.initialise({ "palette": { "popup": { "background": "#252e39" }, "button": { "background": "#14a7d0" } }, "theme": "classic" })}); </script> </body> </html>